U. S. RIFLE CALIBER .30, M1 - 9th Infantry Division_M1_1951.pdfU. S. RIFLE CALIBER .30, M1 United States Government Printing Office Washington: 1951 . DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE

MHI TMENT OF THECopy 3 FIELD MANUAL VF 22

MENT OF THE AIR A 3 gOTECHNICAL ORDER

U. S. RIFLECALIBER .30, M1

DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE AIR FORCEOctober 1951

FM 23-5/ TO 39A -SAC-llThis manual supersedes FM 23-5, 30 July 1943, including C1, 21 March 1944;C2, 1 December 1944; C3, 24 November 1948; Paragraph 3, Training CircularNo. 9, Department of the Army, 6 July 1949; Paragraph 9, Training CircularNo. 10, Department of the Army, 20 July 1949; and Training Circular No. 5,Department of the Army, 4 April 1950.

U. S. RIFLECALIBER .30, M1

United States Government Printing Office

Washington: 1951 .

DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMYAND THE AIR FORCE

WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 2 October, 1951FM 23-5/TO 39A-5AC-11, is published for the infor-

mation and guidance of all concerned.

[AG 474.1 (8 Jun 51) ]1

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARIES OF THE ARMY AND

THE AIR FORCE:

OFFICIAL: J. LAWTON COLLINSWM. E. BERGIN Chief of StaffMajor General, USA United States ArmyThe Adjutant General

OFFICIAL: HOYT S. VANDENBERGK. E. THIEBAUD Chief of StaffColonel, USAF United States Air ForceAir Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

Army:Tech Svc (1); Arm & Svc Bd (2); AFF (40);

AA Comd (2); OS Maj Comd (20) exceptFECOM (200); Base Comd (10); MDW (10);Log Comd (5); A (25); CHQ (10); D (5); B(3); R 2,5,7,17 (5); Bn 2,3,5,6,7,9,10,11,17, 19,44(5); C 5, 7,17,57 (20), 2,6,44 (15), 3,9,10,11,19(10); Sch (5) except USMA (50); PMS&T(2); ARMA (1); Mil Mis (1).

For explanation of distribution formula, see SR310-90-1.

ii

CONTENTS

Paragraphs PageCHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION ............................ 1-4 2

2. MECHANICAL TRAINING

Section I. Disassembly and assembly .... 5-24 9II. How the rifle works.............. 25-32 57

III. Operation ...............-................ 33-44 72IV. Immediate action and stop-

pages .................................. 45-47 82V. Care and cleaning .................. 48-57 83

VI. Spare parts, appendages,and accessories ................- . 58-60 102

VII. Ammunition ...... .................... 61-70 115

CHAPTER 3. MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Section I. General ........................... 71-73 126II. Preparatory marksmanship

training ............................ 74-138 127III. Courses .................................. 139-147 253IV. Range firing .................-...... 148-151 274V. Subjects common to instruc-

tion and record firing........ 152-162 280VI. Instruction firing .................. 163-180 284

VII. Record firing ..-...................... 181-187 297VIII. Pit operation ..................... 188-198 307

IX. Equipment and targets ........ 199-200 314X. Small-bore firing .................. 201-203 318

CHAPTER 4. MARKSMANSHIP, MOVING GROUNDAND AERIAL TARGETS

Section I. General ...... : ........................... 204-206 322II. Moving personnel ................. . 207-208 323

III. Moving vehicles .................... 209-210 325IV. Aerial target ......................... 211-212 328

CHAPTER 5. TECHNIQUE OF FIRE OF THERIFLE SQUAD

Section I. General .................................... 213 331II. Range determination .......... 214-217 331

Hil

Paragraphs PageIII. Rifle and automatic rifle fire

and its effect ...................... 218-223 337IV. Fire commands ...................... 224-227 344V. Application of fire by the

rifle squad .......................... 228-234 355VI. Landscape target firing........ 235-240 368

VII. Field target firing .................. 241-247 378

CHAPTER 6. ADVICE TO INSTRUCTORS

Section I. General .................................... 248-253 387II. Subject schedules and train-

ing notes for rifle marks-manship training .............. 254-289 390

III. Subject schedule and train-ing notes for familiariza-tion rifle marksmanshiptraining .............................. 290-297 414

IV. Mechanical training ............ 298-302 419V. Preparatory training .......... 303-319 422

VI. Transition and moving tar-get firing ............................ 320-326 455

VII. Technique of fire .................. 327-337 467VIII. Landscape target firing........ 338-341 478

IX. Field target firing ............. .. 342-345 479X. Training aids ........................ 346-349 491

CHAPTER 7. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................... 350-353 500

APPENDIX I. REFERENCES ................................. .............. 507

II. DESTRUCTION OF ORDNANCEMATRIEL . ................................. .............. 509

INDEX ........................................ .............. 512

iv

This manual supersedes FM 23-5, 30 July 1943, includ-ing C1 21 March 1944; C2, 1 December 1944; C3, 24November 1948; paragraph 3, Training Circular No. 9,Department of the Army, 6 July 1949; paragraph 9,Training Circular No. 10, Department of the Army, 20July 1949; and Training Circular No. 5, Department ofthe Army, 4 April 1950.

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this manual is to teach you howto fire your rifle correctly and how to take care ofit, both in the field and in garrison. By masteringthe material in this manual, you can help yourselfto become a good rifleman and a better memberof your team-the rifle squad.

2. IMPORTANCE OF RIFLE TRAINING

a. The rifle is the basic weapon of the UnitedStates Army. Although you use it to shoot at abull's eye (fig. 1) today, your target tomorrowmay be the enemy. For that reason there is nopart of shooting that is about right. In combat,you either HIT or you MISS, and your own lifeas well as the lives of other men of your unitmay depend on your skill as a rifleman.

b. On the battlefield your target is almost al-ways a moving one and it may be very hard tosee. Learning how to hit your battlefield targetis the most important part of your training.

Figure 1. Bull's-eye-Enemy.

Naturally, your training starts with the rifle it-self (fig. 2). First you learn how it works, howto care for it, and what it can do. Next you learnhow to fire at a fixed target on the range. Yourlast step is firing under battlefield conditions.

c. The rifle marksmanship training that youwill be given is battle-tested and thorough. Ifyou learn and practice the right shooting habits,you will become a good shot. As a rifleman, youmust strive to be an expert. Do not be satisfiedto qualify only as a marksman.

2

I-I: 1 -

Z .

o Ir iU)LU~~U

m m

0

c ( 3~~~~~~~~~~>I

3. DESCRIPTION OF THE RIFLE

a. The U. S. rifle, caliber .30, M1 is a clip-fed,gas-operated, air-cooled, semiautomatic shoulderweapon. This mean that you insert into the re-ceiver a metal clip containing a maximum ofeight rounds; that the power needed to load andcock the rifle for each succeeding round comesfrom the expanding gases of the previous round;that the air cools the barrel; and that the riflefires one round each time you squeeze the trigger.

b. The rifle has a fixed (immovable) frontsight and a movable rear sight that can be movedup or down and right or left. Thus, you can ad-just the sight for long or short ranges or to takecare of a wind that might otherwise blow thebullet off its course to the target. At ranges over500 yards, a battlefield target is hard for theaverage rifleman to hit. Therefore, 500 yards is

GROOVE LAN E

Figure 3. The bacrrel of the rifle.

4

considered the maximum effective range, eventhough the rifle is accurate at much greaterranges.

c. After examining your rifle to make sure thatit is not loaded, look down the bore (fig. 3). Theribs that stand out between the grooves in thebore are called the lands. The grooves and landsare called rifling. This rifling makes the bulletrotate during its flight toward the target. Thisrotation prevents the bullet from tumbling inflight and causes it to follow a uniform courseto the target. The grooves and lands make onecomplete turn in 10 inches of barrel length.

d. You will want to know the following factsabout your rifle:

Weight, without bayonet............ 9.5 poundsWeight, with bayonet.................. 10.5 poundsLength, without bayonet .....- . 43.6 inchesLength, with bayonet ...........-.... 53.4 inchesTrigger pull, minimum................ 4.5 poundsTrigger pull, maximum ............. 7.5 poundsBarrel:

Length ....................................... 24 inchesApproximate normal cham-

ber pressure .................. 50,000 lbs. persquare inch

Sight radius (distance fromfront sight to rear sight) ...- 27.9 inches

Rifling:Number of grooves................ 4Twist ............-........ Uniform, right hand,

one turn in 10 inches

5

4. FIRE POWER

When you squeeze the trigger, the round isfired, the empty case is ejected, the hammer iscocked, a new round is inserted into the chamber,and the rifle is made ready to fire again-all inabout one eight-hundredth of a minute. This fastmechanical action allows you, or a group of rifle-men, to deliver a large number of aimed shotsin a very short time on any target within effectiverange.

CHAPTER 2

MECHANICAL TRAINING

Section I. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

5. TRAINING

Your rifle is only as good as the care you giveit. Rust and dirt cause more wear than actualfiring. The officers and noncommissioned officersof your unit will teach you how to take the rifleapart, how to clean it, and how to put it together.This is commonly called field stripping. In train-ing, feel free to ask the instructor questions onany point that you do not understand.

6. CARE OF THE RIFLE

Your rifle has been designed so that it may betaken apart and put together easily. No force isneeded if you strip it correctly. As you removethe parts (fig. 4) from the rifle, lay them on aclean flat surface such as a table or shelter halfin the same order that you remove them. Thiskeeps you from losing any parts and helps youto assemble your rifle because you replace theparts in reverse order.

7. NOMENCLATURE

You will learn the names of the parts of yourrifle during your instruction in field stripping.As your instructor names the parts, repeat themto yourself, and name each part as you remove

7

F, ;

- Fa

31 A

Ft5 -rs Pa

z~~~~~~~~~~~g SJ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~4 5

i c B~~0P~z_ ___

8 ~-.

it and as you replace it. You will find that theparts generally are named for the job they per-form. For example, the trigger guard actuallyguards the trigger so that your hands or someother object will not accidentally brush againstthe trigger and trip it.

8. DISASSEMBLY

a. You will be permitted to disassemble onlycertain parts of your rifle, not because the dis-assembly of some of the parts is beyond your abil-ity to learn, but because constant disassemblycauses extra wear. Also, some parts of your riflerequire special tools for disassembly.

b. Study the following chart. The left handcolumn shows those parts that you may disas-semble alone. The right hand column shows thoseparts that only ordnance personnel may disas-semble. The center columns indicate those partsthat you may remove when supervised.

Disassemblysupervised by

Disassembly Individual Ordnanceauthorized soldier Noncom- personnel

missioned Com-officer or missionedartificer officer

INTO THREE MAINGROUPS ---------- X

BARREL AND RE-CEIVER GROUP --- X

Except:Gas cylinder ---------- ............ X(See note below.)Gas cylinder lock- -- __ X XClip latch and pin ----- . ....... X XRear sight- - XSlide from follower_-__-- ___- -------- -- XAccelerator from the-operating rod catch -......................... X

Front sight XSTOCK GROUP-- N- X XTRIGGER HOUSING

GROUP -.. ...X X X ---Except:

Sear from trigger -............. X

Note.. After extensive range firing, field exercises, prolongedexposure to inclement weather, or immersion in water (par-ticularly salt water), the gas cylinder may be removed forcleaning. The removal, care and cleaning, and the replace-ment of the gas cylinder is made under the direct Supervisionof an officer.

9. FIELD STRIPPING

You must learn the steps of field stripping sowell that you can do them in the dark. You canfield strip your rifle by using only the combina-tion tool or a dummy cartridge. Learn to knowthe combination tool, because you will use it many

10

0

L04 0

cr ~ K·Zls~& W 1

times. In combat, you may use a live round ifthe combination tool is not available.

Caution: When using a live round, use only thetip of the bullet.

10. METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

Follow the step-by-step explanation in disas-sembling the rifle. It is disassembled into thethree main groups first (fig. 5). After this, thebarrel and receiver group and the trigger housinggroup are disassembled further.

11. THE THREE MAIN GROUPS-

a. The three main groups are the trigger hous-ing group, the barrel and receiver group, and thestock group.

b. To disassemble the rifle into the three maingroups, grasp it with the left hand so that thebase of the trigger housing is included in yourgrip. Place the rifle butt against your left thigh,sights to the left. With the thumb and forefingerof your right hand, pull downward and outwardon the trigger guard. Swing the trigger guardout as far as it will go. Lift out the trigger hous-ing group (fig. 6).

c. With your left hand, grasp the rear of thereceiver and raise the stock. With your righthand, give a downward blow, grasping the smallof the stock. This will separate the two groups.(fig. 7).

12

o~~~~~~~~~

Figure 6. Removing the trigger housing group.

13

Figure 7. Separating the barrel and receiver groupfrom the stock group.

12. BARREL AND RECEIVER GROUP

a. Place the barrel and receiver group on thetable with the sights down, muzzle pointing tothe left. Locate the follower rod. With the thumband forefinger of your left hand, grasp the fol-lower rod and disengage it from the follower armby moving it toward the muzzle. You may haveto lift up on the follower assembly. Remove thefollower rod and operating rod spring by with-drawing them to the right (fig. 8). Do not sepa-rate these parts.

b. Using the drift of your combination tool, orthe point of a dummy cartridge, push out thefollower arm pin from the far side of the receivertoward your body (fig. 9).

14

r

b,u

I

2,o

"cit"Jox

bo,

:$d

c

�'c3lr,O

h

i,o si13: i oaS 3

cr,

15

Zs

lo

A

16~~~~~~~~~~~~~a

e

C)

17

.tD

1~~~~~~~1

Ok

ToA>

B

o,

tr

1~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~T

17

Be

'-4

4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~''

181

:;i : _

L--l WW

OPERATING ROD

FORWARD EDGE OF :WINDAGE KNOB

Figure 12. Removing the operating rod.

19

c. Grasp the bullet guide, follower arm, andthe operating rod catch assembly, and lift themout of the receiver together (fig. 10). Separateand arrange these parts from left to right in thefollowing order: follower arm, operating rodcatch assembly, and bullet guide.

d. Reach down into the receiver and lift outthe follower assembly (fig. 11). Do not separatethe slide from the follower.

e. Turn the barrel and receiver group over sothat the sights are up, muzzle pointing away fromyou. With your left hand, raise the rear of thegroup. With the right hand, pull the operatingrod to the rear until the rear of the handle isdirectly under the forward edge of the windageknob. Grasp the handle with the thumb and fore-finger of the right hand.; and with an upward andoutward pressure, disengage the guide lug of theoperating rod through its dismount notch on thereceiver. Remove the operating rod (fig. 12).

Note. The operating rod has been intentionally bent.Do not attempt to straighten it.

f. Grasp the bolt by the operating lug and,while sliding it from rear to front, lift it upwardand outward to the right front with a slight ro-tating motion (fig. 13).

g: Hold the bolt in your left hand with theoperating lug to the right so that the little fingeris under the tang of the firing pin and the thumbis over the ejector. This is important because theejector may fly out and become lost if you do nothold it with your thumb. Insert the screwdriver

20

Figure 13. Removing the bolt.

blade of the combination tool between the extrac-tor and the lower cartridge seat flange. Twist thescrewdriver blade against the extractor and un-seat it (fig. 14). The ejector will snap up againstyour left thumb. Remove the extractor and theextractor spring and plunger. Lift out the ejectorand ejector spring. Do not separate the ejector

21

LOWER CARTRiDGESEAT FLANGE

EJECTOR

EXTRACTOR

EXTRACTOR PLUNGERAND SPRING

UPPER CARTRIDGE' SEAT FLANGE.(UNDER THUMB

Figure 14. Unseating the extractor.

from its spring nor the extractor plunger fromits spring (fig. 15).

h. Remove the firing pin from the rear of thebolt (fig. 16).

i. In figure 17, you see the parts of the. barreland receiver group that you have disassembledin the order in which they should be laid out.

13. REAR SIGHT(fig. 18)

a. You may disassemble the rear sight onlywhen supervised by a commissioned. officer. Todisassemble it, place the barrel and receiver groupon a flat surface so that the sights are up. Lowerthe aperture as far as it will go. Check the read-

22

ffi 9~~EJTRt AND SP0 .tNG i

|~~~~~~~~::' ok t_ E ~~~~~~~i-,/w i

___~~~EC 0 AN S > §

Figure 15. Removing the ejector and spring.

23

SOLT

!·: .· VlB- - FIRING PIN

Figure 16. Removing the firing pin.

24

OPERATING ROD

FOLLOWER ARMPIN

FOLLOWER ARM EXTRACTOR' PERAthiN ord I i s asl .

SPRING i it

plac t h e r ear sight eleRvting PIN

j6 EJQ~i) |ECTOR AND SPRING

OPERATING ROD EXTRACTOR SPRINGCATCH ASSEMBLY AND PLUNDER

XOLLUDWER ROD

Figure 17. Parts of the barrel and receiver group intheir order of disassembly.

ing on the rear sight elevating knob and write itdown. You will need this reading when you re-place the rear sight elevating knob.

b. Place the barrel and receiver group on itsright side, muzzle to the left. Using the combina-tion tool, remove the rear sight elevating knobscrew and the elevating knob. Turn the barrel andreceiver group on its left side. The rear sightlocking nut can be removed with a pair of pliers.

Note. The elevating pinion has been counterbored onthe threaded end to permit spreading after assembly.Frequent disassembly will cause stripping of the threads

25

zo

}- z ·

# Z Y # O* >

0*

0 0

S . :e

0 0

wmx

O > S t

Figure 18. Parts of the rear sight.

26

w Z

Figure 18. Parts of the rear sight.

26

on the pinion; the rear sight, therefore, is disassembledonly to replace parts or to clean it after use in very badweather such as a heavy rain, sand and dust storms, orsubmersion in salt water.

Unscrew and remove the rear sight locking nut.Unscrew and remove the windage knob, takingcare that the rear sight nut lock and spring,which are inside the windage knob, do not be-come lost. Tap the windage knob lightly to re-move the nut lock and spring. Turn the barreland receiver group-so that the sights are up, themuzzle pointing to the front. Pull out the rearsight elevating pinion from the left side of thereceiver. Pull the aperture up about one-halfinch. Place your right thumb under the top ofthe aperture and push forward and upward toremove the aperture cover and base. Separatethe rear sight cover from the rear sight base.

c. The new modified rear sight eliminates thecross bar on the rear sight locking nut and thecounterbored end of the pinion (fig. 19). Themodified sight may be disassembled'as follows:Run the aperture all the way down and recordthe reading, as you will use this reading, whenassembling the sight. Hold the elevating knoband unscrew the nut in the center of the wind-age knob with the forked end of the combinationtool or the rim of a cartridge. You can loosenthis nut but you cannot remove it, so there is nodanger of losing it. Withdraw the elevating knobto the left, removing the elevating knob assembly,including the pinion shaft, elevating knob andscrew, and other parts, all of which are made intoone piece and cannot be separated. (Like the rear

27

I o

'4:D

03

fw~ ~ "

4: L I

o~~ P

i ;.

o ~ !

28

a: %~~~~~~~~~~~~~~40 - 7d

2:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r

U)~~

Lu ~ ~ _..

28 ~ ~ ~ U)2

sight nut, the elevating knob screw can be un-screwed until it is loose, but it cannot be re-moved.) Unscrew the windage knob until it canbe removed. The aperture, base, and cover areremoved as already described for the other typesight.

14. CLIP LATCH

You may disassemble the clip latch only whensupervised. To disassemble it, place the receiveron its right side with the muzzle pointing to theleft (fig. 20). With the thumb of your left hand,depress the clip latch. This relieves the tension.of the clip latch spring. Using the point of abullet or the drift of your combination tool, pushforward on the clip latch pin and unseat it. Re-move it by withdrawing it with your finger tips.Lift out the clip latch with the clip latch springattached. Place the parts on a smooth surfacein the order that you remove them.

15. TRIGGER HOUSING GROUP

a. You may disassemble the trigger housinggroup only when supervised. To disassemble it,close and latch the trigger guard. Squeeze thetrigger, allowing the hammer to go forward. Holdthe trigger housing group with the first fingerof the right hand on the trigger and the thumbagainst the sear. Place the front of the triggerhousing against a firm surface. Squeeze the trig-ger with your finger and push forward on thesear with the thumb. At the same time, using

29

:~~~~~

am'~~~~~

i~~~

30~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~l

the drift of the combination tool or the tip of adummy cartridge, push out the trigger pin fromleft to right (fig. 21). Slowly release the pres-sure with your finger and thumb. This allowsthe hammer spring to expand.

b. Lift out the trigger assembly. Remove andseparate the hammer spring plunger, hammerspring, and the hammer spring housing (fig. 22).

c. Using the combination tool or a dummyround, push out the hammer pin from left toright. Move the hammer a little to the rear andlift it out (fig. 23).

TRIGGER PIN

Figure 21. Removing the trigger pin.

31

T RIGGER ASSEMbLY

H" AMMsR RGS

HAMMER SPRINGAND PLUNGER

Figure 22. Removing the trigger assembly, hammer springhousing, hammer spring, and hammer spring plunger.

!:AMME R PIN

Figure 23. Removing the hammer pin and hammer.

32

d. Unlatch the trigger guard. Lay the triggerhousing on its right side. With the drift of yourcombination tool, or the point of a bullet, pushout the stud of the safety from its hole. Removethe safety by lifting it from its slot in the baseof the trigger housing (fig. 24).

SAFETY STUD

Figure 24. Unseating the safety.

e. Hold the rear of the trigger housing withyour left hand and the trigger guard with yourright hand. Swing the trigger guard down intothe opened position. Slide the trigger guard tothe rear until the wings of the trigger guard arealined with the safety stud hole. Rotate the trig-ger guard to the right and upward with your

33

right hand until the hammer stop inside of theright wing clears the base of the trigger housing.Remove the trigger guard (fig. 25).

SAFETY STUD HOLE TRIGGER WING HOLE

\ /

0i7 BTRIGGER GUARD

Figure 25. Removing the trigger guard.

f. Lay the trigger housing on its right side.Insert the point of a bullet or the screw driverblade of the combination tool in the hole by theloop of the clip ejector. Push downward on theclip ejector and unseat it (fig. 26).

16. GAS CYLINDER

a. Using the screw driver blade of your com-bination tool, unscrew and remove the gas cylin-der lock screw (fig. 27) with valve assembly. Ifyou are supervised, you may now unscrew andremove the gas cylinder lock (fig. 28).

34

0s 0~ x

r~~~~

I~~~ SS i: a

~i :If

i. _. "

0jEo .

.0000 ff 0

35

b. Do not remove the gas cylinder except whennecessary. Before removing the gas cylinder, besure that the operating rod has been removed.To remove the gas cylinder, tap lightly towardthe muzzle on the bayonet stud with a piece ofwood or similar soft object until the gas cylinderis loosened. Remove the gas cylinder (fig. 29).Be careful that the splines are not burred or dam-

Figure 27. Removing the gas cylinder lock screw withvalve assembly.

36

Figure 28. Removing the gas cylinder lock.

aged. Do not remove the front sight or make anyattempt to adjust the front sight.

Note. On rifles With gas cylinders that have been modi-fied by a cut that extends from the front sight base dove-tail downward to the lower splines, it is necessary toloosen the front sight screw before attempting to removethe gas cylinder. Otherwise, the barrel and gas cylindermay be damaged.

17. ASSEMBLING

Your rifle and its component groups are as-sembled in the reverse order of their disassembly;

37

Figure 29. Removing the gas cylinder.

for this reason you lay out the parts in the orderthat you remove them.

18. REPLACING THE GAS CYLINDER, GAS CYLINDERLOCK, AND THE GAS CYLINDER LOCK SCREW

a. Place the gas cylinder over the barrel. Makesure that the splines are alined with their grooves.

38

Replace the gas cylinder as far as it will moveeasily. If tapping is necessary, tap lightly on thebayonet stud with a piece of wood.

b. Engage the threads of the gas cylinder lockwith those on the barrel and screw it on by handuntil it is finger tight (do not -use a tool). If thelock is not aligned with the gas cylinder, do notforce it, but unscrew it until it is alined.

c. Replace the gas cylinder lock screw. Tighten'-by using the screw driver blade of your combi-nation tool. Keep this screw tight at all times, be-cause a loose gas cylinder lock screw may preventyour rifle from firing semiautomatically.

19. TRIGGER HOUSING GROUP

a. Hold the trigger housing in your right hand,with the left side down and the rear end to theright. Place the clip ejector in position in thetrigger housing with the short arm toward yourbody and the tip of the long arm in its slot infront of the trigger housing. The loop of the clipejector is positioned on top of its stud on the leftside of the trigger housing. With your rightthumb, hold the loop of the clip ejector on topof this stud. With the forefinger of your lefthand, hold the long arm up in its slot on thefront of the trigger housing. Place the tip ofyour left thumb between the long arm and thebase of the trigger housing and move the longarm toward your body, at the same time exertingpressure downward. The long arm of the clipejector will snap into the notch on the base ofthe trigger housing (fig. 30).

39

Figure 30. Replacing the clip ejector.

b. To replace the trigger guard, hold the trig-ger housing as shown in figure 25. Place thewings of the trigger guard astride the base of thetrigger housing so that the hammer stop, on theinside of the right wing, clears the base. Turnthe trigger guard down and to the left until theholes in the wings are under the safety stud hole.Slide the trigger guard forward until the holesin the wings are alined with the hammer pin hole.

c. Insert the finger piece of the safety throughits slot in the base of the trigger housing. To re-seat the safety stud in its hole in the triggerhousing, force the safety down against the pres-sure of the short arm of the clip ejector. Pushthe finger piece of the safety forward.

d. Insert the hammer loosely in position, hold-ing it halfway between the cocked and fired posi-tion. Be sure that the hammer toe clears the ham-mer stop on the right wing of the trigger guard.Aline the hammer pin holes in the hammer withthe holes in the trigger housing and trigger guard.

40

Be sure that the trigger guard is not latched.Insert the hammer pin from the right side. Movethe hammer to the fired position. Close and latchthe trigger guard.

e. Place the trigger housing group on the tablewith the base down and the rear end to the right.Assemble the hammer spring housing, hammerspring, and hammer spring plunger into one unit.Place the plunger in its seat on the hammer.Make sure that the open side of the hammerspring housing is toward the safety. (This isimportant because failure to do this prevents the

i . . l:

Figure 81. Replacement of the trigger assembly, hammerspring housing, hammer spring, and hammer springplunger.

41

safety from being used; also the sear will notfunction.) Hold these assembled parts in a raisedposition with the thumb and fingers of your lefthand. With your right hand, insert the triggerinto the trigger slot so that the notch at thecurved rear surface of the finger piece bearsagainst the rear of the slot in the trigger hous-ing. Place the wings of the hammer spring hous-ing astride the sear pin. With your right fore-finger on the trigger and the right thumb againstthe sear, apply pressure forward against the searand at the same time squeeze the trigger. Holdthe parts in this position and insert the triggerpin as far as its~head only (fig. 31).

f. To seat the head of the trigger pin, hold thetrigger housing group as shown in figure 32. Notethe direction the pin must be moved to be seated.By applying pressure with the thumb and fingers,

Figure 32. Seating the trigger pin.

42

aline the head of the trigger pin with the trig-ger pin holes. Seat the trigger pin by pressingon its head with the left thumb.

20. CLIP LATCH

Place the clip latch with the clip latch springattached in position on the left side of the re-ceiver and start replacing the clip latch pin fromthe front. Press in on the thumb piece of theclip latch to relieve the tension of the clip latchspring, and push the clip latch pin fully home.If the pin head is not fully seated, it will damagethe stock.

21. REAR SIGHT

a. Assemble the rear sight cover and rear sightbase into one unit. Place the rear lip of the sightcover in its slot at the rear end of the sightbracket. Press down against the front part ofthe sight cover, seating it in its slot in the frontend of the sight bracket. Insert the aperture inits slot in the rear sight base. Slide the apertureto its lowest position. Holding the rear sight baseforward against the rear sight cover, insert theelevating pinion through the left side of the re-ceiver, taking care that it meshes with the teethof the aperture. Insert the windage knob intothe right side of the receiver. Move the sight baseto the left until the index line shows at the leftedge of the windage gage. Screw the windageknob into the rear sight base until the zero markon the rear sight base is aligned with the center

43

line of the windage scale on the receiver. Laythe rifle on its left side. Place the rear sight nutlock spring and nut lock in position in the wind-age knob around the threaded end of the elevat-ing pinion, taking care that the flat cut on theelevating pinion is alined with the flat portion ofthe nut lock. Screw the rear sight nut onto theelevating pinion until the desired tension is ob-tained on both the elevating knob and the wind-age knob. When this nut is tightened too much,the elevating and windage knobs become lockedand cannot be turned. Lower the aperture as faras it will go by turning the elevating pinion.. Re-place the elevating knob and rotate it to the read-ing that was noted before the part was disas-sembled. Holding it in this position, replace theelevating knob screw. In tightening the elavat-ing knob screw, run the aperture up to its high-est position and set the screw as tightly as pos-sible. Now run the sight down and recheck theknob reading. Be careful when starting the rearsight locking nut on the pinion so that you do notdamage the threads. If you can remove the rearsight locking nut without using pliers or a smallwrench, the end of the pinion should be respread,using the punch that is provided for this purpose.A very light tap of a hammer is enough to ex-pand the end of the shaft. The company armorerartificer is authorized to do this.

b. To assemble the modified rear sight, firstreplace the base, cover, and aperture as describedfor the other sight. Screw the windage knob inuntil it takes hold and draws the base to the

44

center position on the windage gage. Insert theelevating knob and pinion shaft from the left,meshing the pinion with the teeth on the aper-ture. The flat portion of the elevating pinion shaftmust pass through a D-shaped hole in the lockwhich is located inside the windage knob assem-bly adjacent to the slotted rear sight nut. Withthe aperture all the way down, adjust the elevat-ing pinion until the, recorded setting (before dis-assembly) is on the rear sight. Screw in the rearsight nut with the forked end of the combinationtool. Screw it in as far as it will go, then turnit back a fraction of a turn until any change onthe rear sight clicks distinctly; the assembly isthen completed.

22. BARREL AND RECEIVER GROUP

a. To assemble the bolt, you may use the ex-tractor seating device on the combination tool,the soft leaded end of the chamber cleaning brush,or the point of a dummy or live cartridge. Whenthe extractor seating device is used properly, theextractor and ejector may be seated very easily.However, because some men have difficulty inlearning how to use this device and because youmust be able to assemble the bolt without the com-bination tool, two methods will be described.

(1) First method. Insert the firing pin inthe bolt, making sure that the tang ofthe firing pin enters its slot in the rearof the bolt. Grasp the bolt in your lefthand with the face of the bolt upwardand the operating lug to the right. Re-

45

TO THE RIGHT

Figure 33. Assembling the bolt, first method.

place the ejector and the ejector springinto the bolt with the ejector springdown. Turn the ejector so that the cutis toward the operating lug of the bolt.Replace the extractor spring and plunger(spring first) into their hole in the bolt.Put the stud of the extractor into itshole in the bolt. With your left thumbpress lightly on the extractor so that it

46

begins to ride over the extractor plunger.Grasp the chamber cleaning brush inyour right hand with a firm grip. Usethe tip of the brush the same way thatyou use a stick, a nail, the base or tipof a dummy round, or the tip of a liveround.

Caution: Do not use the primer endof a live round.

Using the soft leaded tip of the cleaningbrush, depress the ejector into the faceof the bolt,(fig. 33). With the thumb ofthe left hand, push the extractor into thebolt until it is fully seated.

(2) Second method. (Using the extractorseating device of the combination tool.)Replace the firing pin, ejector andspring, extractor plunger and spring,and the extractor as described in the

PRESS DOWN

PLACE DRIFT OFCOMBINATION TOOLIN LEFT GROOVE RIGHT LOCNGIN BOLT

OPERATING .LUG

LEFT LOCKING LUGEXTRACTOR

Figure 34. Assembling the bolt, second method.

47

preceding paragraph. Place the drift ofthe combination tool in the left grooveof the bolt and hold the combination toolat a right angle to the locking and oper-ating lugs of the bolt as shown in figure34. Press downward on the combinationtool until the ejector is forced into theface of the bolt then, with your leftthumb, press inward on the extractor,seating it.

Caution: In either method when as-sembling the bolt, be careful to keepyour face away from over the bolt be-cause the ejector might fly out fromunder the tool that you are using.

b. To replace the bolt (fig. 13), hold the barreland receiver with the sights up and the muzzlepointing away from you. Hold the bolt by theoperating lug so that the front end of the bolt is

PUSH DOWN

Figure 34-Continued.

48

slightly above and to the right of its extreme for-ward position in the receiver. Insert the rear endin its bearing on the bridge of the receiver. Ro-tate the bolt in a counterclockwise direction asfar as necessary to permit the tang of the firingpin to clear the top of the bridge. Guide the leftlocking lug of the bolt into its groove on the leftside of the receiver. Lower the right locking lugon its bearing and slide the bolt to its rearmostposition.

c. Place the barrel and receiver in front of youso that the sights are up and the muzzle is point-ing to the front. Tilt the barrel and receiver tothe left, then, holding the operating rod at thehandle, place the head of the piston into the gascylinder about three-eighths of an inch. Adjustthe operating rod so that the recess in the humpfits over the operating lug of the bolt (fig. 35).While applying pressure downward and inwardon the handle, move the operating rod forwarduntil the guide lug is engaged in its groove. Movethe bolt forward until it is closed.

d. Turn the barrel and receiver group so that'the sights are down. With the follower slidedown, replace the follower assembly so that itsguide ribs fit into their grooves in the receiver,the square hole in the follower to the rear. Theslide will now rest against the bolt.

e. With your left hand, replace the bullet guide(fig. 36) so that the shoulders of the bullet guidefit into their slots in the receiver and so that thehole in the toe of the bullet guide is in alinementwith the holes in the receiver.

49

OPERATING LUG

HUMP OFj t 6 OPERATING ROD

Figure 35. Replacing the operating rod.

50

RONT EDGE OF

Ni


BULLET GUIDE

r

Figure 36. Replacing the bullet guide.

f. With your right hand, swing up the lowerpart of the bullet guide slightly. With the lefthand, insert the long rear arm of the operatingrod catch assembly through the clearance cut inthe bullet guide. Make sure that the rear of thelong arm is underneath the front stud of the cliplatch which projects into the receiver (fig. 37).Lower the bullet guide into place. To test forcorrect assembly, press down on the front armsof the operating rod catch. When released, theyshould spring back into place.

g. Replace the follower arm by passing itsstudded end through the bullet guide and insert-ing the studs in the grooves in the follower (fig.

52

OPERATING ROD CATCH ASsMBLY

Figure 37. Replacing the operating rod catch assembly.

38). Place the forked end of the follower armastride the toe of the bullet guide. Aline theholes in the operating rod catch, follower arm,and bullet guide with those in the receiver. Re-place the follower arm pin.

h. Insert the operating rod spring into theoperating rod. Grasp the follower rod with thefingers of your left hand. Make sure that thehump of the follower rod is toward the barrel.Push toward the muzzle, compressing the operat-ing rod spring, and hook the claws of the followerrod with the front studs of the follower arm (fig.39). You may have to raise the follower assembly

53

F3LLOWER ARM

lOLLOWER ASSEMBLY

Figure 38. Replacing the follower arm.

a little to do this. Check to see that the hump ofthe follower rod is in the slot between the for-ward arms of the operating rod catch assembly.The straight part of the follower rod will thenbe parallel to the barrel.

23. ASSEMBLING THE THREE MAIN GROUPS

a. With the barrel and receiver group on thetable, sights down, pick up the stock group andlocate the U-shaped flange of the stock ferrule.

54

FOLLOWER ARM

FOLLOWER ROD

Figure 39. Replacing the follower rod and operatingrod spring.

U" SHAPED FLANGE

LOWER BAND

Figure 40. Replacing the stock on the barrel andreceiver group.

55

Hold the stock so that the sling is up. Engage thisU-shaped flange into the lower band, then lowerthe stock group down onto the barrel and receivergroup (fig. 40).

b. Unlatch and open the trigger guard; keep-ing the base of the trigger housing level, place itstraight down into the receiver, making sure thatthe locking lugs on the trigger guard enter therecesses in the receiver (fig. 41). Close and latchthe trigger guard.

LOCKING RECESS LOCUNG LUG

Figure 41. Replacing the trigger housing group.

24. TO TEST FOR CORRECT ASSEMBLY

To test the assembly of your rifle, pull the oper-ating rod to its rearmost position. The bolt shouldstay open. -Close the bolt and snap the safety toits locked position. Squeeze the trigger. The ham-mer should not fall. Push the safety forward andsqueeze the trigger. The hammer should fall;

56

Section II. HOW THE RIFLE WORKS

25. GENERAL

a. By taking your rifle apart and putting it to-gether, you have become familiar with its parts.Next, you must learn how these parts function.If you understand how your rifle works, you willbe able to clear any stoppages that may occur.This knowledge will also give you confidence inyour rifle and will enable you to keep it in work-ing order.

b. Each time a cartridge is fired, many partsinside the rifle work in a given order. This isknown as the cycle of functioning. This cycle isalmost the same in all semiautomatic weapons.

c. To help you understand the cycle of func-tioning, it is broken down into eight basic steps.Keep in mind that more than one step may beoccurring at the same time. The steps are listedbelow in the order that they begin.

(1) Feeding-moving the cartridge into thepath of the bolt.

(2) Chambering-moving the cartridge intothe chamber.

(3) Locking-locking the bolt in the re-ceiver.

(4) Firing--driving the firing pin forwardto strike the primer cap, which sets offthe cartridge.

(5) Unlocking-unlocking the bolt from thereceiver.

(6) Extraction-pulling the empty cartridgecase from the chamber.

57

(7) Ejection-throwing the empty cartridgecase from the rifle.

(8) Cocking-pushing the hammer into thecocked position.

.26. FUNCTION OF THE TRIGGER HOUSING GROUP

a. As the rifle begins to function when yousqueeze the trigger, you first learn how the trig-ger housing group works.

(1) Remove the trigger housing group (fig.42). Close and latch the trigger guardand cock the hammer. The hammer isheld in the cocked position by the trig-ger lugs which are engaged with thehammer hooks. Hold your left thumbover the hammer and slowly squeeze thetrigger. Notice how the trigger lugsmove forward, releasing the hammerhooks. The hammer is forced forwardby the expanding hammer spring (fig.43). This happens each time the triggeris squeezed if you release your fingerfrom the trigger after each shot is fired.

(2) However, there must also be a way ofstopping the hammer from going for-ward even if you keep your finger pressedon the trigger after each shot. This isdone by the sear, which catches on therear hammer hooks. Now squeeze thetrigger and hold it to the rear. Cockthe hammer slowly and see how the searcatches on the rear hammer hooks and

58

a:

I0 . 0 i {

4- 59

w m e

00

ix - Zi v--

59

Ul E

41

60~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

' ~ ~ ~ l~ "III LI SoL~~~~~~~~~ .W

.,'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r

~~~~~~~~~~ U~I .

- -. . _. .. _.. ._

60

holds the hammer back. Slowly releasethe trigger. As you do this, the sear willrelease the rear hammer hooks. Nowthe hammer hooks catch on the triggerlugs and hold the hammer in the cockedposition. This combination holds thehammer to the rear each time a roundis fired.

b. As you apply pressure on the trigger, itmoves to the rear. This movement is divided intoa slack portion and a squeeze portion. Cock thehammer and squeeze the trigger lightly and noticethat it moves easily until the sear touches the rearhammer hooks. This movement, until the searcontacts the rear hammer hooks, is called theslack. Increased pressure is required to move thetrigger from the time the sear contacts the rearhammer hooks until the trigger lugs release thehammer hooks. This second movement of thetrigger which requires heavier pressure is calledthe squeeze.

c. To see how the safety works, cock the ham-mer and push the finger piece of the safety to therear or safe position. As you push the safety tothe rear, you force the hook of the safety overthe safety lug on the hammer. This locks thehammer in the cocked position. Notice that thehammer hooks are below, and not engaged with,the trigger lugs. Squeeze the trigger. The ham-mer cannot fall. Notice also that the trigger stopof the safety now blocks the left trigger lug, pre-venting the trigger from being moved. This is anautomatic safety feature designed to block the

61

trigger in the event of a broken hook on thesafety.

d. A safety feature has been built into the rifleto prevent it from being fired unless the bolt isin its locked position. This is done by the actionof the bolt camming lug on the hammer againstthe cocking cam of the bolt. Place the rear ofthe bolt against the hammer; notice how the boltcamming lug fits into the cocking cam of the bolt.Note that if the bolt is not completely rotated tothe right into the locked position, the bolt cam-ming lug will not fit in the cocking cam and thatthe hammer will not hit the tang of the firingpin. If the bolt is not fully locked and the ham-mer moves forward, the bolt camming lug will ro-tate the bolt to the right. This locks the bolt be-fore the hammer can hit the tang of the firingpin. During unlocking, the instant the bolt startsto rotate to the left, the hammer is pushed awayfrom the tang of the firing pin by the action ofthe cocking cam against the bolt camming lug.

e. Another important part of the trigger hous-ing group is the clip ejector. By placing an emptyclip in the trigger housing group, you can see theaction of the clip ejector in ejecting the emptyclip.

27. FUNCTIONING OF THE RIFLE

The action of the working parts as a full clipof ammunition is loaded into the rifle and duringthe functioning cycle is divided into four phaseswith certain steps occurring in each phase. Youmust remember that some of these actions are

62

going on at the same time; they are listed belowin the order in which they start.

a. The first phase is the ACTION ON LOAD-ING A FULL CLIP.

(1) Movement of the follower, follower arm,and follower rod.

(2) Action of the accelerator and operatingrod catch assembly.

(3) Action of the clip latch.

b. The second phase is the ACTION DURINGTHE FORWARD MOVEMENT OF THE OPER-ATING ROD.

(1) Chambering.(2) Locking.(3) Alinement of the firing pin.(4) Termination of the forward movement.

c. The third phase is the ACTION DURINGTHE REARWARD MOVEMENT OF THEOPERATING ROD.

(1) Action of the gas.(2) Action of the operating rod and spring.(3) Unlocking.(4) Withdrawal of the firing pin.(5) Extraction.(6) Ejection.(7) Cocking.(8) Feeding.(9) Termination of the rearward movement.

d. The fourth phase is the ACTION FOLLOW-ING THE FIRING OF THE. LAST ROUND.

(1) Action of the follower, follower arm, andfollower rod.

63

(2) Action of the operating rod catch as-sembly.

(3) Action of the clip latch.(4) Ejection of the empty clip.

28. STARTING POSITION

a. In paragraph 26 you learned how the trig-ger, the safety, the hammer, and the clip ejectordo their work. Now you are ready to learn whathappens when a clip of ammunition is placed inthe receiver.

b. Place the barrel and receiver group in frontof you and pull the operating rod handle all theway to' the rear. Notice that the bolt stays openwhen no ammunition is in the rifle, that is, unlessyou purposely let it go forward on an emptychamber. The parts are now in position for youto load a full clip into the receiver (fig. 44).

c. Study the relationship of the parts to eachother. The operating rod and bolt are in the rear-most position. The follower is all the way up inthe receiver, because the compressed operatingrod spring is exerting pressure through the fol-lower rod and follower arm, against the follower.The hump of the follower rod is touching the450 camming surface of the operating rod catch,pushing it toward the barrel and engaging itsundercut hook with the hooks on the operatingrod. This keeps the bolt and operating rod to therear against the pressure of the compressed oper-ating rod spring. The rear stud of the clip latchis pulled back into its slot in the receiver, andthe clip latch spring is compressed because of

64

10W

'Ow ,u,

0 I-ol.., wu~~~~w Im

to ·

Cm o

L0

az I

00.

oa~~~~~~~~~~h OW hi

YIU ~ ~ ~~~~ 2 IOU 0ca

x~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

65

'Z YZL Z, W. o". 3.~~~

'C ,WXFLW ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ u

't 3E :

W>. omu"WA. 5 ;3: m Z (C W W

X r.L l ZW, rd

ni a

wai cr~~~~~~~~~~~~6

pressure exerted on the front stud of the cliplatch by the long rear arm of the operating rodcatch assembly.

29. ACTION ON LOADING A FULL CLIPa. Movement of the Follower, Follower Arm,

and Follower Rod. By placing a full clip on topof the follower and pressing down on the clip,the follower is depressed. This action moves thefollower arm down, rotating around the followerarm pin. Since the follower arm is connected tothe follower rod, it pushes the follower rod to-ward the muzzle, moving the hump of the fol-lower rod away from the 450 camming surface ofthe operating rod catch.

b. Action of the Accelerator and OperatingRod Catch Assembly. As the follower reaches itslowest point in the receiver, the square shoulderof the follower arm contacts the rear lip of theaccelerator, forcing it toward the barrel. Betweenits lip and the point where it is fastened by itspin to the operating rod catch, the acceleratorbears on and pivots about the toe of the bulletguide. Thus as the lip of the accelerator is forcedtoward the barrel, the operating rod catch isforced away from the barrel. The undercut hookof the operating rod catch is disengaged from thehooks of the operating rod, letting the bolt andoperating rod go forward under the action of theexpanding operating rod spring., The acceleratorplays no other part in functioning except whenloading a full clip of ammunition as just described.

c. Action of the Clip Latch. As the forwardend of the operating rod catch moves downward

66

and away from the barrel, the long rear arm ofthe catch moves upward and away from the frontstud of the clip latch. This allows the clip latchspring to expand and force the rear stud of theclip latch into the notch of the clip. The rearstud of the clip latch holds the clip in the receiveragainst the action of the compressed clip ejector.The operating rod catch is held away from thebarrel by the front stud of the clip latch whichis continually pushing upward against the longrear arm. This allows the bolt to move freelyback and forth until the last round is fired (fig.45). Load a clip of dummy rounds in the receiverseveral times and carefully notice how each partworks.

30. ACTION DURING THE FORWARD MOVEMENT OFTHE OPERATING ROD

a. The Clip is Now in Place. Pull the operat-ing rod all the way to the rear and hold it there.(If dummy rounds are not available for thisstudy, allow the operating rod to go forward ashort distance until the operating rod catch nolonger holds it to the rear.) The compressedoperating rod spring provides the force for theforward movement.

b. Chambering. As the operating rod and bolt,pushed by the compressed operating rod spring,move forward, the bolt strips off the top roundin the clip and shoves it into the chamber. Whenthe bolt reaches its forward position, the rim ofthe cartridge is gripped by the extractor, and thebase of the cartridge forces the ejector into thebolt, thus compressing the ejector spring.

67

~OO~' Wz-Uao~O: \· < e:OJ~ -~

WZ~~~~~~~~ZzOZUW ftJ

:iz - m 0 >

X~~~~~wEO~~~~

O~U iIO

~~~bJ4 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ <O V

~uwzo:I?0O. zWZ 1 uj ZiiiO

o... .o.

x X- 0 zU Iw -

oW zO~U

; - Z Z ~ 0 '

o~~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~,<-- a ~

o -. u o

mux~w~aw jd-03 ow.

-Z Jz o I zZO

o~w

mw -O '. -, 1 m

s~~~if

-ZN

WOWMOUO, Oulw u:g ;i · ·

Z, _zW o D 44O.OIW

~0-

0<

68 UZ310

z~ O '-'L.e u

z N,

K8~

a. 3:UF'Cl r3

~w . .

P I

it;

68~~~~~~~~

c. Locking. When the bolt is all the way for-ward, the rear camming surface in the hump ofthe operating rod forces the operating lug of thebolt downward, causing the bolt to rotate clock-wise. The bolt is locked by the locking lugs. onboth sides of the bolt, engaging in the lockingrecesses in the receiver.

d. Alinement of the Firing Pin. Slightly be-fore the bolt reaches its foremost position, thetang of the firing pin contacts the bridge of thereceiver, stopping the forward movement of thefiring pin. When the bolt is turned and fullylocked, the tang of the firing pin is lined up withthe slot in the bridge of the receiver and may bedriven forward by the hammer. This is a safetyfeature to make sure that the bolt is fully lockedbefore the live round can be fired. Should thehammer fall before the bolt is fully locked, thebolt camming lug on the hammer will strike thecocking cam on the bolt causing the bolt torotate to its locked position.

e. Termination of the Forward Movement.After the bolt has been turned into the lockedposition, the operating rod continues forward forfive-sixteenths of an inch at which time the rearof the recess in the operating rod contacts theoperating lug of the bolt, terminating the forwardmovement.

31. ACTION DURING THE REARWARD MOVEMENTOF THE OPERATING ROD

a. Action of the Gas. When a round is fired,the gas formed by the burning powder provides

69

the force for the rearward movement of the oper-ating parts. Assume that a cartridge is in thechamber, the bolt locked, and the hammer cocked.Squeeze the trigger and imagine that the car-tridge is fired. A chamber pressure of approxi-mately 50,000 pounds per square inch is generatedand the bullet is forced through the barrel. As thebullet passes the gas port, this tremendous gaspressure has dropped to about 2,000 pounds persquare inch. A small part of this gas, seekingthe easiest means of escape, expands through thegas port into the gas cylinder and strikes the headof the piston with sudden force, driving the oper-ating rod to the rear.

b. Action of the Operating Rod and Spring. Asthe operating rod starts to the rear, the operat-ing rod spring begins to be compressed. Theoperating rod moves to the rear five-sixteenths ofan inch before contacting the operating lug of thebolt. This allows it to build up enough speed toovercome the inertia of the locked bolt. This freeplay is also a safety feature. It allows the bulletto clear the muzzle and the pressure inside thebarrel to be reduced to outside pressure beforethe bolt begins to'unlock. This prevents a blow-back of gases into the firer's face.

c. Unlocking. As the operating rod continuesto the rear, the front camming surface in thehump of the operating rod contacts the operatinglug on the bolt, turning the bolt counterclockwise,unlocking it.

d. Withdrawal of the Firing Pin. This actionoccurs at the same time the bolt is being unlocked.

70

As the bolt is turned counterclockwise, the tangof the firing pin contacts the bridge of the receiverand is cammed to the rear, withdrawing thestriker of the firing pin into the face of the bolt.

e. Extraction. Extraction occurs next. Re-member that the extractor has been gripping therim of the cartridge case all the time that theround has been in the chamber. Initially theround is loosened in the chamber as the bolt un-locks, due to a very slight rearward movement ofthe bolt. As the bolt continues to the rear it pullsthe empty case from the chamber.

f. Ejection. When the front of the empty caseclears the rear of the chamber, the ejector (whichhas been continually pushing against the base ofthe case) ejects the empty case from the receiverby the action of the expanding ejector spring.

g. Cocking. As the bolt moves to the rear, itforces the hammer rearward and downward intothe cocked position.

h. Feeding. When the bolt in its rearwardmovement clears the top round in the clip, thefollower, through the action of the compressedoperating rod spring on the follower rod andfollower arm, moves the top round up into thepath of the bolt.

i. Termination of the Rearward Movement.The rearward movement ends when the squareshoulder of the operating rod contacts the frofntof the receiver.

71

32. ACTION FOLLOWING THE FIRING OF THE LASTROUND

a. As each round is fed into the path of thebolt, the hump of the follower rod moves closerto the. 45° camming surface between the frontarms of the operating rod catch.

b. While the last round is in the chamber, thefollower is against the bottom of the bolt. Whenthe last round is fired (fig. 46), the bolt comes tothe rear and the follower, freed to this obstruc-tion, is moved all the way up in the receiver bythe action of the operating rod spring pushingthe follower rod which in turn pushes the followerarm and follower. At the same time the hump ofthe follower rod contacts the 45° camming sur-face of the operating rod catch and pushes thecatch up toward the barrel.

c. As the catch is cammed toward the barrel,its hook is engaged by the hooks of the operatingrod. The engagement of these hooks holds theoperating rod to the rear and the bolt open.

d. When the front end of the operating rodcatch is cammed toward the barrel, the catchpivots on the follower arm pin and the long reararm moves downward against the front stud ofthe clip latch. The clip latch rotates, withdraw-ing the rear stud from the notch in the clip.

e. The empty clip, now free from the rearstud of the clip latch, is ejected by the expandingclip ejector.

72

E·wd

z w0E3 '>

A~~~~

0 m~~~ ~w-o\or

0.~<~

~Z LU ~

73

x 00J3 LL 0

0 0~~aiW T

iax g

2U)~cIL u a

wLL

w~w

4%~~~~7

Section III. OPERATION

33. GENERAL

In order to use your rifle, you rhust know howto load the rifle with a full clip, a partially filledclip, or a single round. You must know how tofire it, and, for the safety of yourself and othersoldiers, how to unload and clear the rifle. Inthis section you will be shown how to operate therifle.

34. USE OF DUMMY CARTRIDGES

Dummy cartridges will be helpful during yourinstruction in mechanical training. Be careful tokeep dirt and grit out of the weapon while youare using the dummy cartridge.

35. TO LOAD A CARTRIDGE CLIP

Insert eight rounds in the cartridge clip makingsure that the base of each cartridge is againstthe rear wall of the clip and that the inner ribof the clip engages the extractor groove in thecartridge (fig. 47). The rifle will work if thetop cartridge of the loaded clip is on the left orright side, since the follower slide will adjust it-self. However, if the uppermost cartridge is onthe right, the clip can be more easily forced intothe receiver by a right hand firer. For this rea-son clips are loaded this way at the arsenal.

36.: TO LOAD THE RIFLE

Except in continuous firing, the operation ofloading a full clip into the rifle is performed with

74

Figure 47. Loading a clip.

the rifle locked, that is, with the finger piece ofthe safety in its rearmost position. With the lefthand, hold the rifle at its balance. With the righthand, pull the operating rod handle smartly tothe rear until the hooks of the operating rodengages the hook of the operating rod catch andthe bolt stays open. Rest the toe of the butt on theright thigh. With the right hand, take a fullyloaded clip and place it on top of the follower.Close the hand into a fist with the thumb ex-tended. Raise the elbow high and, with the ballof the thumb on top of the clip at its front end(about the middle of the top cartridge) and the

75

thumb pointing toward the muzzle end, press theclip down into the receiver until it is caught bythe rear stud of the clip latch. Swing the thumbto the right so as to clear the bolt in its forwardmovement. The closing and locking of the boltmay be assisted by striking the operating rodhandle sharply with the heel of the right hand.You can easily learn the technique of loading therifle by doing it a few times with dummy car-tridges.

37. TO UNLOAD THE RIFLE

a. To unload a cartridge from the chamber,hook the right thumb over the operating rodhandle, pull and hold the operating rod in theextreme rear position. This extracts and ejectsthe round.

b. To remove the loaded clip from the receiver,hold the rifle with your right hand, thumb on theoperating rod handle, fingers around the triggerguard, and the rifle butt resting in your rightgroin. Place the palm of your left hand over thereceiver and press in on the clip latch with yourleft thumb. The clip is ejected upward from thereceiver and into your left hand. Do hot allowthe bolt to move forward during the operation asit will push the top cartridge forward and pre-vent ejection of the clip.

c. To close the bolt on an empty chamber andretain a partially loaded clip in the receiver, pressdown on the top cartridge in the clip, allowingthe bolt to slide forward over it; make sure that

76

the bolt is fully closed. This can be done onlywhen there are less than eight cartridges in theclip.

38. TO OPERATE THE RIFLE AS A SINGLE LOADER

With the receiver empty, pull the operating rodto the rear until it is caught by the operating rodcatch. With the right hand, place one round in thechamber, seating it with the thumb. With thepalm of the right hand against the receiver, therear edge of the right hand against the operatingrod handle, the fingers extended, joined, and point-ing downward, force the operating rod handleslightly to the rear; push down the follower withthe right thumb; and permit the bolt to ride for-ward about one inch over the follower. Thenremove the thumb from the follower and releasethe operating rod handle. The operating rod mustbe allowed to go forward by the force of its ex-panding spring. It must not be slowed in its for-ward movement by contact with the hand. If theoperating rod is not completely released, the boltmay not lock; when this occurs, the rifle may notfire when the trigger is squeezed.

39. TO PARTIALLY LOAD A CLIP

a. Using One Hand. To partially load a clipfrom any firing position, hold the rifle with yourleft hand at the firing position, with the butt ofthe rifle resting on a secure surface (the groin,thigh, or ground). Move the operating rod handleto its rearmost position with your right hand,opening the bolt. Place the empty clip into the

77

receiver. Next, place the first cartridge into theclip and on the follower with the right hand. Pressthe second cartridge into the clip, exerting adownward turning motion toward the center ofthe clip with the right thumb until the cartridgesnaps into place. In the same manner, continueto load the clip. After placing the last cartridgeinto the clip, loading is completed by pressingdown slightly on the top cartridge with the rightthumb, at the same time moving the operatingrod handle slightly to the rear with the rightedge of the right hand. Let the bolt move for-ward about 1 inch; this starts the top roundforward. Remove your' right hand and allow theoperating rod to go forward. This method of load-ing is useful in combat when a full clip of am-munition is not available.

Caution: While pressing rounds into the clipkeep the palm of the right hand against the re-ceiver and in front of, but not touching, the oper-ating rod handle. This will prevent the bolt fromgoing forward and injuring the right thumbwhile loading rounds into the clip.

b. Using Both Hands. Place the empty clip ona solid surface, gripping the sides of the clip withthe thumb and middle finger of the right hand.With the left hand, insert the cartridges into theclip and hold them in place with the right fore-finger inside the clip. When the rounds (less thaneight) have all been inserted into the clip, placethe clip on top of the follower Without changingyour grasp with your right hand. Use your lefthand to assist in holding the cartridges in place

78

and slide the clip down until the lip engages thetop cartridge. Regrasp the rifle with the lefthand at the firing position. Press down on thetop cartridge with the right thumb, the palm ofthe right hand against the stock, and the side ofthe hand pressing the operating rod handle slight-ly to the rear. When the clip is engaged by therear stud of the clip latch, allow the bolt to moveforward about an inch, withdraw the right thumb,release the operating rod handle; this allows thebolt to close and lock. Whether using one or bothhands, care should be taken to insure that thebase of each cartridge is against the rear wall ofthe clip.

40. TO FIRE THE RIFLE

To fire the rifle, you must squeeze the triggerfor each shot. When the last round has been fired,the empty clip is automatically ejected and thebolt remains open.

41. TO SET THE RIFLE AT SAFE

The loaded rifle must be kept locked until youare ready to shoot. To lock the rifle, snap thesafety to its rear position inside the trigger guard.In this position, the trigger cannot be moved be-cause the left trigger lug is blocked by the squareshoulder of the safety. When locked, the rifle maybe loaded or unloaded by hand but it cannot befired. To unlock the rifle, push the safety to itsforward postion.

79

WtNDAGE KNOB

42. TO CLEAR THE RIFLE

To clear the rifle, pull the operating rod fullyto the rear, thus extracting and ejecting the car-

tridge from the chamber. Remove the clip from

the receiver by depressing the clip latch; thiswill cause the clip to jump out. Leave the boltin the open position. Inspect the receiver andchamber to be sure that they are empty.

43. TO ADJUST THE REAR SIGHT

a. The rear sight of your rifle (fig. 48) is ad-justable, enabling you to engage targets accurate-ly up to the maximum effective range. It has anelevation knob and a windage knob. The elevationknob has a number and a mark for 200, 400, 600,800, 1,000, 1,200 yards of range and lines betweenthese graduations for 100, 300, 500, 700, 900 and

80

1,100 yards. 'The base of the rear sight has acenter index line, and the graduations for wind-age are on the receiver. Arrows on the elevationand windage knobs show the direction to turnthem to move the sight either up or down, rightor left.

b. To raise the strike of the bullet on the tar-get, increase the sight setting by turning the ele-vating knob toward you. To lower the strike ofthe bullet on the target, lower the sight settingby turning the elevating knob away from you. Tomove the strike of. the bullet to the right, turn thewindage knob away from you. This moves theaperture to the right and is called right wind-age. To move the strike of the bullet to the left,turn the windage knob toward you. This putsleft windage on the rear sight. An easier wayof saying all this is to move the rear sight in thedirection that you want to move the strike of thebullet.

c. The rear sight contains clicks both for ele-vation and windage. One click represents an an-gular adjustment of one minute or approximately1 inch on the target for each 100 yards of range.

Note. Each windage graduation on the receiver repre-sents an angular adjustment of four minutes.

d. After setting the rear sight to any click ofelevation or windage, move the adjustment knobslightly in both directions to see that it is cen-tered for that click.

44. SAFETY PRECAUTIONSSafety cannot be overemphasized. Whenever

you work with weapons, constant care and check-

81

ing must be done. Some of the precautions toobserve in handling this rifle follow. These pre-cautions are not intended to replace other exist-ing safety regulations.

a. A rifle with its bolt closed is never consid-ered tobe safe until it has been properly in-spected.

b. Do not playfully or carelessly point the rifleat anyone. Always consider the rifle loaded.

c. Do not leave any obstruction in the muzzleor bore.

Section IV. IMMEDIATE ACTION AND STOPPAGES

45. GENERAL

If your rifle stops firing from no fault or in-tention of your own, then you have a stoppage.You must be able to clear such stoppages andcontinue firing-in combat your life and the livesof other members of your squad may depend onyour fire support. Therefore, the first thing todo when you have a stoppage is to apply imme-diate action, which is the unhesitating applicationof a probable remedy to clear a stoppage withoutinvestigating the cause.

46. APPLYING IMMEDIATE ACTION

If your rifle fails to fire, pull the operating rodhandle all the way to the rear with the right hand,palm up; release it, aim, and fire. This actionwill clear most stoppages. If this fails to correctthe stoppage, and it is necessary to continue fir-

82

ing, work the operating rod handle by hand untilyou have enough time to investigate the trouble.

47. STOPPAGES

a. The stoppages that are not cleared by im-mediate action fall into three classes. They are-

(1) Failure to chamber, which is the resultof some condition that prevents the boltfrom chambering the round completely.In some cases the bolt will be locked andin others the bolt will not be locked.

(2) Failure to fire, which is the result of theprimer failing to fire when struck by thefiring pin or a failure of the firing pin tostrike the primer.

(3) Failure to extract, which is the resultof an extremely dirty chamber, extreme-ly dirty ammunition, or a broken ex-tractor or spring.

b. Table I gives the causes for the above stop-pages as well as others for which the correctiveaction is based upon your knowledge of mechani-cal training with the rifle.

SECTION V. CARE AND CLEANING

48. GENERAL

Proper care, cleaning, and preservation of yourrifle is an important duty. Experience has provedthat more rifles become unserviceable throughlack of care and cleaning than for any other rea-son.

83

Table I. Stoppages and Malfunctions

Malfunction Cause Correction by soldier

Failure to chamber ----- Dirty or rough chamber. Clean chamber.Restricted gas port. Clean gas port.Dirty or improperly Clean and lubricate rifle.

lubricated rifle. Replace clip.Bent clip. Remove ruptured car-Ruptured cartridge case tridge case.

in chamber.

Failure to fire (hammer Bolt not seated and Pull operating rod handlereleases but rifle does locked. halfway to rear andnot fire). release it. Insure com-

plete locking.Defective or broken Replace firing pin.

firing pin.Defective ammunition. Discard round.

Failure to extract --- Dirty or rough chamber. Clean chamber.Restricted gas port. Clean gas port.Dirty ammunition. Discard or clean round.Failure to replace ex- Replace extractor plunger

tractor plunger and and spring.spring.

Broken extractor. Replace extractor.

Clip jumps out on Bent follower rod ------- Replace follower rod.seventh round.

Fires in bursts of two or Sear broken or worn, or Replace trigger assemblythree rounds. remains in open or hammer spring

position. housing.Hammer spring housing Disassemble and assem-

improperlyassembled. ble trigger housinggroup correctly.

Safety releases when Worn trigger stop on Replace safety.pressure is applied on safety or brokentrigger. safety.

Pressure on trigger does Deformed hammer or Replace defective part.not release hammer. trigger or worn trigger

pin.Trigger strikes trigger Turn in to ordnance.

housing.

Creep in trigger ------- Burrs on trigger lugs or Replace trigger, hammer,hammer hooks. or both.

84

49. CLEANING MATERIALS, LUBRICANTS, AND RUSTPREVENTIVES

a. Cleaning Materials.(1) Rifle bore cleaner is issued for cleaning

the bore of your rifle after firing. Thismaterial possesses rust-preventive prop-erties and will provide temporary pro-tection against rust. Dry the bore andother components immediately after us-ing rifle bore cleaner and apply a thincoat of special preservative lubricatingoil. Rifle bore cleaner freezes at tem-peratures below minus 20°F. If thawedrifle bore cleaner is used, shake it wellbefore using.

(2) Water is used for cleaning the bore ofyour rifle when rifle bore cleaner is notavailable. Warm water is good, butwarm soapy water is better. It is usedto clean only the bore and the gas cylin-der. After using soap and water, drythe bore and apply a thin coat of specialpreservative lubricating oil.

(3) Dry-cleaning solvent is a noncorrosivepetroleum solvent used for removinggrease, oil, or light rust-preventive com-pounds from rifles. Do not use near anopen flame, because dry-cleaning solventis highly inflammable. Smoking is pro-hibited where this solvent is being used.It will attack and discolor rubber. Ap-ply it with rag swabs to large parts anduse as a bath for all small parts. Clean

85

all surfaces immediately and thoroughlydry them with clean rags and then oilthem. To avoid leaving finger marks,which contain corrosive acids, weargloves when handling parts after clean-ing. Volatile-mineral-spirits paint thin-ner may be used instead of dry cleaningsolvent.

(4) Decontaminating agents are used underspecial conditions to remove chemicalagents.

b. Lubricants.(1) Medium preservative lubricating oil is a

highly refined, non-hardening minerallubricating oil containing a rust inhibit-ing additive. It forms a relatively heavyfilm Which resists the direct action ofsalt spray. These characteristics makeit useful for coating all parts of theweapon before landing operations. Useit in preference to preservative lubri-cating oil, special, only when the rifle isto be exposed to salt water, high humid-ity atmospheric conditions, or high tem-peratures.

(2) Special preservative lubricating oil is athin oil used for lubricating at normaland low temperatures and for providingtemporary protection against rust. Usethis oil for preserving the bore after therifle has been fired and cleaned. Makefrequent inspections to assure main-tenance of an adequate protective filmof oil.

86

(3) Rifle grease possesses high resistance tothe action of water. Use it sparinglyon those parts subject to heavy wear inwet climates or during amphibious oper-ations. Figure 49 shows the criticalparts where this grease should be ap-plied. It is issued in a small plastic con-tainer which can be carried in the riflebutt recess along with the combinationtool and oiler.

(4) Engine oil, SAE 10 may be used whenthe oils mentioned above cannot be ob-tained. In cold weather any oil as heavyas this causes sluggish operation andmay prevent the rifle from working.This alternate oil does not possess therust preventive properties of preserva-tive lubricating oils. When engine oilis used, the weapons must be examined,cleaned, and reoiled frequently.

c. Preservatives.

(1) Medium rust-preventive compound is is-sued for protecting the metal parts forlong periods of time while the rifles areboxed and in storage. Warm it beforeapplication. When you have no way toheat it, brush it onto the parts when thetemperature of the atmosphere is above80 ° F. At temperatures below 80 ° F.,medium rust-preventive compound be-comes thick and sluggish and it is noteconomical to use it without preheating.

87

(2) Raw linseed oil is used to prevent thedrying of the wooden parts and to pre-serve them. Apply it with long strokesof the hand, it improves the appearanceof wood.

(3) Neat's-foot oil is a pale yellow animaloil. Use it for preserving leather equip-ment such as gun slings.

50. CARE AND CLEANING WHEN NO FIRING ISDONE

a. This includes the care of the rifle necessaryto preserve its condition and appearance duringthe periods when no firing is done.

b. To clean the bore, use the M3 cleaning rodand several patches. If you use a rod longer thanthe M3, protect the follower and face of the boltagainst damage from the rod. Run a patch for-ward and backward through the bore severaltimes, making sure that the patch goes all theway through before reversing the direction. Re-peat this several times, using a clean patch eachtime, until a patch comes out clean. Then, dip apatch in special preservative lubricating oil,squeeze out the ekcesf oil and run the patchthrough the bore several times.

Caution: Avoid careless use of the cleaningrod to prevent unnecessary wear at the muzzle.When using the cleaning rod it should not beallowed to bear against the bore at the muzzleend during cleaning. To prevent wear, keep clean-ing strokes reasonably straight so that the clean-ing rod does not bend and bear against the bore.

88

c. Clean the small screw heads and all recesseswith a small brush or stick. An old tooth brushor shaving brush is excellent for this purpose.Clean the metal parts with a dry cloth and wipewith an oil-dampened cloth to provide a protec-tive finish. Wipe the stock and hand guards witha clean cloth, then rub in linseed oil. Preserve theleather sling by rubbing on some neat's-foot oil.

Caution: After cleaning your rifle, do not usea muzzle plug or cover. These will collect mois-ture and result in rust, and there is always thedanger of forgetting to remove the plug beforefiring.

51. CARE AND CLEANING BEFORE AND DURINGFIRING ON THE RANGE

Before firing, take the following steps to insureefficient functioning of the rifle.

a. Dismount it into the main groups.

b. Clean the bore and chambers. Do not oilthem.

c. Remove any carbon on the gas-cylinder lockscrew and piston head.

d. Clean thoroughly and put a light coat of oilon all metal parts which do not come in contactwith the ammunition. Use special preservativelubricating oil. Be sure that the following partshave a light coat or oil:

(1) Locking lugs of the bolt, operating lug,and recesses.

(2) Bolt guides.

89

(3) Cocking cam on bolt.(4) Contact surface of barrel and operating

rod.(5) Operating rod guide groove on side of

the receiver.(6) Operating rod spring.(7) Camming surfaces in the hump of the

operating rod.

CAMMING SURFACES INSIDEHUMP OF OPERATING ROD

Figure 49. Camming surfaces in the hump of theoperating rod.

90

i L1P OF RECEIVER LOCKIM G RECEES5

Figure 49. The bolt camming lug

e. Use rifle grease if the rifle is exposed tosevere conditions of rain or to spray from seawater, because the bolt may occasionally fail toopen. This is caused by the friction resulting

®

9]

from the effect of the water and the fact thatany ordinary lubricant is likely to be washedaway from certain bearing surfaces. Under theseconditions, it is essential that such surfaces becoated with rifle grease which resists the actionof the water. Rifle grease is applied to the partsshown in figure 490®® after wiping them cleanand dry with a cloth.

Rifle grease normally is not applied to otherparts. After applying rifle grease, work the partsseveral times to spread the grease.

52. CARE AND CLEANING AFTER FIRING

After your rifle has been fired, the primaryconsideration is the prevention of rust. The resi-due left after firing consists mainly of primersalts, powder ashes, metal fouling, and carbon.In most small arms ammunition (carbine ex-cluded), the primer contains a salt which col-lects moisture and promotes rust, just as tablesalt does. This salt collects about the chamberand may be deposited throughout the bore. Riflebore cleaner removes it as well as powder ashes.Metal fouling is relatively unusual. It is removedonly by ordnance personnel. Carbon, formed bycooling powder gases, clings to the entire gassystem and is a constant worry because it clogsthe rifle, causing stoppages. Rifle bore cleanerwill remove this carbon but considerable effortmay be required.

a. Cleaning the Bore. Clean the bore of yourrifle thoroughly, preferably right after firing, and

92

certainly no later than the evening of the day youfire it.

(1) Use the following equipment:(a) M3 cleaning rod.(b) Rifle bore cleaner.(c) Patches.(d) Special preservative lubricating oil.(e) Combination tool.(f) Waste.

(2) Follow this system:(a) Wet patches (rifle bore cleaner or hot

soapy water).(b) Rifle bore brush.(c) More wet patches.(d) Dry patches.(e) Inspection (Repeat the above until a

dry patch comes out clean and no evi-dence of fouling can be seen in thebore.)

(f) Oily patch.b. Cleaning the Chamber. Clean the chamber

by using the chamber cleaning brush on the com-bination tool and follow the sequence outlinedabove. To use the chamber cleaning brush, placeit on a patch in the palm of the left hand. Closethe left hand over the patch and brush and givethe brush about three turns to the right. Thiscauses the patch to wrap neatly around and coverthe brush. A slight pressure with the forefingerof the left hand while turning the brush, willtwist the end of the patch like the finished endof a hand rolled cigarette. This insures cleaningthe full length of the chamber. Clean by twist-

93

ing the patch-covered brush in the chamber. Aftercleaning the chamber, inspect it by inserting thelittle finger and twisting it. If no discolorationshows on the finger, oil the chamber lightly.

c. Cleaning the Gas Cylinder. Remove the gascylinder lock screw with valve assembly and thegas cylinder lock. Clean the gas cylinder by usingthe cleaning rod, patches, and rifle bore cleaner.When all carbon has been removed, wipe dry andoil lightly.

d. Cleaning the Gas Cylinder Lock Screw withValve Assembly. Remove excess carbon depositsby scraping, then oil lightly. Carbon should bescrubbed off the head of the piston, using riflebore cleaner. Oil lightly after cleaning.

e. Cleaning the Bolt. The face of the boltshould be cleaned with a patch and rifle borecleaner. After cleaning, dry and oil lightly.

f. Cleaning Other Metal Parts and ExteriorSurfaces. Wipe all parts and surfaces with a drycloth to remove dampness, dirt, and perspiration.Oil all metal parts with special preservative lubri-cating oil. Oil the stock and hand guard with lin-seed oil and the sling with neat's-foot oil.

53. CARE AND CLEANING DURING COMBAT

a. There is no basic difference between thecare of a rifle during.range firing and duringcombat except:

(1) The rifle may have much more severetreatment.

(2) Conditions for maintenance may bemuch more difficult.

94

(3) Materials for maintenance may be par-tially or completely lacking.

b. There is little you can do about these con-ditions except to use your initiative,-energy, andcontinued attention to overcome your difficultsurroundings.

c. To obtain the maximum efficiency from yourrifle, observe the following points:

(1) Clean bore. Do not fire the rifle whendirt, mud, snow, or any other obstruc-tion is in the bore. Such obstructionsare extremely dangerous and may causethe rifle barrel to blow up. Use a clean-ing rod, if one is available, or the thongand brush which you should always havein the stock of the rifle. If these are notavailable any slender rod or stiff wirecan be used as a field expedient. Usingany one of these, keep the bore cleanand lightly oiled.

(2) Clean chamber. Clean the chamber atthe same time you clean the bore. Useclean ammunition because dirty or cor-roded ammunition deposits dirt in thechamber which may cause stoppages.After cleaning, to prevent rust, dip apatch in oil, squeeze the excess oil outof it, and then use this patch to thinlyoil the chamber.

(3) Excessive friction. If the rifle showssigns of excessive friction due to lackof lubrication, apply oil to the parts thatneed it. If this friction is the result of

95

dirt and there is no time to clean therifle use an extra amount of oil in theplaces needed. Friction is indicated ifthe empty cartridge cases are beingejected to the right rear or if the actionof the bolt is sluggish. Apply oil at thefirst opportunity, as failure to chamberand eject will occur if the condition isnot corrected.

(4) Severe exposure. If the rifle is to be ex-posed to severe conditions of rain or saltwater, apply rifle grease. The points onwhich to apply this grease are shownin figure 49(®®.

d. Keep a thin coating of special preservativelubricating oil on all metal parts.

e. Remove the carbon from the gas cylinderlock screw with valve assembly and the pistonhead when necessary.

f. Normally it is not necessary to remove anyof the parts of the rifle for cleaning in the fieldexcept the trigger housing group and the gascylinder lock screw. However, if the mechanismbecomes very dirty, disassemble the rifle forcleaning and lubrication.

g. In emergencies when the prescribed lubri-cants are not available, use any clean light min-eral oil such as engine oil.

54. PREPARATION FOR STORAGE

Medium preservative lubricating oil is the mostsuitable oil for short term protection of the rifle

96

mechanism. It is effective for storage over periodsof two to six weeks, depending on climatic condi-tions. However, rifles in short term storage mustbe inspected every four or five days and the pre-servative films renewed if necessary. For longerperiods of storage, rifles are protected with me-dium rust preventive compound. Medium rustpreventive compound is a semisolid material. Itis efficient for preserving polished surfaces, thebore, and the chamber for many years, depend-ing on climatic and storage conditions. The riflesmust be cleaned and prepared for storage withparticular care. The bore, all parts of the mechan-ism, and the exterior of the rifles should be thor-oughly cleaned and then dried completely withrags. In damp climates, particular care must betaken to see that the rags are dry. After dryinga metal part, the bare hands should not touch thatpart. All metal parts should then be coated witheither medium preservative lubricating oil ormedium rust preventive compound, depending onlength of storage required. Application of therust preventive compound to the bore of the rifleis best done by dipping the cleaning brush intothe compound and then running it through thebore two or three times. The brush must be cleanbefore it is used. Before placing the rifle in thepacking chest, see that the bolt is in its forwardposition and that the hammer is released. Then,handling the rifle by the stock and hand guardonly, place it in the packing chest whose woodensupports for the butt and muzzle have beenpainted previously with rust preventive com-pound. In no circumstances will a rifle be wrapped

97

in a cloth or other cover or be placed in storagewith a plug in the bore. Such covers collect mois-ture which cause the weapon to rust.

55. CLEANING WEAPONS RECEIVED FROM STORAGE

Rifles taken from storage will be coated witheither preservative lubricating oil or with rustpreventive compound. Rifles received from ord-nance storage will usually be coated with rustpreventive compound. Use dry-cleaning solventor volatile mineral spirits paint thinner to re-move all traces of the compound or oil. Take par-ticular care that all recesses in which springs orplungers operate are cleaned thoroughly. Failureto do this may cause stoppages at normal tem-peratures and will certainly cause stoppages whenthe rust preventive compound congeals duringcold weather. After using the cleaning solvent,be sure it is completely removed from all partsby wiping with a dry cloth. Then apply a thincoat of special preservative lubricating oil to allmetal parts; use linseed oil on the wooden partsand treat the leather sling with neat's-foot oil.

56. CARE WHEN SUBJECT TO CHEMICAL ATTACK

a. If a chemical attack is anticipated or chem-ical contaminations are encountered, the follow-ing action will be taken: Apply oil to all outermetal surfaces of the rifle and accessories. Do notapply oil to ammunition. If the weapon is not tobe used, cover rifle, accessories, and ammuni-tion with protective coverings or disperse undernatural cover. Ammunition should be kept in its

98

containers as long as possible. After a chemicalattack, determine by means of detector paper(for liquid) or detector crayon (for vapors)whether or not the equipment is contaminated.

b. If not contaminated, clean the equipmentwith rifle bore cleaner. Prepare the rifle and itsequipment for use as required.

c. If contaminated, a complete suit of protec-tive clothing (permeable or impermeable), includ-ing impermeable protective gloves, and a gasmask must be worn during decontamination.

(1) Equipment contaminated with chem-icals other than the blister agents orG-series agents can be decontaminatedby airing. For faster decontaminationof these agents and to protect againstcorrosion, clean the rifle and its equip-ment with rifle bore cleaner, denaturedalcohol, or soap and water.

(2) Equipment contaminated by blisteragents will be decontaminated as fol-lows:

(a) Remove dirt, dust, grease, and oil bywiping with rags.

(b) Expose all surfaces to air.(c) Decontaminate all metal surfaces ex-

cept the bore with agent, decontam-inating, noncorrosive (DANC) (FM21-40). Hot water and soap, or re-peated applications with gasolinesoaked swabs are also effective.

(d) Protective ointment, M5, carried inthe gas mask carrier, can be used for

99

emergency decontamination (FM 21-40).

(e) Test with detector paper on detectorkit to see if decontamination is com-plete.

(f) After decontamination and test: clean,dry, oil, and prepare the rifle and itsequipment for use as required.

(g) Burn, or preferably bury, all rags orwiping materials used during decon-tamination. Caution should be takento protect men against vapors createdby burning.

(3) In general these same actions are ap-plicable to equipment contaminated bybiological or radiological attack. If con-tamination is too great it may be nec-essary to discard the equipment. Detailedinformation on decontamination is con-tained in FM 21-40 and TM 3-220.

57. CARE AND CLEANING UNDER UNUSUAL CLI-MATIC CONDITIONS

a. In Cold Climates. In temperatures belowfreezing, it is necessary that the moving partsof your rifle be kept absolutely free from mois-ture. It has also been found that excess oil onthe working parts will solidify to such an extentas to cause sluggish operation or complete failure.

(1) The rifle should be disassembled andcompletely cleaned with dry-cleaningsolvent before use in temperatures be-low + 32° F. The working s.irfaces of

100

parts which shown signs of wear maybe lubricated by rubbing with a clothwhich has been wetted in special preser-vative lubricating oil; other parts areleft dry. At temperatures above 32 ° F.,all metal surfaces of the rifle may beoiled thinly, after cleaning, by wipingwith a lightly oiled cloth, using mediumpreservative lubricating oil.

(2) When brought indoors, the rifle shouldfirst be allowed to come to room tem-perature. Moisture will condense on thecold surfaces. Then disassemble therifle and wipe it completely dry. Oil withspecial preservative lubricating oil. Thiscondensation may be avoided by provid-ing a cold place in which to keep therifles when not in use. For example, aseparate cold room with rifle racks maybe used, or, when in the field, racksunder proper cover may be improvised.If the rifle has been fired, it should becleaned and oiled. When the rifle reachesroom temperature it should be cleanedand oiled again.

b. Hot, Humid Climates. In tropical climateswhere temperature and humidity are high, orwhere salt air is present, and during rainy sea-sons, your rifle should be thoroughly inspecteddaily. It should be kept lightly oiled when not inuse. The three main groups should be dismountedat regular intervals and, if necessary, should bedisassembled enough to permit the drying and

101

oiling of all parts. Care should be taken to seethat unexposed parts and surfaces are kept cleanand oiled. Special preservative lubricating oilshould be used. However, use medium preserva-tive lubricating oil where the rifle is exposed tosalt-water atmospheres. Wood parts should be in-spected to see that swelling caused by moisturedoes not bind working parts. If swelling hasoccurred, shave off the wood only enough to re-lieve binding. A light coat of raw linseed oilapplied at intervals and rubbed in with the heelof the hand will help to keep moisture out. Allowthe oil to soak in for a few hours and then wipeand polish the wood with a dry, clean rag.

Note. Care should be taken that linseed oil does notget on the working parts, because linseed oil thickenswhen dry. Stock and hand guards should be dismountedwhile this oil is being applied.

c. Hot, Dry Climates. In hot, dry climateswhere sand and dust are likely to get into themechanism and bore, the rifle should be wipedclean daily or oftener. Groups should be sepa-rated and disassembled for thorough cleaning.When the rifle is being used under sandy condi-tions, all lubricants should be wiped from theweapon. This will prevent sand from sticking tothe lubricant and forming an abrasive which willruin the mechanism. Upon leaving sandy terrain,the rifle should be relubricated. In such climates,the wood parts are likely to dry out and shrink.A light application of raw linseed oil will help tokeep the wood in condition. Perspiration fromthe hands contains acid and causes rust. Perspi-

102

ration should be wiped from metal parts. Duringsand or dust storms, the receiver and muzzleshould be kept covered if possible.

Section VI. SPARE PARTS, APPENDAGES,AND ACCESSORIES

58. SPARE PARTS

Some parts of your rifle may in time becomeunserviceable through breakage or from wear re-sulting from continuous use. Extra parts are pro-vided with the rifle to replace those most likelyto fail. They should be kept clean and lightlyoiled to prevent rust. Sets of spare parts shouldbe kept complete at all times. Whenever a sparepart is used to replace a defective part in the rifle,the defective part should be repaired or replaced.Parts that are carried complete should be cor-rectly assembled and ready for immediate usewith the rifle. The allowances of spare parts areprescribed in DA Supply Catalog ORD 7 SNLB-21. Except for replacements with the spareparts mentioned above, repairs or alterations tothe rifle are made only by ordnance personnel.

59. APPENDAGES

a. Bayonet. The bayonet is a blade sharpenedalong the entire lower edge and partially alongthe upper edge. It is made to fit securely into thescabbard or onto the muzzle end of the rifle. Ahand grip on its base makes it a suitable handweapon or utility tool.

b. Grenade Launcher. The grenade launcher is

103

a short tube-like device which may be attachedto the muzzle of the rifle to fire various types ofgrenades. A detailed discussion of the grenadelauncher and rifle grenades is presented in FM23-30.

60. ACCESSORIES

Accessories inclu'de the t6ols required to as-semble and clean your rifle, and the gun slings,spare parts containers, covers, arm lockers, andsimilar articles. They should be used for no otherpurpose than that for which they are intended.When not in use, they should be stored in theplaces provided for them. Detailed descriptionsor methods for the use of all such accessories arenot outlined in this manual. However, the mostcommon accessories are described below.

a. The barrel reflector (fig. 50) is a small L-shaped device having a short tube which slips intothe chamber of the rifle barrel. It has a mirrorwhich reflects the bore and makes inspection easy.

b. The brush and thong are used for cleaningthe bore of the rifle when the cleaning rod is not

INSPED THE WORTHROUGH HERE FIT THIS INTO CHAMBER OF R1FLE

Figure 50. The barrel reflector.

104

available. The oiler and thong case which maybe carried in the stock of the rifle is divided sothat one end contains the oil and oil dropper andthe other end holds the tip, weight, thong, andbrush.

c. The cleaning rod M3 is of such length as toprevent damage to the follower or the face of thebolt. The rod has a handle at one end and isthreaded at the other end to receive the patch orbrush sections. The patch section is slotted to per-mit the insertion of a cleaning patch; the brushsection is used to clean the bore of the rifle afterfiring.

d. The combination tool (fig. 51) consists ofthree parts, the chamber cleaning brush, theforked end, and the screwdriver blade. The mov-able screwdriver blade is used for tightening the

LEAD TIP

CARTRIDGE EXTRACTOR

CHAMBER CLEANING BRUSH

"V" CUT FOR EJECTO

FORKED END

SCREW DRIVER BLADE

Figure 51. The combination tool.

105

gas cylinder lock screw, for disassembling thebolt, and for adjusting various screws. Thenotched blade of the handle is used to tighten therear sight locking nut. The small cylindrical pro-jection is used to drift out pins. It is also used,together with the V-shaped groove cut into theface of the handle, to assemble the extractor andejector in the bolt. The curved undercut lug orhook, commonly called the hand extractor, is usedto remove a cartridge case from the chamberwhen the extractor has failed to function.

e. The gun sling M1907 (leather) (fig. 52) isplaced on your rifle as shown in figure 53(.

(1) Thread the feed end of the long strapthrough the upper keeper as shown infigure 530; then place the upper hookin the third or fourth pair of holes nearthe feed end of the long strap. Engagethe lower-hook in the pair of holes belowthe upper hook. The sling is now at-tached to the rifle.

(2) To tighten the sling (fig. 530), graspthe inside strap of the sling near thetrigger housing with the left hand. Withthe right hand, grasp the sling betweenthe hooks. Now pull toward the buttwith the left hand and push toward themuzzle with the right hand until 'thesling is tight. Slide the lower keeper to-ward the muzzle until the feed end ofthe long strap has been passed.

(3) To loosen the sling for carrying pur-poses, slide the lower keeper down from

106

9

107

II h

i-A

1

:

ii

4~~~~~~p

W\>~~~~.af

108

i~~~~~

i ® 1.

Figure 53--Continued.

! F~ I v- 109

- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ A s |~ ' Ms,|- X w -By l = l~~~~~~~0

I z zX1

L - - -I - -Figure 53-Continued.

109


110

the feed end of the long strap and graspthe inside strap with the left hand. Graspthe outside strap between the hooks withthe right hand. Now force the insidestrap toward the muzzle and at the sametime pull the outside strap toward thebutt of the rifle.

(4) To hold the sling in a tight position,force the upper keeper against the stockferrule swivel and slide the lower keeperup until it has passed the feed end ofthe long strap.

f. The gun sling Ml (improved web) (fig. 54)is placed on your rifle as shown in figure 55(.

(1) Thread the feed end of the sling throughthe keeper and pull the keeper and feedend of the sling toward the butt of therifle, as shown in figure 55®, until thesling is tight. Close the keeper.

(2) To adjust the web sling for carryingpurposes, open the keeper, loosen thesling by sliding the keeper and feed endof the sling toward the muzzle. In thismanner loosen the sling until there issufficient slack to sling the rifle comfort-ably on the shoulder. Close the keeper.

g. The ruptured cartridge extractor (fig. 56)has the general shape of a caliber .30 cartridgeand consists of three parts; the spindle, the head,and the sleeve. To use the ruptured cartridge ex-tractor, the cartridge clip and live cartridges mustbe removed from the rifle. The ruptured cartridgeextractor is then inserted through the opening of

111

w 0

w~~~

t: b~~~~ ~~B1:) dt:

g~~~~~~~

-~~~~~~~~~F

11

-~~~~~

-~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ;2

1122

-J

w

Lii

a113

s -

113

M~~w k W at~J % | z: g~~

X l r 2Dse~~ol | i l S

MW ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~i

Figure 55. Tightening the sling on the rifle.

114

HEAD SLEEVE SPINDLE

Figure 56. Ruptured cartridge extractor.

the ruptured case and pushed forward into thechamber. Allow the bolt to close without excessiveshock so that the extractor on the bolt engages thehead of the ruptured cartridge extractor. Whenthe bolt is opened, the ruptured cartridge extrac-tor will remove the ruptured cartridge.

h. The M2 aiming device (fig. 57) is an in-structional aid that allows the coach to positivelycheck the pupil's sight picture during preparatorymarksmanship training and range practice. Asthe coach looks into the aiming device, he seesreflected on the glass an image of the sight pic-ture as the rifleman sees it. This allows the coachto check on those men who do not hold theirbreath properly, and it enables him to help theinexperienced rifleman to obtain the correct sightpicture. The device is attached by fitting the twoextensions over the rear sight.

Section VII. AMMUNITION

61. GENERAL

The ammunition that you may use in the M1rifle is described in this section. This rifle canfire several types of ammunition. You are respon-sible for being able to recognize these types, to

115

PPILS COCHES LINELINiE O. VisCoOFVISION

TOP VIEW-SCHECMATC

Figure 57. M2 aiming device.

know which is best to use for certain targets, andto properly care for the ammunition.

a. In most types of small-arms ammunition, acartridge consists of a cartridge case, primer, pro-

116

OD-jCl)

I.-w-.J

oo

wz

a~~~~~~

-i

WCD

0.

117

(D w a cz ap c

a0 3 0

x w

w CD~~~~~

I

w

117

pelling charge, and the bullet. Figure 58 showsthe construction of a typical cartridge and itsparts.

b. The term bullet refers only to a small armsprojectile. The term ball was originally used todescribe the ball shaped bullet of very early smallarms ammunition. The term ball ammunition nowrefers to a cartridge having a bullet which has ametallic jacket filled only with lead.

62. CLASSIFICATION

Based on use, the principal classifications of theseveral types of ammunition used with your rifleare-

a. Ball, M2-for use in marksmanship training.

b. Tracer, M1-observation of fire, incendiary,and signaling purposes.

c. Armor-piercing, M2-for use against lightlyarmored vehicles, protective shelters, and per-sonnel.

d. Incendiary, Ml- for use against inflam-mable material.

e. Armor-piercing incendiary, M14--used inplace of either the armor-piercing or incendiarycartridges.

f. Rifle grenade cartridge, M3-used in propel-ling grenades.

g. Blank, M1909-for simulated fire, signaling,and salute.

h. Dummy-used for training.

118

63. LOT NUMBER

When ammunition is manufactured, it is givenan ammunition lot number. This lot number ismarked on all packing containers. It is also onthe identification card inclosed in each packingbox. The lot number is required for all purposesof record, such as grading and use, and reportson the condition, functioning, and accidents inwhich the ammunition might be involved. It isimpracticable to mark the ammunition lot num-ber on each individual cartridge. Every effortshould be made to maintain the ammunition lotnumber or the repacked lot number with the car-tridges after they are removed from their originalpacking. Cartridges which have been removedfrom their original packing for which the ammu-nition lot number has been lost are automaticallyplaced in grade 3; these are not to be fired.

64. IDENTIFICATION'

a. Markings. The contents of original boxesmay be readily identified by the markings on thebox. Similar markings on the cardboard cartonlabel identify the contents of each carton. Themarkings which appear on the box and carton arecomplete information necessary for identification,shipping, care, handling, and use.

b. -Identification of Ammunition Types. In gen-eral, all types of cartridges of one caliber lookalike in shape and size, but they may be identifiedby certain physical characteristics. The ammuni-tion authorized for use with the Ml rifle and theway to identify each type after it has been

119

removed from the original container follows:Types of cartridge Identification

Ball ............................ All models of caliber .30 ballammunition have bullets coatedwith gilding metal, a copperalloy, which prevents fouling inthe bore of the rifle. Ballammunition has no identifyingcolor on the tip of the bullet.

Tracer .................. Tip of the bullet is painted red.Incendiary ................Tip of the bullet is painted a light

blue.Armor-piercing ........Tip of the bullet is painted black.Armor-piercing Tip of the bullet is painted alum-

incendiary ............ inum.Grenade .................... Has no bullet. Its mouth has 5

crimps (indentations).Blanks ........................ Has. no bullet. Its mouth is not

crimped.Dummy ......................There are two types of caliber .30

dummy cartridges in use. Onetype has 6 longitudinal crimpsin the case; the other type has3 holes in the case.

65. CARE, HANDLING, AND PRESERVATION

Most men have at one time or another fired arifle or a pistol, or perhaps both types of weapons.If you have, it means you have also handledammunition for these weapons. You know thatthe ammunition was not dangerous to handle. Thisof course does not mean that you handled theammunition carelessly. The ammunition used inyour army rifle is not dangerous to handle butthere is a correct way to handle it.

a. Care must be exercised to prevent ammuni-tion boxes from becoming broken or damaged. All

120

broken ammunition boxes must be repaired imme-diately. All original markings must be trans-ferred to the new parts of the box. The metalliner should be air tested and sealed if equipmentfor this work is available.

b. Open wooden ammunition boxes carefully.They are used as long as they are serviceable.

c. Ammunition boxes should not be openeduntil the ammunition is to be used. Ammunitionremoved from the airtight container, particularlyin damp climates, is likely to corrode. This ammu-nition is unserviceable.

d. Protect ammunition from mud, sand, andwater. If it gets wet or dirty, wipe it off at oncewith a clean, dry cloth. Light corrosion should bewiped off as soon as it is discovered. Heavily cor-roded cartridges must be turned in.

e. During marksmanship and combat training,no caliber .30 ammunition will be fired -until it hasbeen identified by an ammunition lot number andgrade.

f. Do not expose ammunition to the direct raysof the sun. If the powder is heated, excessivepressure may be developed when the weapon isfired. This condition will affect ammunition per-formance.

g. Do not oil or grease ammunition. The dustand other abrasives that collect on greasy ammu-nition are injurious to the operating parts of therifle.

h. Do not attempt to fire cartridges that havebad dents, scratches, or loose bullets, or those thatare corroded. If you think a cartridge is defec-

121

tive, return it. Do not throw away or attempt todestroy defective ammunition.

66. STORAGE

a. Small-arms ammunition is not an explosivehazard. Under poor storage conditions, however,it may become a fire hazard.

b. Small-arms ammunition of all classes shouldbe stored away from radiators, hot water pipes,and other sources of heat.

c. Whenever practicable, small-arms ammuni-tion should be stored under cover. If it is neces-sary to leave ammunition in the open, it should beraised at least six inches from the ground andcovered with a double thickness of tarpaulin. Thetarpaulin should be placed so that it gives maxi-mum protection and allows free circulation of air.Suitable trenches must be dug to prevent waterfrom' flowing under the ammunition pile.

67. BALLISTIC DATA

The approximate maximum range and averagemuzzle velocity of the different types of caliber.30 ammunition authorized for use in the M1 rifleare shown below.

Averagemuzzle

Maximum velocitiesrange (feet per

Cartridge (yards) second)

Ball, M2 ........................................ 3,500 2,800Tracer, Ml ...................................... 3,350 2,750Incendiary, M1 ................................ 2,875 3,020Armor-piercing, M2 ................... 3,160 2,770Armor-piercing, incendiary, M14 3,300 2,830

122

68. PRECAUTIONS IN FIRING BLANK AMMUNITION

Firing blank cartridges at anyone within a 20-yard range is dangerous because the wad or papercup in the cartridge may fail to break up withinthis distance. Misfires, in which the primer ex-plodes but fails to ignite the powder charge, mayprove dangerous when blank ammunition is beingfired. In this type of misfire, some of the powdermay be left in the bore of the weapon. A seriesof such rounds in which the powder fails to ignite(because of moisture or other causes) may resultin serious damage when the accumulated powderis ignited by a subsequent cartridge. When mis-fires in excess of five percent are encountered inblank ammunition, the lot will be withdrawn andreported to the ordnance officer.

69. PRECAUTIONS IN FIRING SERVICE AMMUNITION

The general precautions concerning the firingand handling of ammunition in the field, as pre-scribed in SR 385-310-1 and TM 9-1900, areobserved. Precautions that apply particularly tosmall-arms ammunition are-

a. Do not fire any small-arms ammunition(other than blank ammunition) until it has beenpositively identified by ammunition lot numberand grade. Under no circumstances will small-arms ammunition graded and marked "For train-ing use only" be fired over the heads of troops.

b. Do not use armor-piercing cartridges indemonstrations in which tanks are used. In usingarmor-piercing ammunition, remember that thecores of bullets that fail to penetrate the target

123

may rebound. The radius of rebound for caliber.30 armor-piercing ammunition depends on sev-eral factors but may safely be assumed to be amaximum of 100 yards.

c. Before firing, make sure 'that the bore ofyour weapon is free from any foreign matter likecleaning patches, mud, sand, snow, and the like.A weapon fired with any obstruction in the boremay be damaged and may injure the rifleman.If a bullet lodges in the bore of the rifle, removeit by applying pressure from the muzzle end ofthe weapon. To attempt to force the bullet out byfiring another cartridge is dangerous and is pro-hibited.

70. HANGFIRES

When a hangfire occurs, further use of ammu-nition from that lot should be suspended and areport made to the post ordnance officer, givingthe lot number involved. The lot affected will bewithdrawn and replaced by serviceable ammuni-tion.

124

CHAPTER 3

MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Section I. GENERAL

71. INTRODUCTION

The best way for you to meet the enemy is withdeadly rifle fire. You need to fire with speed aswell as with accuracy. You may fire at targetsfrom a few yards to several hundred yards away.If you lay down plenty of fast, well-aimed fireon the enemy, you will reduce the effect of hisfire. Your rifle is capable of all this, so use itwell.

72. FUNDAMENTALS

a. You need no special ability to learn to shootwell. Good shots are not born with the abilityto shoot well. You become a good shot only bypractice and shooting. A perfect physique is notnecessary. All you need is the desire and willing-ness to learn. And why not learn? This rifle isthe tool of your trade. The principles of marks-manship in this manual have been proved to besound. Learn them thoroughly and apply your-self earnestly and you will be a good shot. Youwill find that shooting is fun as well as a chal-lenge.

b. Good shooting is the result of the masteryof the five important elements of marksmanship.These elements are-

125

Aiming.Position.Trigger squeeze.Sustained fire.Sight setting.

c. These five elements are tied together by theword COORDINATION. Each element is taughtin the sequence listed above, except that sightsetting may be taught any time. Each step de-pends on material covered in the steps precedingit. Each element is essential to the final result-good shooting.

73. PHASES OF TRAINING

a. Marksmanship training is divided into twophases--

(1) Preparatory marksmanship training.(2) Range firing.

b. Each of the two phases may be divided fur-ther. Preparatory marksmanship training canbe divided into separate instructional steps. Rangefiring includes all firing whether it is on the 1,000-inch range, the larger known-distance ranges, thetransition range, or others. One very importantthing to remember, during all phases of marks-manship training, is that training is progressive.

c. The following guides must be observed dur-ing marksmanship training:

(1) Each soldier must have a good under-standing of how his rifle works beforehe receives instruction in preparatorymarksmanship.

126

(2) No man will be allowed to fire on therange until he has thorough training inpreparatory marksmanship, regardlessof his previous qualification.

Section II. PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIPTRAINING

74. GENERAL

a. You should develop fixed and correct shoot-ing habits before you go on the range. The pur-pose of preparatory marksmanship training is toteach you the essentials of good shooting. Pre-paratory marksmanship training is divided intosix steps. These steps are-

Sighting and aiming exercises.Position exercises.Trigger squeeze exercises.Sustained fire exercises.Effect of wind, sight changes, and use of

the score card.Examination before range firing.Note. The first five steps correspond to the five

elements of marksmanship.

b. The first four steps are listed in the orderof instruction. They must be taught in that order.As the fifth step is not based on material coveredin any of the first four steps, it may be taughtany time before the examination. It may betaught either indoors or outdoors. Therefore, itis an excellent subject to be taught indoors duringbad weather.

127

75. COACHING

a. Throughout all of your preparatory work,one of your important duties will be to act as acoach. You and the other members of your unitwill be organized into instructional groups. Youwill rotate within your group performing theduties of firer and coach. As a coach you areexpected and required to supervise your firerclosely. You will check to see that the firer--

(1) Blacks sights.(2) Adjusts sling properly.(3) Takes correct position.(4) Holds breath while aiming.(5) Aims carefully.(6) Takes up slack promptly.(7) Squeezes trigger properly.(8) Calls the shot.(9) Fills out the score card for each shot.

(10) Observes safety precautions.

b. How well a man learns to shoot depends toa great extent on how well the coach does his job.Thus, a coach's duties are important.

76. PROGRESS CHART

A progress chart like the one below should bekept on all men starting preparatory marksman-ship training. Normally, each platoon keeps aprogress chart. Each experienced squad leadernotes the progress of his men on this chart. Theplatoon leader can tell by a glance at the chart

128

uo!pu!um'gxa Ilu!j

rjoooD ol Al!l!qV

plTo aloos Jo oa- -

pu!A puS Iqq.1[ Jo0

a__ _ _

saouuqo 4 -q!S

aly pou!pasnS

ioqs aql 2u!lluD

(1aolp dn funisl 2UI-pnloul) azaanbs $la2.11i

"u!p~°olaO

Buuis. nbS l _c

lu!laau5

auol, I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I;

:Xlp!dul suo!-,Ood iluiun0sV _.

~< . uo!l!sod qanolo

o uoql!sod ui!puojS

uo!l!sod u!pljnbS O

Q uo!q!sod u!IlaaouI O

uo!sod 2u!q!S $

uo!q!sod auol, I d

qglalq aq~l Bu!ploH

. jsvH--u!ls un0 Jo asfl

dooI--u!is un2 Jo asnf

slqqls fUtn3Bn

--sas!o.lax dnoal joqs

ay_

ql!jA u!m! pus u!iqB.S

129

how far each man has progressed in each sub-ject. Those men weak in- certain steps can begiven more attention to bring them up to therequired standard of proficiency.

77. SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISES

a. The sighting and aiming step of preparatorymarksmanship training consists of three 'exer-cises. They are-

(1) Making correct sight alinement and cor-rect sight picture using the sighting andaiming bar.

(2) Making correct sight alinement and cor-rect sight picture using the rifle sights.

(3) Testing your sight alinement and sightpicture by having three sight picturesmarked at a distance of 50 feet. Thesethree markings will form a shot group.

b. The following equipment is used to teachthese exercises:

(1) Sighting and aiming bar with rear sightand bull's-eye.

(2) Rifle and rifle rest.(3) Three-inch aiming disk.(4) Ammunition box, blank sheet of paper,

thumb tacks, and pencil.(5) Aiming device M15.

c. For details on the use and construction ofthe above equipment, see paragraph 353.

d. Before you are ready to practice any of thethree exercises, you must understand the meaningof sight alinement and sight picture (fig. 59).

130

Figure 59. Sight alinement and sight picture.

(1) When the front and rear sights arebrought into correct adjustment with theeye, the sights are said to be in aline-ment.

(2) The sight picture is the pattern seen bythe rifleman when he aims his rifle. Thispattern includes the front and rear sightsand if a bull's-eye or some other objectis aimed at, it includes that object. Whenthe sight picture is correct, the sightsand the bull's-eye or other object (if thepicture contains one) are in alinement.

(3) To get the correct picture of the sightsalone, look through the rear sight. Now

131


move your rifle until an imaginary hori-zontal line passing through the centerof the rear sight just touches the top ofthe front sight and until an imaginaryvertical line through the center of therear sight passes through the center ofthe front sight.

(4) A complete sight picture is made byadding the bull's-eye. The bull's-eyeshould be centered over the front sight

132

and should appear to be barely touchingit.

(5) In aiming, the correct alinement of thesights in the sight picture is more im-portant than the exact placement of thebull's-eye. A small error in the aline-ment of the bull's-eye in the sight picturewill produce the same error in the strikeof the bullet at all ranges. A small errorin the relationship of the sights in thepicture will produce a much larger errorin the strike of the bullet. The sameerror in the alinement of the sights willincrease as the range is increased.

78. SIGHTING DEVICE, M15

The sighting device, M15, is an excellent train-ing aid for use during marksmanship training.This training aid has movable parts to representthe rear and front sights of the rifle and thebull's-eye. By moving these parts you can setup the correct sight picture. After your instruc-tor explains sight alinement and sight picture,you adjust the sighting device to show the cor-rect sight picture. During marksmanship train-ing, you may be called on to demonstrate yourability to set up the correct sight picture, usingthis device.

79. FIRST SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE

a. The sighting and aiming bar (fig. 60) isused for this exercise. The front and rear sights

133

on the sighting and aiming bar represent thefront and the rear sights of your rifle. The rearsight on the sighting and aiming bar is mov-able. This allows you to make adjustments inthe sight picture. There is no part on your riflethat corresponds to the eyepiece on the sightingand aiming bar. The eyepiece represents the posi-tion of your eye as you adjust the sights, andanyone who looks through the eyepiece will see

TARGET( MOVABLE )

- REAR SIGHT(MOVABLE)

FRONT SIGHT

EYE PIECE(FIXED)

Figure 60. The sighting and aiming bar.

134

the same sight picture that you see. The mov-able target allows for adjustments in the sightpicture.

b. Your instructor will first show you the cor-rect sight picture. He may use a large model, asmaller training aid, or a blackboard to do this.Then you will be paired with another soldier forpractice in this exercise.

c. Using the sighting and aiming bar, yourcoach sets up the correct sight alinement andhands the bar to you to examine. You will seethe position of the front sight in its relation tothe rear sight. Remember that.the sight align-ment must be accurate. Demand precision whenyou are acting as coach so as to help your pupilbecome a good shot.

d. The coach then moves the sights out ofalinement and has you set up the correct sightalinement (fig. 61D). As soon as you have demon-strated your ability to make correct sight aline-ments, the coach sets up other small' errors inalinement and requires you to locate and correctthem.

e. When you are thoroughly familiar withalinement of the sights alone, your coach adds thesmall bull's-eye to complete the sight picture (fig.61®). He hands the sighting and aiming bar toyou so that you may see the correct sight pic-ture. Your coach then moves the bull's-eye andhas you set up the correct sight picture. Whenyou have demonstrated that you can make a cor-rect sight picture, your coach will set up a small

135

. A (

PUPIL MAKING THE aORRECT StGH PICTURE

Figure 61. A pupil making the correct sight alinementand sight picture.

136.

error in the sight picture. You will tell whatthe error is and correct it.

f. You will serve both as a coach and as apupil during preparatory marksmanship andrange firing.

80. BLACKENING THE SIGHTS(fig. 62)

a. To see your rifle sights and the bull's-eyeclearly, you must first clean and then blackenyour sights. Remove all traces of oil and dirt.With dirty and improperly blackened sights, youare unable to take the correct sight alinementand the correct sight picture. Dirty sights causeyou to aim low, because the bull's-eye rests ontop of the dirt rather than squarely on top ofthe front sight. Clean and blackened sights standout clearly and are easy to see. Sights that areclean but not blackened are shiny and difficultto see. Figure 62 shows a rifleman blackeninghis front and rear sights with a carbide lamp.Hold the point of the flame for a few secondsagainst the front and rear sights and against thebarrel near the front sight. Place a uniformcoating of blacking on the metal.

b. The best way to blacken the sights is touse a carbide lamp. If this lamp is not available,you can use a kerosene lamp, candle, small pinestick, smudge pot, or even matches.

c. An effective sight blacking preparation maybe mixed by adding powdered lamp black to di-luted clear shellac.. The quantity of lamp blackused is small in proportion to the total quantity

137

of shellac and is best determined by experiment.This black shellac is applied to the sights witha small varnish brush. The preparation driesrapidly.

81. SECOND SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE

a. Look at figure 63. Here you see the lay-out for the second sighting and aiming exercise.

Figu-re 62. Blacking the sights.

138

The -rifle, rifle rest, aiming box, aiming disk, asheet of paper, a pencil, and the M15 sightingand aiming device are used in conducting thisexercise for each instructional group of four men.The aiming box is located 50 feet from the posi-tion of the rifle. One member of the group isstationed at the aiming box as a marker. Thefront and rear sights of the rifle are blacked.The rear sight is set at 11 clicks of elevation andzero windage. The rifle is placed in the rest andwedged tight using the sling. During, this exer-cise you must be careful not to move the rifleonce you have it pointed at the paper.

b. Your coach now gets into the prone posi-tion without disturbing the rifle. He places bothelbows on the ground and rests his chin in thepalm of his left hand; he signals to the markerwith his right hand. His cheek lightly touchesthe stock so that his eye is approximately thesame distance from the peep sight as it will bein actual firing. The coach then signals themarker to move the small bull's-eye until it isin correct alinement with the rifle sights. Heholds his breath while doing this, just as is donein firing. When the bull's-eye is correctly placedin position, he. calls HOLD to the marker. Yourcoach will then have you look through the sightsso you will see the correct sight picture he hasset up.

c. He will then have the marker move thebull's-eye, and each soldier will take turns makingthe correct sight picture. The coach will set upslight errors in the sight picture and requireeach soldier to correct them.

139

82. THIRD SIGHTING AND AIMING EXERCISE

a. General. The third sighting and aimingexercise is similar to the second exercise with theexception that three sight pictures are plotted(fig. 63) by each group member. The purposeof this exercise is to test your ability in settingup the correct sight picture as well as to con-tinue your instruction on sighting and aiming.

b. How to Conduct the Third Sighting andAiming Exercise. Assume your position behindthe weapon and direct the marker to move thespotter to set up the correct sight picture asyou did during the second exercise. Now, com-mand HOLD and rise (fig. 630). Your coachassumes his position behind the weapon, checksthe sight picture, and makes a mental note of anyerror which exists. He does not comment on anyerror or require any corrections to be made atthis time. The coach calls MARK (fig. 630).The marker then places a dot on the paper byinserting the point of a pencil through the holein the center of the aiming disk. He then removesthe. disk and places a small number 1 above thedot to indicate the first sight picture. This exer-cise is repeated until three sight pictures havebeen plotted and numbered. The'marker thenconnects the three dots with straight lines tomark the shot group and writes the group mem-ber's name under the shot group. The entiregroup then moves to the aiming box where thecoach critiques the group member's performance.He comments on the size and shape of the shotgroup and, at this time, discusses the errors that

140

·t ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~ .' "- S- iN;;4>tis520" D'B : 6Sf '

w

i : ..: : f: ;~~~~, ai > tt '

iV. !. ii~ ! ii id s

J. G oi

~ ~i c! il?~11 i,i~~il

a - "Z-s°>W:IL . . A~_ ~_ ._. . 141:

FOURnmi MANUSING THESIGHTINt ANDAIMING DEVICEM15

; ff \ MARKER'

1 X ,PUP .IL

COACH CHECKS THE SIGHT PICTURE AND CALLS"MARK" -.


he detected when he checked the sight picture. Asatisfactory shot group made from fifty feet isone that can be covered with the eraser end ofa pencil. Each member of the group repeats theexercise until he becomes skilled.

83. ERRORS CAUSING UNSATISFACTORY SHOTGROUPS

You will notice that unsatisfactory shot groupsare either too wide or too high (fig. 64).

a. High and narrow shot groups are causedby inaccurate vertical alinement of the sights or

142

A BTOP OF FRONT SIGHT NOT BULLS-EYE NOT TANGENTON THE HORIZONTAL TO FRONT SIGHTDIAMETER OF PEEP SIGHT

EITHER KIND OF ERROR (A OR B) WILL PRODUCE ASHOT GROUP SIMILAR TO I ABOVE

C DFRONT SIGHT NOT CENTERED BULLS-EYE TANGENT'TOFROM RIGHT TO LEFT IN FRONT SIGHT BUT NOT AT

PEEP SIGHT THE MIDPOINT

EITHER KIND OF ERROR (C OR D) WILL PRODUCE ASHOT GROUP SIMILAR TO 2 ABOVE

Figure 64. Errors causing unsatisfactory shot groups.

143

by placing the bull's-eye above or below the topof the front sight (( of fig. 64).

b. Flat and wide shot groups are caused byinaccurate horizontal alinement of the sightswith each other or of the sights with the bull's-eye (® of fig. 64).

c. A shot group both high and wide is causedby a combination of the errors listed above.

d. In ® of figure 64 the long axis of the groupis horizontal. This is a result of one of twoerrors. Either the front sight was not centeredfrom right to left in the rear sight or the bull's-eye was not centered above the front sight, butwas off-centered to the right or left.

84. IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT SIGHTING ANDAIMING

Remember-

a. That the front sight is accurately centeredin the rear sight. This is the most importantpart in aiming.

b. That you do not breathe while aiming.c. That the bull's-eye is centered above and

appears to barely touch the top of the front sight.d. That the last focus of your eye is on the

front sight. This will leave the front sight clearand sharp, while the bull's-eye will appear to bea bit fuzzy.

85. POSITION EXERCISES

a. In the second step of preparatory marks-manship you will receive instruction in the prone,

144

'kneeling, squatting, sitting, standing, crouch andaerial target positions; in adjusting the sling tobe used with these positions; and in the methodof holding your breath while aiming. What youlearn in the first step, you practice in the second.

b. The rifle sling is used for-(1) Holding the rifle steady while firing.(2) Carrying the rifle.

c. The sling is used for all firing positions ex-cept the crouch and aerial target positions. Eitherof two sling adjustments, known as the loopsling and the hasty sling, may be used in all otherpositions. The loop adjustment is the better ofthe two, except in the standing position.

86. ADJUSTING THE LOOP SLING (LEATHER) FORTHE PRONE, SITTING, SQUATTING, ANDKNEELING POSITIONS

a. Place the rifle butt on your right hip andcradle the rifle on the inside of your right fore-arm, sights to the right (fig. 650). Both of yourhands are now free to adjust the sling. Loosenthe sling, then unhook the lower hook and re-hook it down near the butt swivel.

b. The loop to be placed on your arm is formedby that part of the long strap between the D-ringand the lower keeper. For the average sling ad-justment, unhook the upper hook and engage itfour to six holes from the end of the long strap(fig. 650). To shorten or lengthen the sling to

conform with your body and arms, make the ad-justment by moving the upper hook. Push thelower keeper up; the loop now formed is the loop

145

2 UNHOOK UPPER HOOK AND

ENGAGE IT IN SIXTH HOLE

FROM FEED END OF LONG

STRAR.HIS IS THE AD.

JUSTMENT FOR THE AVERAGESOLDIER

UNHOOK THE LOWER HOOKANjD REH6OK IT NEARTHE SUTT SWIVEL

Figure 65. Adjustment of the loop sling (leather).

for your left arm. Straighten out the sling so

that it lies flat, then give it a half turn to the

146

left. Insert your left arm through the loop untilthe loop is high on the upper arm, above the bi-ceps (fig. 650). Now, using both hands, left handon the outside strap, right hand on the inside,rotate the sling through the upper swivel, mov-ing the lower keeper and upper hook downwardto your arm. This tightens the loop on your arm.Now, to keep the loop from slipping, pull the

5 GIVE THE SLONG A HALFTURN TO THE LEFT

3 PUSH THE LOWER KEEPER UP

4 THS FORMS THE LOOPP0 YOUR ARM

LAOE TH LEFT ARM


147

a LOCK THE SLINGTIGHT ON YOUR ARMBY MOVING THE UPPERKEEPER DOWNWARD AGAINSTTHE UPPER HOOK


148

upper keeper down tight against the upper hook,locking it in place (fig. 65®). The feed end ofthe sling is left hanging downward. Do not rollit up between the keepers as this will stretchthem.

c. For the average soldier, the adjustment ofthe loop sling in the kneeling, squatting, and sit-

9 HAND IS FORWARDTO THE STOCKFERRULE SWIVEL

10 SLING WILL BEFLAT AGAINST'

j / SBACK OF HANDAND WRIST

KEEPER


149

ting positions is about two holes shorter thanthat for the prone position.

d. After the sling has been adjusted on theupper arm, grasp the rifle so that the hand isagainst the stock ferrule swivel and the sling liesflat against the back of the left hand (fig. 65®).

e. Before taking your position, place your lefthand so that the rifle lies in the center of the Vformed by your thumb and first finger.

f. Some leeway in the position of the loop onthe arm is permitted. In general, the loop shouldbe above the biceps; however, experience hasshown that many men get good results with thesling somewhat lower. It is important that day-light be visible between the sling and the crookof the arm formed at the elbow.

g. Be sure the sling is doing its share of thework in giving your rifle full support. The ten-dency of most men is to use a sling adjustmentwhich is too long (loose). A properly adjustedsling means a steady rifle (fig. 66).

87. ADJUSTMENT OF THE LOOP SLING (WEB) FORTHE PRONE, SITTING, SQUATTING, ANDKNEELING POSITIONS

a. Place the butt of the rifle on your right hipand cradle the rifle on the inside of your rightforearm, sights to the right (fig. 670). Both ofyour hands are now free to adjust the sling. Un-snap the hook from the butt swivel. The loop tobe used is formed by pulling the strap throughthe two slots of the buckle until it is large enoughfor your arm. To do this, hold the buckle in the

150

o,

X

To

S .

3

i o

co

i ·$

-i :.~~~~~~~~~~~~ To

l o

! t'!:: : : :I : : :~~~~~~~I"·~~"·:~~~~~'': :-i~~~l-:~~~~,-

· A.

;::: -~~~~~~~~l:~::: ~~~:: ~ :~: ,::I-~151

right hand; with the left hand, grasp the strapas it passes through the buckle and pull it straightout until the loop is formed. Holding the loopin the left hand, give the sling a half turn tothe left. Holding the buckle in the right hand,pass the left arm through the loop until it restshigh on the upper arm above the muscle. Tightenthe loop on the arm (fig. 67(). With the right

3 HOLD THE SUCKLEIN THE RIGHT HAND

3 PULL SLING THROUGHTHE TWO SLOTS OF THEBUCKLE. THIS FORMSTHE LOOP FOR THE ARM

1 RIFLE CRADLEOON RtGif AM

2 UNHOOK THE HOOK FROMBUTT SWIVEL

IBUTT OF RIFLON RIGHT

I ____________- _

Figure 67. Adjusting the loop sling (web).

152

4 GIVE THE SLING A

HALF TURN TO THE

LEFT

5 PLACE THE LOOP HIGHON THE UPPER ARM.ABOVE THE BICEPS


hand, grasp the feed end of the sling and unloosenthe keeper (fig. 67®). Pull the feed end of thesling toward the butt of the rifle until the propersling adjustment is reached. Average adjustmentis obtained when the feed. end reaches the trigger

153

9 MOVE THE KEEPER DOWNSO ASNOT TO INTERFEREWITH THE LEFT HAND

6 TIGHTEN THE LOOPON THE ARM

8 PULL THE FEED ENDOF THE SLING TOWARDYOUR BODY UNTiL YOURADJUSTMENT IS REACHED

7 WITH HE RIGHT HANDUNHOOK THE KEEPER BYPULLING OUT ON THEFEED END OF-THE SLING


guard. Move the keeper toward the butt of therifle until it is out of the way of the left hand.Lock the keeper. Place the left hand over the

154

sling and move the hand forward to the stockferrule swivel.

b. The adjustment of the sling for the kneel-ing, sitting, and squatting positions is the sameas the adjustment for the prone position, exceptthat it will be somewhat shorter. You will haveto determine this by experience. The point toremember is that the sling must be so adjustedthat you have to force the rifle butt into yourshoulder, giving maximum support to your rifle.

88. BREATHING

Obviously, if your chest and back are moving,your rifle will move up and down. To preventthis, take a breath of air, then let out a little, andstop breathing by closing your throat (fig. 68).Hold your breath naturally. If you do not fireyour shot in a reasonable length of time (8 or 9seconds), do not attempt to fire, but take severalbreaths and start all over again. Do not tightenup. Do not become breathless. Practice will teachyou to control your breathing without discom-fort. Coaches must check pupils carefully on thispoint: watch the firer's back; if it rises and fallswhile he is aiming, he is breathing. Watch themuzzle of the rifle. If it seesaws, the firer'isbreathing.

89. RELAXATION AND BONE SUPPORT

a. Now you are ready to learn the firing posi-tions. There are two things to remember aboutthese positions. First, you must be relaxed. Sec-

155

w

X:

I

156

ond, to be relaxed, your position must be suchthat the bones of your body, rather than yourmuscles, support your rifle. You may have diffi-culty in getting the correct position because yourmuscles are not limbered up. In a few days, after

Figure 69. Bones, not muscular effort, support the rifle.

157

some practice and stretching, you will be ableto take the correct position easily.

b. Figure 69 makes the idea a little clearer.In the first picture, the 10-pound weight has asteady support in the straight up and down stick.In the second picture, the stick is slanting; thisis not a steady support for the weight. Hold yourrifle as shown in the first picture. Do not hold itas shown in the second one. If you do, yourmuscles will not be able to hold the rifle steady.

c. Remember, use your bones, and your posi-tion will be both comfortable and steady.

90. PRONE POSITION(fig. 70)

a. This position is the one most frequentlyused. It is natural to assume, steady and com-fortable.

b. To take the prone position, stand facingyour target with your left hand forward to thestock ferrule swivel and your right hand on theheel of the butt. Spread your feet a comfortabledistance apart, shift your weight slightly to therear and drop to your knees. Place the toe ofthe butt about 30 inches in front of your rightknee on a line from your right knee to the tar-get. Pivot on the rifle down onto your left sideand place the left elbow on the line of your rightknee, the butt of the rifle, and the target. Forcethe butt of the rifle into your right shoulder.Grasp the small of the stock with your righthand and lower the elbow to the ground so thatthe shoulders are level. Aim at your target.

158

c. These are the important features of thelirone position:

(1) The rifle rests in the V formed by thethumb and first finger and against theheel of the hand.

(2) The left wrist is straight.(3) The left elbow is under the rifle.(4) The fingers and thumb of the left hand

are relaxed.(5) The left hand is forward against the

stock ferrule swivel' (unless the firerhas a very short arm).

(6) Daylight is visible between the slingand the crook of the elbow.

(7) The left shoulder is relaxed forward.(8) The spine is straight; the legs are

spread a comfortable distance apart.(9) The toes are pointing outward; the

heels, if possible without discomfort,should touch the ground.

(10) The angle made by the pupil's spine andthe rifle is 30 ° or less. The firer mustbe well behind the rifle, so that hisweight will act against the recoil ofthe rifle and cause the muzzle to dropback into position after each shot.

(11) The butt of the rifle is seated well intothe pocket formed in the shoulder as theright elbow is moved forward.

(12) The right elbow is far enough out sothat the shoulders are parallel to theground.

159

-q~~~~,*

160

wI U~d $U,01 .·4

160~~~B

(13) The small of the stock is gripped firmlywith the right hand, the thumb on topof or over the top of the stock.

(14) The trigger finger, between the tip andthe second joint, contacts the trigger.As a general rule, it is best if no partof the trigger finger touches the stock asthis may hinder proper trigger squeeze.

(15) The neck is relaxed. The cheek shouldrest firmly against the stock and thethumb of the firing hand. This contactbetween the cheek and the thumb isknown as the spot weld. It is natural totake the same grip with the right handeach time, and the spot weld will posi-tion your eye the same distance fromthe rear sight for every shot.

(16) The weight of the upper body is re-laxed forward against the tension of thesling.

d. You now have the two points that you arestriving for: bone support and muscular relaxa-tion.

91. ERRORS IN THE PRONE POSITION

Errors most frequently found in the prone posi-tion and the method of correcting them follow:

a. Body Placed at Too Great an Angle withRifle. This fault may be detected by observingwhether the front part of the body is held toohigh off the ground and whether the eye is tooclose to the receiver. Another way to detect thiserror is to mentally draw a line through the rifle

161

barrel straight to the rear, and another linethrough the firer's spine; the angle formed shouldnot be more than 30°. Because of this commonfault, most of the recoil is taken up by the shoul-der instead of being absorbed by the entire body.The cause of this may be a too short sling adjust-ment. To correct this, the coach unhooks the slingand has the firer .move his body until he has thecorrect angle. - The coach then rehooks the sling.Another cause may be that the firer faces to theright before going into position. To correct this,he rises, faces his target, then assumes the proneposition.

b. Right Elbow Too Close to the Boly. Theright shoulder will be higher than the left shoul-der'and the back may appear to be twisted. Tocorrect this, the firer moves the right elbow out-ward and forward so that the right shoulder islevel with the left shoulder.

c. Left Elbow not Under the Rifle. This erroris easy to detect. In this position the rifle willnot return to the same position after each shot.Accuracy and cadence in sustained fire is diffi-cult, if not impossible, unless the elbow is underthe receiver. The firer remedies this by relaxinghis left shoulder and moving his elbow under therifle. This is best done with the rifle butt re-moved from the shoulder. Even though you findthis a bit difficult at first, relaxation and prac-tice will enable you to place your elbow under therifle.

d. Improper Grip. This term is used to de-scribe the error that exists when the wrist is

162

bent and not straight. This is caused by not plac-ing the rifle in the V formed by the thumb andfirst finger, and by having the rifle rest in thepalm of the hand rather than on the heel of thehand. To correct this, the firer removes the buttof the rifle from his shoulder and moves his handso that the rifle is in the V and resting on theheel of his hand.

92. KNEELING POSITION(fig. 710®®)

a. This position is frequently used on levelground or ground that slopes upward. It is asteady position and can be used to great advan-tage if you do not have time or space to assumethe prone position or when your view of the tar-get would be obscured from that position.

b. To take the kneeling position, face your tar-get. Hold the rifle with the left hand forward tothe stock ferrule swivel and the right hand onthe rifle butt. Make a right face and then placethe left foot about 18 inches to the left front.Rotate over the right toe down onto the rightknee. Sit on the right heel with the right but-tock.. Place the left elbow forward of the leftknee several inches. Force the rifle butt into yourshoulder and grasp the small of the stock. Theright elbow is horizontal or slightly below hori-zontal. Finally, shift the weight forward ontothe left leg. Aim at your target.

c. These are the important features of thekneeling position--

(1) The firer kneels on his right knee.

163

MAXIMUM CONTACT WITH GROUND

Figure 71. The kneeling position.

(2) He sits on his right heel so that thereis solid contact between his right heeland his right buttock. If at first thisputs too much strain on the instep, diga small hole for your toe. Practice in

164

P 00

C % t G X ' S * ' * ' u 4

a 9 \1 f i I 4 , 1 ?

Ego ut g :1~ i I

'V .kl .w 1

z ~ ~ ~~o

k 1

0 0~t

165

E FT LEG V ERTCAL

TOE pOTNTHNG

:TOWARD TARGET

Figure 71---Continued.

this position will eliminate the need forthis hole.

(3) The rifle rests in the V formed by thethumb and first finger and on the heelof the left hand.

166

(4) The left wrist is straight.(5) The left elbow is directly under the rifle,

for bone support.(6) The left elbow is several inches forward

of the left knee; this moves the weightof the body forward.

(7) Daylight can be seen between the slingand the crook of the elbow.

(8) The left lower leg is vertical as viewedfrom the front.

(9) The toes of the left foot point generallyat the target.

(10) The left foot is drawn back, then thebody weight is relaxed forward so thatsolid contact is made between the calfof the leg and the thigh.

(11) Notice the position of the right knee.It is placed so that the right thigh formsan angle of 90° with the line of aim. Theentire surface of the lower leg, fromknee to toe, is in contact with the ground.The weight of the body is forward. Thistakes most of the weight off the rightleg and puts it on the left leg. The rightleg now completes a solid three-pointbase. If the right leg forms an angle ofless than 90° , then the three-point baseis reduced in size. If the angle is greater,the firer is straining the thigh muscles.

(12) The grasp on the rifle by the right hand,the position of the cheek against thethumb of the firing hand, and the fingeron the trigger are the same as for theprone position.

167

(13) The right elbow is raised to the heightof, or slightly below, the right shoulder,thus forming a pocket or recess in whichto seat the butt of the rifle. If the rightelbow is held too low, a too shallowpocket is formed. This is a serious dis-advantage in sustained fire.

93. ERRORS IN THE KNEELING POSITION

Errors most frequently found in the kneelingposition and the method of correcting them are-

a. Sitting on the Inside of the Right Foot. Thisthrows the weight of the body too far to the rear.For this reason, sitting on the inside of the rightfoot is not a suitable position for sustained fire.In exceptional cases where the physical conforma-tion of the man indicates unusual difficulty in as-suming the prescribed position, and after the in-structor has required the man to attempt toadapt himself to the normal position, the instruc-tor may authorize him to use this modified posi-tion.

b. Left Elbow and Knee not Under the Rifle.Here the muscles, and not the bones, are support-ing the rifle. To correct this, the firer takes therifle butt from his shoulder and moves the leftfoot to the right, then completes his position.

c. Point-to-Point Contact. When the tip of theelbow rides directly on the knee, a very unsteadyposition is the result: To correct this, the firermoves the elbow forward of and below the knee.This will shift the weight forward.

168

d. Right Thigh not at Right Angle to the Lineof Aim. To correct this, the firer moves his rightknee to obtain a 900 angle.

e. Improper Grip. Correct this as described inparagraph 91d.

94. ALTERNATE KNEELING POSITIONS

a. A man with long legs may modify the kneel-ing position by:

(1) Placing the left foot forward of the knee.This will lower the knee. Each firer willhave to determine how far to move hisleft foot forward to bring his line of aimdown on the bull's-eye.

(2) By placing his elbow farther forward.This will lower his aim. Do not placethe knee in the armpit.

b. A man with short legs may modify the kneel-ing position by-

(1) Positioning the left leg so that it is ver-tical from the foot to the knee as viewedfrom the side as well as from the front.This will give the firer the maximumheight of his leg.

(2) Bringing his elbow back as far as pos-sible; this will raise his aim. Remem-ber, the tip of the elbow must not reston top of the knee.

95. SQUATTING POSITION(fig. 72)

a. This position has important advantages incombat. It can be quickly assumed with either

169

the loop or hasty sling. The feet only are in con-tact with the ground, making this a good posi-tion to use when firing in mud, shallow water,snow, or in an area contaminated with gas.

b. To take the squatting position, the firer halffaces to the right, spreads his feet a comfortabledistance apart, and balances his weight equallyon both feet. He then squats as low as possible.He places his left elbow down over his knee, thenplaces the butt of his rifle in the pocket of theright shoulder and takes the correct grip withthe right hand. The right arm is blocked on theinside of the right knee.

c. These are the important features of thesquatting position-


(2) The left elbow is under the rifle.(3) The left wrist is straight.(4) The left elbow is below and forward of

the left knee.(5) Daylight can be seen between the sling

and the crook of the elbow.(6) The shoulders are level.(7) The backs of the upper and lower legs

are in the fullest possible contact fromthe knees downward.

(8) The feet are flat on the ground.(9) The right elbow is blocked on the inside

of the right knee.(10) The right hand grip is the same as for

the prone and kneeling position.

170

' U w'

0o

_ o_0_____o 03

Wm 0 tQ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 7

0 0

Jwz c~~~

[ ____ ___a~ :02t

17

(11) The body is relaxed with the weight for-ward over the left leg.

96. ERRORS IN THE SQUATTING POSITION

Errors found frequently in the squatting posi-tion and the method of correcting them are-

a. Contact with Ground Made only with Ballsof Feet. As a result of this error, the rifleman isin an unstable position and will be thrown offbalance in firing. The remedy is to place the heelson the ground and to relax the body and shiftthe weight forward over the left leg. Separatingthe feet more widely helps in getting the heels onthe ground.

b. Body not Relaxed and Weight not ShiftedForward Over Left Leg. This position is unstable.It will cause the rifleman to be thrown off balanceas soon as he begins to fire. The firer must makea conscious effort to relax, especially in the legs,and shift the weight forward over the left leg.

c. Left Elbow not Under the Rifle. The firerfaces more to the right. This will cause him tomove his line of aim more over the left arm.

97. SITTING POSITION(fig. 7300)

a. For steadiness, this position is second onlyto the prone position. It is suitable for use wherethe grass is high, or for any other reason wherethe view w6uld be obscured in the prone position.It is -also suitable for firing downhill.

b. To assume the sitting position, the riflemanhalf faces to the right, spreads his feet a comfort-

172

able distance apart, and sits down. He breaks hisfall by using the right hand and arm and thenmoves his buttocks to the rear until the under-sides of his knees are about a hand span off theground. He bends forward from the waist, plac-ing the left upp'er arm on the flat part of theshinbone so that the tip of the elbow is crossedover the shinbone. There should be several inchesof contact between the upper arm and the shin-bone. Forcing the rifle butt into his shoulder, hetakes the correct grip on the rifle and blocks hisright elbow in front of the right knee. He thenrelaxes his body into the sling.

c. These are the important features of the sit-ting position-


(2) The left elbow is under the rifle; the leftwrist is straight.

(3) Daylight is visible between the sling andthe crook of the elbow.

(4) The left upper arm is forward and downover the left knee, having several inchesof contact with the flat part of the leftshin, the tip of the elbow crossed overthe shinbone.

(5) The weight of the body is relaxed for-ward at the waist.

(6) The feet are farther apart than the knees,with the feet relaxed forward at theankles.

(7) The weight of the upper part of the bodyis forward on the legs.

17"

f% O g~~~~Jg z~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~o

W.uiiol

Z nriro~~~~~~~i

00"~

174~~~~~~~t1

A - 7-7

1~~~~~~~~~~~~

OWI

~~~~~i- - -C

175

TM

· ~ !? · , i

~i ~ ,~i?~i ~"~?

~!~~ i.

i~ ~ ·>' d S~i~~ ~ii...

~l*,-~ ~ ~ n~I W

;** U~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~3

o.~~~~~~~~~~~~~5

0 Z

(8) The butt of the rifle is held in the pocketof the right shoulder by the tension ofthe sling.

(9) The right arm is blocked by the rightknee.

(10) The grip on the small of the stock, theposition of the trigger finger, and. thespot weld between the cheek and thumbare the same as in the other positions.

98. ERRORS IN THE SITTING POSITION

Errors found frequently in the sitting positionand the method of correcting them are-

a. Tips of Elbows Resting on Top of Knees(Point-to-Point Contact). This error results in anunstable support for the rifle. It places the bodyin a position which is too erect. Each shot willdestroy the position. To correct this error, thefirer lowers his knees, bends his body well for-ward at the waist, and makes contact between theleft upper arm and the left shinbone. He blocksthe right elbow in front of the right knee.

b. Knees Farther Apart Than the Feet. Thiserror causes muscular strain rather than relaxa-tion. This error may have been caused by one ofthe following faults:

(1) Placing the feet too close together. Tocorrect this, the firer lowers his legs andspreads his feet farther apart, then com-pletes the position.

(2) Turning the toes outward, which throwsthe knees outward. To correct this, the

176

firer turns the toes inward slightly andputs the weight of the rifle down on theshinbone instead of outward.

c. Toes Pointing Up. This usually indicatesmuscular tension. To correct this, the man relaxeshis leg muscles.

d. Left Elbow not Under the Rifle. To correctthis, the firer moves his feet 5 or 6 inches to theright.

e. Improper Grip. To correct this, the firer re-moves the rifle butt from his shoulder and moveshis hand so that the rifle is in the V and restingon the heel of his hand.

99. ALTERNATE SITTING POSITIONS

a. Cross-Legged Position (fig. 74). In this posi-tion the firer sits with the left leg crossed overthe right leg. His feet are drawn up close to thebody so that the outer part of the calf of each legrests on the inside of the opposite foot. The backof the upper arms are supported against the shin-bones and are very nearly at right angles to them.The rest of this position is the same as for thenormal sitting position.

b. Cross-Ankled Position (fig. 75).(1) In this position the left ankle is crossed

over the right ankle, the legs extendedwell away from the body. Here, as in thecross-legged position, the upper arms aresupported by the shins. The rest of thisposition is the same as the normal sittingposition.

177

w~~~~~~" ~

uJ 00

z -> w wa ·

z I

_1 w I

.2 ~~>n 5rze-;t ralo 0 t

z 00~~~~~

0 Va~~~~~~~~~~~~~

a. I.-t w z t) a O<-ir 4 -

0 W~~a 3

IT -

"t~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ z

18,

178 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~s'·:r

-z

I~~~~J.~~~~~~~~~~~.

o I< z a < zJW~~~ ~ 1. 1 -IJ~

i~~~cnm 'si 1 ,sr~~~~~~m

(ft 0 zz

IL uid < I21 0

4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1

o w 1

r lr~~~~~~~~~~~~~7

(2) The cross-ankled position provides onlya two-point base of support and is lessstable than the cross-legged position,which has a three-point base. A firerweighing less than 170 pounds shouldavoid the cross-ankled position. Theamount of leg extension depends on theleg conformation of the firer. Care mustbe taken in this position that the kneesare not held up by sheer muscular effort.

100. ADJUSTMENT OF THE HASTY SLING

a. General. The hasty sling is used in the stand-ing position. In other positions the loop sling isnormally used in training, because it gives bettersupport than the hasty sling. However, the hastysling has one advantage--it can be adjustedquicker and easier than the loop adjustment. Incombat, where speed may be essential, use of thehasty sling is advantageous.

b. Adjusting the Hasty Sling (Leather). If thesling is adjusted for the loop sling, unhook thelower hook and rehook it in the parade position.Now place the butt of the rifle on your right hip,cradled in your right arm. This leaves both handsfree to adjust the sling. Grasp the outside strapnear the butt swivel with the left hand; with theright hand, grasp the inside strap of the slingnear the stock ferrule swivel. Pull down with theleft hand and upward with the right hand. Thiswill loosen the sling. Continue this until the slingextends about two inches below the rifle butt.Grasp the rifle at the small of the stock with the

180

right hand. With the left hand, give the sling ahalf turn to the left. Insert your left arm betweenthe sling and the rifle so that the sling is high onthe left upper arm. Pass the left hand to the leftand under the sling and then to the right overthe sling (fig. 76). Grasp the rifle with the lefthand. If the sling has been given a half turn, it

t.

Figure 76. Adjusting the hasty sling (leather).

181

3 ROTATE SLING UNTILKEEPER AND FEED ENDOF SLING ARE UNDERTRIGGER HOUSING FLOORPLATE

tHOLD KEEPER INRIGHT HAND

2 UNHOOK KEEPER fYPULLING OUT ON THEFEED END OF THESLING WITH THE LEFTHAND

Figure 77. Adjusting the hasty sling (web).

will lie flat along the back of the left hand andwrist. Another method of adjusting the hastysling is as follows: from the parade position, un-hook the lower hook and count down 10 or 11pairs of holes. Rehook the lower hook. This willextend the sling 2 or 3 inches below the butt of

182

the rifle. Either method of adjustment describedabove will fit the average soldier; however, eachman will have to determine his correct sling ad-justment.

4 GIVE THE SLING AHALF TURN TO THELEFT

5 PLACE THE SLING HIGHON THE UPPER ARM

FFigure 77--Conti~nued.

183

GRAsF THE RILE( 50THAT THE SLING LIESFLAT AGAINST THE BACOF THE HAND AND WRST :


c. Adjusting the Hasty Sling (Web). Place thebutt of the rifle on your right hip, cradled on yourright arm. This leaves both hands free to adjustthe sling. Holding the keeper in the right hand,grasp the feed end of the sling with the left hand,pull out on it, and unhook the keeper. Move thekeeper and feed end of the sling until they are.positioned by the trigger housing floor plate (fig.

184

770). This is the sling adjustment for the aver-age soldier. Lock the keeper. Give the sling a halfturn to the left; then place the left arm throughthe sling so that the sling is high on the upperarm (fig. 77®). Move the left hand to the left andunder the sling and then to the right over thesling. Grasp the rifle with the left hand betweenthe balance and the stock ferrule swivel. If thesling has been given a half turn to the left, it willlie flat along the back of the left hand and wrist(fig. 77®). Each man will have to determine hisown correct sling adjustment by moving thekeeper and feed end of the sling until this adjust-ment is reached.

101. STANDING POSITION

a. The standing position, which is known asthe offhand position, is normally used in the as-sault. This position is used for a range of about100 yards. In firing from this position, the rifle-man quickly assumes the position, fires, and thenmoves forward.

b. To assume this position, stand facing yourtarget, make a right face, and spread your feetten to fourteen inches apart. Now move the rightfoot forward a few inches. This places your bodyat an angle of approximately 85° with your lineof aim. Place the sling on your arm and the lefthand just forward of the balance. With the righthand, raise the rifle butt upward until the sightsare level with' the eyes and the toe of the butt ishigh on the shoulder (fig. 78). About half of thebutt should be visible from the rear. Raise the

I 85

06

Iw

186

RIGHT ELSOW APPROXIMATELy ..S. T W' I NOT NECE .Y45 ABOVE THE LEVEL OF THE T IW ESIL NO FcnW OW trETSRSHOULDERS BUT JS DESIRAPLE IF

CAN GET IT E +W

BALANCE AND THE STOCIKFERRULESWIVEL

LEFT ARM UNDERTHE RECEIVER

FIRM GRIP ON SMALL OFSTOCK WITH DAYLIGHTBETWEEN TRIGGER FINGERAND STOCK

WEIGHT VOJALLY ON SOTH!FEET. FEET COMFORTABLEDISTANCE APART

Figure 79. The standing position.

right arm as high as possible, even stretch a little,and then bend the arm at the elbow until the handcan grasp the small of the stock. The right elbowis now at an angle of approximately 45° abovethe level of the shoulders. Take a firm grip on thesmall of the stock and pull back hard. This willkeep the butt of the rifle pressed into the pocket

187

of the right shoulder. Finally, make sure that thehips are level and the weight of the body is evenlydistributed on both feet (fig. 79).

c. These are the features of the standing posi-tion-

(1) The body is faced to the right, about 85 °

with the line of aim.(2) The feet are spread 10 to 14 inches

apart.(3) The weight of the body rests equally on

both feet.(4) The left hand may be anywhere. between

the balance and the stock ferrule swivel,with the rifle in the V formed by thefingers and resting on the heel of thehand.

(5) The left elbow is under, or nearly under,the rifle.

(6) The butt of the rifle is high on the rightshoulder.

(7) The right elbow is 450 above the levelof the shoulders. The right arm and handdo all the holding -the left arm onlysteadies the rifle.

(8) The spot weld of the cheek and the rightthumb is used when possible; otherwise,the cheek is pressed firmly against thestock.

(9) The trigger finger is on the trigger andarched so that it does not bear againstthe stock.

(10) The firer relaxes the weight of his trunk

188

straight down and evenly distributed onboth hips.

102. ERRORS FREQUENTLY FOUND IN THE STAND-ING POSITION

The errors most frequently found in the stand-ing position and the method of correcting themare-

a. Feet Spread Too Far Apart. The firer shouldplace his feet as if he were going to stand stillfor about an hour without moving them.

b. Weight not Evenly Placed on Both Hips. Thefirer should relax his weight straight down.

c. Neck Bent Sideways or Forward to Get theCheek Against the Stock. Hold the head erect andbring the rifle sights up to the eyes. A sling whichis too short may be pulling the rifle down.Lengthen the sling enough to place the butt ofthe rifle high on the shoulder.

103. CROUCH POSITION(fig. 80)

a. This is a position from which you can de-liver fire quickly in a sudden engagement with theenemy at extremely short ranges up to 30 or 35yards. Fire from this position is delivered rapidlywhile the firer has his body bent at the knees andwaist, offering a smaller target to the enemy.From this position the firer may move in anydirection, making himself a difficult target to hit.

b. These are the important features of thecrouch position-

189

r--------

4

-4--K~ ~ ·-.z4~~s

z~Ir00~ ~~~~~I

I" UooI E" 8

Or, ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ,

(1) The feet are spread a comfortable dis-tance apart, with one foot leading.

(2) The knees are bent, making the body asmaller target.

(3) The rifle is grasped firmly at the smallof the stock with the right hand.

(4) The right forearm is along the comb ofthe stock.

(5) The left arm is straight without stiff-ness, the hand grasping the rifle firmlynear the front band.

(6) The weight of the body is well balancedso that the firer may move quickly in anydirection.

(7) The firer keeps his eyes on his target.Within his cone of vision he can see hisrifle extended toward the target.

(8) He aims with the rifle, right arm, andhand.

(9) He uses the left arm to raise or lowerhis aim.

(10) The firm grip that the firer has on -therifle with both hands enables him to firerapidly and accurately.

c. During practice or firing in this position, thecoach corrects the slightest error and demandsperfection. Your duties as coach include seeingthat-

(1) The position has stability.(2) The position is a natural one, being well

balanced to eliminate awkwardness.(3) The upper right arm hangs straight down

with the forearm pressed against thecomb of the stock.

191

(4) The rifle is level.(5) The firer keeps his eyes on the target.

104. AERIAL TARGET FIRING POSITION(fig. 81)

a. General. The positions used in firing at aerialtargets are those that can be assumed rapidly,that afford the maximum flexibility to the bodyfor operation of the rifle, and that do not requireundue exposure of the firer. The kneeling or stand-ing position will usually be taken. The kneelingposition best meets the requirements listed aboveas it is less vulnerable than the standing position.

b. Firing Positions.(1) Aerial target firing positions differ from

those used in ground target firing inthat-

(a) The sling is not used.(b) The arms are not supported but move

freely with the body in any direction.(c) In the kneeling position, the buttock

does not rest on the right heel and theleft foot is well advanced to the leftfront. The weight is slightly forward.

(2) The positions must be such that the rifle,the body from the waist up, the arms,and the head are a fixed unit.

(3) When leading a target, the rifle is swungwith a smooth, uniform motion. This isaccomplished by pivoting the body at thewaist. There should be no independentmovement of the arms, shoulders, heador rifle.

192

Figure 81. The aerial target position.

c. Duties of the Coach. During practice inteaching aerial target positions, the coach seesthat-

(1) The proper position is taken.

(2) The rifle is swung with a smooth, uni-form motion.

193

(3) The rifle is swung by pivoting the bodyat the waist.

(4) The arms, shoulders, rifle, and headmove as a unit as the rifle is swung.

(5) The pupil continues to aim and squeezethe trigger during the entire trackingof the target.

105. TRIGGER SQUEEZE(fig. 82)

a. Importance of Trigger Squeeze. The mostimportant single factor in marksmanship is trig-ger squeeze. Everything about your position andaim may be perfect, but, unless you squeeze thetrigger correctly, your shot will not go where youhave aimed it. Squeezing the trigger correctlyis not as easy as it might appear; the techniquemust be fully understood before you can hope todo it perfectly. If you jerk the trigger, you losecontrol. It is important to understand that jerk-ing the trigger may disturb the sights only slight-ly. Even this slight movement, however, willspoil an otherwise good shot. A bigger movement-the one which really spoils the aim-is a bodymovement which occurs before the bullet leavesthe barrel. This movement, made in anticipationof the recoil of the rifle, will occur if you knowin advance when the recoil will come. This move-ment is called flinching. The trigger must besqueezed so steadily that you do not know atwhich instant the rifle is to fire. If you do notknow when the rifle is to fire, you will not spoil

194

your aim by flinching, because you do not knowwhen to flinch.

b. How to Apply Trigger Squeeze to Fire YourRifle. After completing your position, take abreath of air, expel part of it and lock yourthroat. Align your sights on the bull's-eye, takeup the slack and part of the squeeze with a firminitial pressure; continue the steady movementof your trigger finger straight to the rear untilthe rifle fires. Now, if the rifle fires before youexpect it to, the shot will be good, for you are

X WACH HOWS T m

Figure 82. Trigger squeeze.

195

· ACH THA HE E H


holding your breath and your sights are alignedon the bull's-eye. To remember this sequence,think of the word BASS-BREATHE-AIM.(Take up the) SLACK-SQUEEZE (until therifle fires).

c. Important Points in Trigger Squeeze.(1) Apply pressure with the trigger finger

only.(2) Once the slack is taken up, pressure is

firm and continuous straight to the

196

rear. However, if the rifle does not firein a reasonable length of time (8 or 9seconds) after the slack is taken up,release the pressure and take anotherbreath and start all over. Apply pres-sure straight to the rear to avoid pull-ing the sights out of alinement.

(3) Your attention must be divorced fromyour trigger finger. This finger worksautomatically when you are well trained.Then you can concentrate all of yourattention on the correct sight picture.

(4) Every shot must be a surprise to you.This means that you should not knowprecisely when the rifle will fire. Other-wise, you will instinctively brace your-self to meet the recoil. Such bracing ortensing of the muscles will disturb thesight picture.

(5) The difference between the unqualifiedsoldier and the expert may be measuredby their ability to squeeze the triggercorrectly.

(6) Trigger squeeze is the same in sustainedfire as in slow fire.

(7) An unsteadiness or tendency to wobbleis natural in the kneeling and standingpositions. Reduce this wobble (you cannever entirely eliminate it) by practic-ing these positions and by squeezing thetrigger with a continuous pressure. Thedesire to hit the bull's-eye will temptyou to fire the shot at the instant the

197

sights come into correct alinement. Thisis snap shooting. The result is usuallya bad shot. DO NOT SNAP SHOOT.

106. CALLING THE SHOT

a. One way to teach yourself to squeeze thetrigger is to call your shot. If you can tell whereyour shot will hit, then you are shooting withyour eyes open and you are squeezing the trigger.If you cannot call your shot, you do not knowwhere the sights are pointing when the rifle fires;you are blinking and flinching when the rifle fires.When you blink and flinch, only luck will put thebullet in the bull's-eye. In combat you cannotafford to rely on luck.

b. To call the shot, you must notice where thesights are pointed at the instant the rifle is firedand call out, at once, where you think the bulletwill hit. Shots are called even when dry firingat a target in order to develop the habit of con-centrating on accurate aiming and calling theshot. No man can become expert until he is ableto call his shot before it is marked.

c. Shots are called by assuming that the bull's-eye is the face of a clock, with 12 o'clock at thetop of the bull's-eye and 6 o'clock at the bottom.Examples of calls are center bull, bull's-eye at 4o'clock, a close four at 9 o'clock.

107. FOLLOW-THROUGH

Follow-through is the procedure that most ef-fectively enables you to call your shots and to

198

detect errors in your position. Follow-throughmeans that after your rifle fires you remain inposition for a few seconds; you continue to holdyour breath; you continue to look through thesights; and you continue to squeeze the trigger.

a. When you use follow-through, you keepyour mind and your muscles concentrated on yourshot for an instant or two after your rifle fires.In this moment of concentration, you will havea clear mental picture of all the elements thatmay have affected your shot; if your sight pic-ture was slightly out of line when the rifle fired,you will remember it and will be able to call yourshot accordingly.

b. Almost everyone who does target shootinghas a tendency to remove the rifle from the shoul-der or to draw the head away from the stock tooquickly after firing. Sometimes these impulsivemovements begin before the rifle fires. The prac-tice of follow-through controls these impulses.

108. PROCEDURE IN CONDUCTING TRIGGERSQUEEZE EXERCISES

a. The instructor explains to the group theimportance of trigger squeeze. By asking ques-tions, he is assured that each pupil understandswhat is meant by a steady increase of pressure.Working alternately as coach and pupil, each manpractices the trigger squeeze exercises. First, thepupil puts his finger on the trigger and then thecoach puts his finger on top of the pupil's finger.As the coach squeezes with his finger, the pupilcan feel the steady pressure to the rear until the

199

hammer falls. Next the coach puts his finger onthe trigger and the pupil places his finger on topof the coach's finger. As the pupil applies trig-ger squeeze until the hammer falls, the coach candetermine if the pupil understands triggersqueeze and knows how to apply it.

b. The instructor then explains calling theshot, because you must learn to call your shotsas you practice the trigger squeeze.

c. You first practice the correct trigger squeezein the prone position. You can hold steadily inthis position and you are not tempted to snapthe shot the instant the front sight touches thebull's-eye. After you have learned the principlesof correct trigger squeeze in the prone position,you practice it in the other positions.

d. A great deal of carefully coached triggersqueeze practice is essential to good combat firing.Faulty trigger squeeze practice is worse than nopractice at all.

e. In coaching a pupil during dry firing, besure that he is aiming at a definite target andcarrying out the principles of aiming, squeezingthe trigger, following through, and calling hisshot.

109. DUTIES OF THE COACH

a. Your duties as coach become more and moreimportant as the pupil progresses in marksman-ship. Constantly check everything and leavenothing to chance. In this way you will have thesatisfaction of seeing your pupil improve and be-come one of the company experts.

200

b. To assist you in checking the pupil's sightpicture at the instant the hammer fell, make useof the M2 aiming device. By listening for thefall of the hammer and looking through the M2device, you will be able to tell your pupil whetheror not he had his sights correctly aligned at theinstant the hammer fell. You will also be ableto tell the pupil whether or not he called his shotcorrectly.

c. The duties of the coach in trigger squeezeexercises are to see that-

(1) The sights are blacked and kept black.(2) The sling is properly adjusted.(3) The firer is in a good, steady position.(4) The breath is held during aiming and

squeezing.(5) The trigger slack is taken up decisively

in one motion with a heavy initial pres-sure.

(6) The trigger is squeezed.(7) The firer follows through and calls his

shot.(8) The firer does not take too long to

squeeze off a shot. If he takes too muchtime, make him stop, rest, and startover.

110. SUSTAINED FIRE, GENERAL

a. Everything that you have learned in thepreceding steps is applied in sustained fire. Thepositions, method of breathing, aiming and squeez-ing the trigger are the same as in slow fire.The time is less because you take the position

201

rapidly, reload quickly without fumbling, and firea number of rounds in succession. NEVER SAC-RIFICE ACCURACY FOR SPEED.

b. You practice sustained fire in three progres-sive exercises-

(1) The first exercise is a cadence exerciseto develop a steady rhythm for firing aseries of shots.

(2) The second exercise is practice in takingpositions rapidly, simulating reloadingthe rifle, and firing a total of 9 rounds in50 seconds.

(3) The third exercise is practice in takingpositions rapidly, reloading with a clipof dummy rounds, and firing a total of 9rounds in 50 seconds.

111. FIRST SUSTAINED FIRE EXERCISE-CADENCE

a. The most important point in sustained fireis the development of correct timing (cadence)in firing. In starting, you will find the time willvary for each shot; but as rhythm (cadence) isdeveloped, the time for each shot will become thesame. If you try to hurry, you lose accuracy;so do not hurry.

b. The development of correct timing dependson your having a correct position. If your posi-tion is correct, the sights will return automati-cally to the aiming point after each shot is fired.As soon as the sights come back on the aimingpoint, you can concentrate on the sight pictureand instantly begin to squeeze the trigger. Thisprocess is repeated for each shot.

202

c. From his position, the coach strikes the oper-ating rod handle sharply to the rear and releasesit. The result is the same as if you actually fireyour rifle; the sight picture is disturbed, the riflerecoils, and cocking takes place. To prevent thebolt from staying in the rear position, a clipfitted with a grooved wooden block is used (fig.83). This clip is loaded into the receiver in thesame manner as a clip of live or dummy rounds.

d. The cadence exercise is given in the prone,kneeling, squatting, and sitting positions. Forthis exercise the pupil gets into position andaims at the target. The coach takes a positionto conform with the pupil's position, with hisright hand a few inches forward of the operatingrod handle. In this position he is able to strikethe operating rod handle sharply all the way tothe rear in order to cock the rifle, and to simulatethe effect of recoil.

e. With coach and pupil in position, the in-structor gives the following command: FIRERIN POSITION, AIM AT YOUR TARGET. BOLTFORWARD, HAMMER DOWN. BOLT. Uponthe command BOLT, the coach strikes the oper-ating rod handle to the rear, cocking the rifle(fig. 84). The pupil holds his breath, aligns thesights, takes up the trigger slack, and continuesthe squeeze until the hammer falls.

f. The command BOLT is repeated every 5seconds for the first runs in all positions. Whenthe pupil is able to get the shots off at this inter-val without hurrying, the time is reduced to 4seconds. Four seconds per shot is the ideal ca-dence for sustained fire.

203

Figure 83. The Ml clip fitted with grooved wooden block.

g. For the pupil to get a definite idea of thetime interval, the coach strikes the operating rodhandle only on the command BOLT.

h. NEVER SACRIFICE ACCURACY FORSPEED.

i. A word about breathing--each time thehammer falls, the pupil calls out the number ofthat shot. The number is preceded by the letterh, such as hone, htwo, hthree, hfour. In callingthe shots in this manner, the pupil expels whatair he has left in his lungs, and he has to breatheagain before the next shot. He is also countinghis shots so that he knows how many are left.

112. TAKING POSITIONS RAPIDLYBefore practicing the second sustained fire exer-

cise, you are instructed how to take positions rap-

204

Figure 84. Practicing sustained fire, prone and

kneeling positions.

idly and how to reload. Initially each movementis practiced slowly-by count (par. 113). As youbecome accustomed to these movements, you de-velop speed and accuracy in taking the positions.The time'you need to take any position and fireyour first shot should be about 10 seconds.

205

FiA"re Cnn ue\, -nn


113. TAKING THE PRONE POSITION FROMSTANDING

a. Take the prone position and sight on thebull's-eye. Close your eyes and relax completely.Open your eyes and, if your sights are still alinedon the bottom of the bull's-eye, drop the rifle buttfrom your shoulder and mark the spot where itstrikes the ground. Mark the spots for both el-bows, then rise to your knees without moving theposition of your toes, then rise to your feet. Youare now in the ready position with the sling ad-

206

justed, the left hand forward to the stock ferruleswivel, and the right hand at the heel of the butt.

(1) At the count of ONE, shift your weightslightly to the rear and drop to yourknees (fig. 85®).

(2) At the count of TWO, fall forward plac-ing the toe of the rifle butt on the spotmarked for it (fig. 85®).

AT THE COUN OF ONE SHT YOUR WEIGT SLIGHTLY TO THEREARANt]DROPTOYOURKNEES. ONE

Figure 85. Taking the prone position rapidly.

207

:g~~~~~cZ :

A. ,

2 0 8 ii!~ii! ii~I

·,,1

' .!?!,!iiii. *

.208

<^, 0 0

w Ul

209

2105' 3 A

210

t'-

a;; ' 1

I'1

211

(3) At the count of THREE, using the rifleas support, roll onto your left side plac-ing the left elbow on the spot markedfor it (fig. 850).

(4) At the count of FOUR, force the riflebutt into the pocket of the right shoul-der (fig. 850).

(5) At the count of FIVE, grasp the smallof the stock with your right hand, placeyour right elbow on the spot marked forit, and complete your position (fig. 85().

(6) You are now in your original positionand your sights should be aligned on thebottom of the bull's-eye.

b. As you progress, the exercise will be con-ducted without counting. Know what you aregoing to do; do not hurry.

114. TAKING THE KNEELING POSITION FROMSTANDING

Take the correct kneeling position and sight onthe target. Mark the spot on the ground for yourright knee. Rise to your feet, keeping your leftfoot and right toe in place. On command, or whenthe target appears, kneel forward over the righttoe and down on the spot for your right knee.Place your left elbow forward of the left knee.With the heel of your hand on the butt plate,force the rifle butt in the pocket formed by theright shoulder (fig. 860). Grasp the small of thestock with your right hand. Then shift the weightof your body forward onto your left leg and com-plete the position (fig. 860).

212

Ri~li iz 1 ENry

a F% ':

ix ; {e} i

I: t#?i'gXs6to

00

.9Ei ; s13

St -Ctel *

214

~~~~~~~~~a ,f ;~ .

Oi ~ T ~ OQ

0 o

J:x ·

X U.c

214~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1;-~u5

115. TAKING THE SQUATTING POSITION FROMSTANDING

Take the correct squating position and aim atthe target. Rise without moving your feet. Oncommand, or when the target appears, squat intoposition. Place your left upper arm over your leftknee. With the heel of your right hand on thebutt plate, force the rifle butt into the pocket ofyour right shoulder. Grasp the rifle at the smallof the stock with your right hand and lower yourright arm to its position inside the right knee.

116. TAKING THE SITTING POSITION FROMSTANDING

a. Take the correct sitting position and aim atthe target. When you and your coach are satisfiedwith your position, rise to your feet, keeping themin place. On command, or when the target ap-pears, sit down, breaking the fall with your righthand. As you sit down, skid your buttocks to therear to get the correct height for your knees.Place your left arm in position. With the heel ofyour hand on the rifle butt, force the butt into thepocket of your right shoulder. Grasp the smallof the stock with your right hand and lower yourright arm to its position inside the right knee.Keep your eyes on the target while taking thisposition.

b. For those men who use the cross-legged orcross-ankled position, follow this method of takingthe position rapidly:

(1) Cross-legged. Rise and stand with thelegs crossed. On command or when the

215

target appears, bend your knees and sinkto the ground. Complete the position asdescribed above.

(2) Cross-ankled. Mark the spot for yourheels, then bring your legs back into thecross-legged position. Rise and standwith the legs crossed. On command, orwhen the target appears, sink to theground and move your feet out to thespots marked for them. Complete theposition as described above.

c. These are important points in taking a posi-tion rapidly-

(1) Take a correct position, close your eyes,and relax. When you open your eyes,your sights should still be aligned directlyunder the bull's-eye. If they are, you havea good position; if not, correct your posi-tion until you can do this.

,(2) When you rise, do not move the positionof your feet. If you do, your line of aimwill be changed and you will waste timein correcting it once you go down intoposition.

117. RELOADING EXERCISES

To fire effectively and to use the fire power ofyour rifle in combat and on the range, you mustlearn to reload your rifle quickly and smoothlyin all positions. Reloading consists of reaching toa pocket of your cartridge belt, grasping a clip ofdummy cartridges, loading this clip into your rifle,

216

and firing one round. Ten seconds is enough timeto reload and fire one round. You will find thatyou can reload in much less time. However, donot rush.

a. Reloading in the Prone, Squatting, and Sit-ting Positions. To reload in these positions, placethe rifle butt on the ground. Take a clip out ofthe cartridge belt and place it on the follower.Hold your right elbow high, extend the thumb onyour right fist and place it on the right side ofthe clip and on the center of the top round, andpush the clip into the receiver (fig. 870). Removeyour hand smartly to the right front. If the boltdoes not close, strike the operating rod handletoward the muzzle, then, after completing the posi-tion, fire one round. In the sitting and squattingpositions, you may place the butt of the rifle onyour right thigh instead of on the ground (fig.870).

b. Reloading in the Kneeling Position. Placethe rifle butt on your right thigh and reload inthe same manner as for the other positions. Com-plete your position and fire one round.

c. Reloading in the Crouch Position. Place therifle butt on top of your right leg. Reload in thesame way as for the other positions. Another wayis to drop to your right knee and place the riflebutt on the ground. Reload in the same way asfor the other positions.

d. Commands. The following commands areused to teach reloading:

FIRER IN POSITION, AIM AT YOURTARGET

217

jl- A

218

® Sitting position.Figure 87-Continued.

BOLT OPENRELOADING EXERCISERELOAD(Wait 10 seconds)TIME

118. SECOND SUSTAINED FIRE EXERCISE

a. This exercise combines the cadence exercisewith taking positions rapidly, simulating reload-ing, and firing nine rounds in 50 seconds.

b. You will be allowed 10 seconds to take thecorrect position and fire the first round, 10 secondsto simulate reloading and firing the second round,

219

and 4 seconds for firing each remaining round.This totals 48 seconds. The remaining 2 secondsare a reserve in case you have to apply immediateaction.

c. You know the cadence of 4 seconds perround, how to take a position rapidly, and howto reload. Now you are going to do all of thesethings in one exercise. Think of what you aregoing to do. Do not hurry or fumble. Concentrateon the sight picture, squeeze the trigger, countyour shots, and breathe between each shot.

d. Place the M1 clip (fitted with the groovedwooden block) in the receiver and check yourposition. Rise, keeping your feet in place. Relax.On the preparatory field, the commands will be-

LOCK, ONE ROUND, SIMULATE LOADREADY ON THE RIGHT?READY ON THE LEFT?READY ON THE FIRING LINE(At this command, unlock your rifle withyour right thumb)TARGET UP (or COMMENCE FIRING)

At this command take the position rapidly, alignyour sights and fire the first round. Simulate re-loading and fire your second shot. Then fire theremaining rounds at the 4-second cadence. Afterfiring the last round, lock your rifle.

e. When the command, LOAD, is given, thecoach steps back two paces. This tells the officerin charge that the man is ready for the exercise.

f. As soon as the man is in position, the coachmoves forward and makes a quick check of thepupil's position; then the coach takes his own

220

position. The coach keeps the rifle cocked bystriking the operating rod handle to the rear eachtime he hears the hammer fall. The coach con-stantly watches his pupil and corrects any faultsin position, breathing, trigger squeeze, or otherprinciples of good shooting.

g. For the first few times, the instructor keepsthe group informed of the time by announc-ing FIRST SHOT RELOAD, SECOND SHOT,NINTH SHOT, and CEASE FIRING at the ap-propriate times.

119. THIRD SUSTAINED FIRE EXERCISE

a. After you have been trained in timing, tak-ing positions rapidly, and simulating reloading,you are given additional practice in all of thesepoints in the third sustained fire exercise. Thisexercise is the same as the second sustained fireexercise, except that you use a clip of dummyrounds instead of the clip with the wooden block.

b. Check the clip of dummy rounds for longrounds, then put this clip in the third pocket ofyour cartridge belt. Take your position and checkit until you and the coach are satisfied. Rise, keep-ing your feet in place. At the command: LOCK,ONE ROUND, SIMULATE LOAD, lock your rifleand allow the bolt to close on an empty chamber.When READY ON THE FIRING LINE is given,unlock. At the command TARGETS UP or COM-MENCE FIRING, take the position smoothly andrapidly and squeeze the trigger for the first shot.After the coach has checked your position andassumed his position, he will strike the operating

221

rod handle to the rear, and the bolt will stay open.Reach back and take the clip of dummy roundsfrom your belt. Load. it into the receiver and fireyour second shot. Continue to squeeze the triggerfor each shot as the coach ejects the dummy roundand cocks and loads for the next shot by strikingthe operating rod to the rear.

c. The rhythm of firing in a steady cadencehelps you to fire sustained fire with accuracy.Accuracy must not be sacrificed for speed. Once inposition, concentrate on the sight picture. Triggersqueeze should be automatic. Your position shouldbe so steady that the sights automatically come torest under the bull's-eye after each shot. Counteach shot and breathe between each shot. Whenyou can do these naturally, with little effort, youhave learned this step.

120. ADJUSTING THE REAR SIGHT FOR WINDAGEAND ELEVATION

a. The movable rear sight (fig. 88) makes yourrifle a precision instrument. You move the rearsight in the direction that you want to move thestrike of the bullet. By adjusting this sight upor down, you can raise or lower the strike of thebullet on the target. If you move the sight to theright, you move the strike of the bullet to theright. If you move it to the left, the strike of thebullet will be to the left.

b. You move the sight up or down by turningthe elevation knob; you move it to the right orleft (deflection) by turning the windage knob.

222

I ' ~ ·

0

Z _ Im

223

> > Z~~~~~~~~~~~v

wos

-) < ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ '

w ix ~ ~ ~ a

0,

o ~o22439~a

00

2 4

224

I CLICK *5 INCHES |iS5 5 500 YDS

ICLICK=3 INCHES|3 3-i 300 YOS

I CLICK4 INCHES 22 200 YDS

I CUCK I INCHo 100 YOS

Figure 90. Deflection rule.

225

121. ELEVATION AND DEFLECTION RULE

a. General. As you move the sight up or downor right or left, you will notice that it clicks.Each click is a unit of measurement in the move-ment of the sight. There are no half clicks on therear sight.

b. Rule. Turning the elevation knob one clickup or down moves the strike of the bullet on thetarget approximately one inch upor down foreach 100 yards (fig. 89). Turning the windageknob to the right or left (deflection) one clickmoves the strike of the bullet on the targetapproximately one inch to the right or left foreach 100 yards (fig. 90).

122. USE OF THE ELEVATION AND DEFLECTION RULE

a. Before you can use the elevation and de-flection rule, you will have to'know two things-

(1) The range to the target.

(2) The number of inches on the target thatyou wish to move the next shot.

b. On the range you will.know the distance tothe target, but you will have to estimate the num-ber of inches you wish to move the strike of thebullet. A knowledge of the dimensions of the tar-get will help you estimate this distance. On theknown distance ranges you will use the rifle Atarget (fig. 91) for slow fire at 100, 200, and 300yards and for sustained fire at 200 and 300 yards.The rifle B target (fig. 92) is used at 500 yards.Study these targets and remember the number of

226

inches from the center of the bull's-eye to itsouter edge and the width of the four ring andthe three ring.

c. Knowing the dimensions of the A target,how many clicks will be needed to move the bulletfrom the bottom of the bull's-eye to the center ofit at'a range of 100 yards? 200 yards? 300 yards?In solving these problems, refer to figure 91. Howmany clicks would be needed to move the bulletfrom the bottom of the bull's-eye to the center ifyou were firing at the B target from 500 yards?In solving this problem, refer to figure 92.

/ 6

3

Figure 91. The A target.

227

Figure 92. The B target.

123. HOW TO CALL SHOTS USING THE CLOCKSYSTEM

Visualize the target as the face of a clock.

a. The top of the target is 12 o'clock.

b. Directly to the right is 3 o'clock.

c. The bottom of the target is 6 o'clock.

d. Directly to the left is 9 o'clock.

e. Other points on the target are called in theirrelation to the numbers on the face of the clock.

228

124. SIGHT ADJUSTMENT PROBLEM NO. 1

a. At 200 yards, the shots shown in figure 93have been called and marked as indicated. Howmany clicks and in what direction would youmove the rear sight?

A 4 AT 6 OtLOCK A 4 AT 12 O'CLOCKTHIS SHOT IS 12" LOW. AT

200 YARDS ONE CLICK WILL MOVETHE STRIKE OF THE BULLET 2".

TO MOVE IT 12" YOU MUST MOVETHE ELEVATION UP 6 CLICKS,

A 3 AT 9 O'CLOCK A 3 AT 3 dCLOCK

Figure 93. Shots called as indicated.

b. The rear sight may have to be moved bothfor elevation and windage (called deflection) toget the next shot in the center of the bull's-eye.To do this, determine the elevation change firstand put this on the rear sight. Then determine

229

the windage change and put this on the rear sight.With the same sight picture, your next shot shouldbe in the center of the bull's-eye.

125. SIGHT ADJUSTMENT PROBLEM NO. 2

At 200 yards the shots shown in figure 94 havebeen called and marked. How many clicks of ele-vation and windage is necessary to move the nextshot into the center of the bull's-eye?

A 4 AT IO'CLOCKTHIS SHOT IS IO"HIGH AND6" RIGHT OF THE CENTER OFTHE BULL'S EYE. CORRECTSIGHT CHANGE IS DOWN 5CLICKS AND LEFT 3 CLICKS

A 3 AT II O'CLOCK A 3 AT 5 O'CLOCK

Figure 94. Shots called as indicated.

230

126. DIRECTION OF THE WIND(fig. 95)

a. In firing at 500 yards or under, the windis the only weather condition that affects theflight of the bullet. The effect of the wind on thebullet must be carefully studied. To describe the.direction of the wind, we again use the clock sys-tem.

b. Visualize yourself facing the target andstanding in the center of the face of a clock thatis lying flat on the ground with the number twelvetoward the target.

(1) A wind blowing directly into your faceis called a 12 o'clock wind.

(2) A wind blowing directly from the rearis a 6 o'clock wind.

(3) A wind blowing directly from the rightis a 3 o'clock wind.

(4) A wind blowing directly from the leftis a 9 o'clock wind.

(5) Winds blowing from other directions arecalled by the hour on the face of theimaginary clock. Examples are a 1 o'clockwind, a 5 o'clock wind, or an 11 o'clockwind.

127. SPEED OF THE WIND

Having determined the wind's direction, youmust also know the wind's speed, which is meas-ured in miles per hour. Wind speed can be esti-mated by either of two methods.

231

12 O'CLOCK

WIND

Figure 95. The direction of the wind.

a. First Method. When you are on the range,you can observe the range streamer. When awind is blowing, the range streamer will be fly-ing out from its staff, forming an angle. Esti-mate the angle in degrees between the staff andthe streamer. Divide this angle by 4. The re-sult is the approximate speed of the wind in milesper hour.

b. Second Method. In field firing or when youare in combat, use dry grass, dust, light fuzz, orbits of paper. Hold any of these at shoulderheight, but do not block the wind with your shoul-der. Drop whatever you are using to test the

232

wind. Extend your arm and point to the spoton the ground where it landed. Your arm nowforms an angle with your body. Estimate thisangle in degrees and divide by 4. The result isthe speed of the wind in miles per hour.

128. WIND SPEED EXAMPLES

a. The wind is blowing the streamer out at anangle of 40°:

Angle is 40° .40-.-4=10 miles per hour.

b. The wind is blowing the streamer out at anangle of 80°:

Angle is 80° .80-- 4=20 miles per hour.

c. The wind has blown some grass out at anangle of 60° degrees from your body:

Angle is 60° .60-- 4=15 miles per hour.

129. EFFECT OF WIND ON BULLET(fig. 96)

a. When a cross-range wind is blowing, theforce of the wind acts against the bullet. Fromthe time the bullet leaves the muzzle, the windwill force it off of its intended path accordingto the strength of the wind and the direction fromwhich it is blowing. If you do nothing to com-pensate for the wind, the bullet will not strike thetarget where you intend it to.

233

b. There are three values in computing thewind. These are-

(1) Full value winds. Winds blowing from2, 3, and 4 o'clock and 8, 9, and 10 o'clock

WINDS FROM THE RIGHT BLOW THE

BULLET TO THE LEFT.

WINDS FROM THE LEFT BLOW THE

BULLET TO THE RIGHT.

HALF V A E HAWLF

VALUE VAWEWIND .Ng WIND

Figure 96. The wind changes the flight of the bullet.

234

have the maximum effect on the bullet'sflight. These are full value winds.

(2) Half value winds. Winds blowing from1, 5, 7, and 11 o'clock are blowingfrom an angle and have about half theeffect on the bullet's flight as a full valuewind. These are half value winds.

(3) No value winds. Winds blowing fromthe target (12 o'clock) and winds blow-ing from the rear, toward the target(from 6 o'clock), have no effect on thebullet's flight at the ranges you will befiring.

130. WIND RULE

a. After you determine the speed and directionof the wind, use the wind formula to find thenumber of clicks to move your rear.sight. Thisformula is-

R x V = the number of clicks for a full value10 wind.

b. To use this rule, proceed as follows:(1) R is the range that you are firing-100,

200, 300,.or 500 yards; and express thisas 1, 2, 3, or 5.

(2) V is the velocity of the wind in miles perhour.

(3) Multiply the range and the wind velocityfactors.

(4) Divide by 10.(5) The result is the number of clicks for a

full value wind.

235

(6) For a half value wind, use half of theresult of this formula. No adjustmentis needed for winds that have no value.

131. WIND FORMULA EXAMPLES

a. Range is 200 yards-show as 2Speed of wind is 15 mph.Divide by 10 2 x 15 = 30 or

10 103 clicks for a full valuewind.

b. Range is 500 yards-show as 5Speed of wind is 15 mph.Divide by 10 5 x 15 = 75 or 71/2 clicks

10 10for a full value wind.

Note. Since we cannot put half clicks on the rear sight,any sight adjustment that has a fraction of a click is ex-pressed at the next higher number--71/2 will be 8; 1 /2will be 2; 51/2 will be 6.

132. LIGHT

a. Bright, hazy, or dull daylight does not affectthe flight of the bullet, but it does affect your aim.Changes in light have very slight effect on theaim of most riflemen and corrections for the ef-fects of light will not exceed one click in anydirection at any range. Changes in light do notalways affect everyone to the same degree.

b. Most men unconsciously aim a little lowerin a poor light than in a good light. Because ofthis, more elevation is needed when the light is

236

poor. The aim is lowered because the outline ofthe bull's-eye is not clear and sharp in a poorlight. As a rule, poor light exists on dark dayswhen there is a haze in the air, and on verybright hot days when heat waves rise from theground, distorting the line of sight. The best con-ditions for shooting prevail when the sky is uni-formly overcast and there is enough light to seethe target clearly.

c. Sunlight from the side affects a man's aimbecause the sunny side of the front sight is moreclearly defined and is unconsciously held towardthe center of the bull's-eye. The adjustment forthis will rarely exceed one click. In making thisadjustment, change the windage setting towardthe sun.

133. ZEROING YOUR RIFLE

a. Each rifle has certain characteristics suchas firing a little low, a little high, or to the leftor right, and many others. You must know thesecharacteristics. Once you do, it is easy to movethe rear sight to correct for them.

b. Correcting for these characteristics of yourrifle by adjusting the rear sight is called zeroingyour rifle. When your rifle was manufactured,the rear sight was made so that you could raisethe elevation 72 clicks from the bottom. For de-flection, a center index line was placed on therear sight base and a windage gage was placedon the receiver. The center index line can bemoved 16 clicks to the left and 16 clicks to theright of the center of the gage. To zero your

237

rifle, you must adjust the elevation and deflec-tion until your rifle shoots where it is aimed. Thezero sight settings of your rifle for various rangesshould become a part of a team, you and the rifle.

c. What is meant by the zero of your rifle?The zero of your rifle, for each range, is the sightsetting in elevation and deflection that will en-able you to hit the center of the bull's-eye on aday when no wind is blowing.

d. There are two ways to zero your rifle on aday when no wind is blowing-

(1) The first way is to fire three or moreshots with the same sight setting andthe same aiming point. These shots willform a group on the target. Make a sightchange on your rear sight to move thecenter of this group into the center ofthe bull's-eye. Fire another group and,if necessary, make a sight change tomove the center of this group into thecenter of the bull's eye. The next groupshould be in the center of the bull's-eye.The sight setting that you now have onyour rear sight is the zero of your rifleat that range, for any day when no windis blowing.

(2) The second way is to fire a single shot.Make the necessary sight change tomove the next shot into the center ofthe bull's-eye. Fire another round. Con-tinue this until your shots are hitting inthe center of the bull's-eye. The finalsight setting that you have on the rear

238

sight is the zero of your rifle for thatrange, for any day when no wind isblowing. The second method is not al-ways the better; but after you know howto call your shots and know that you callthem correctly, you may use this method.For men who are just beginning toshoot, the first method is better.

RIFLE SCORE CARDNAME: J"IOVN R DOE GRADE: CPL

ASN: 89L5579 6 ORGN: CO. A 24'A IMP'DATE: /-/6-5/ PLACE:F7- 8,E/vINN/V, GEOR~qA4

COURSE: A COURSE INSTR o- nCCoRANGE SCORE ONE (I) CLICK OF ELEVATiON OR WINO-

AGE MOVES THE STRIKE OF THE BULLETONE (I) INCH ON THE TARGET PER ONE HUN-DRED YARDS OF RANGE.

KDF TOTAL ......

TABLE TOTAL . M

GRAND TOTAL RV

10 = NUMBER OF CLICKSFOR A FULL VALUE WIND. FOR A HALF

CERTIFIED CORRECT VALUEWIND USE ONE HALF OF THE RESULTS...... 1. /'T .. P V T ..............

5/rURr OF SCORE RIFLE NO 7.2389ZERO

S/IGArUc-F OFFICER . RANGE ELEVATION WINDZERO RECORD CARD I 200 /. 2.

CUT-OUT AND SHELLAC IN THETRIGGER HOUSING FLOOR PLATE

OFigure 97. The rifle score card. (DA AGO Form 83).

239

134. SCORE CARD (DA AGO FORM 83)

a. The results of firing are influenced not onlyby the manner in which you aim, hold the rifle,and squeeze the trigger, but also by the wind andthe intensity of the light. To improve your shoot-ing ability, you must constantly study the effectof these conditions and you must strive to per-fect your ability to align your sights, to take goodfiring positions, and to squeeze the trigger cor-rectly. To make the most of your instruction,keep a personal record of the results and condi-tions of your firing throughout your range prac-tice. Before firing on the range, you will beissued a score card which you can look upon asyour personal shooting guide.

In en i ~EGICS 200 YARDS

HOURO8Q. .DATE.../-/6.-$ NO EL WIND CALL REMARKS VALWEATHERB...PLIGHT.-'.- .LL.... /I 1 _ ( N6-eRANCE .ZO .... 12 i _eWIND VEL COMPUTATION 2

/o _o 4SR e CALL-ED "

I 0

o04 0

0ZERO EL .. WIND TOT0,


240

b. Each man must keep a score card on whichhe records not only the value of the hits but thelocation of each hit, the sight setting and sightchanges, the force and direction of the wind, thelight, the hour, the date, and any other data thatmay be of use in the future. Space for theseentries is provided on the score card.

c. The score card is important on the rangebecause-

(1) It is a permanent record of your rangefiring.

(2) It shows the adjustments on the rearsight that are necessary to hit the centerof the bull's-eye.

(3) A comparison of the call column andthe corresponding shots plotted on theminiature target show whether you havethe correct sight setting and whetheryou are aiming, squeezing the trigger,

°following through, and calling the shotcorrectly.

135. ZERO RECORD CARD

Your ZERO sight setting for 200, 300, and500 yards is recorded on the ZERO RECORDCARD, which is cut off the score card and shel-lacked to the inside of the trigger housing floorplate.

136. USE OF THE SCORE CARD

a. When you arrive on the range, you will begiven time to fill out the heading of your score

241

card. Make this and later entries as shown infigure 970.

b. Assume that you are firing from 200 yardswith an Ml rifle that has just been issued to you.You will fire first to determine the zero of therifle at 200 yards. To do this, you will fire threegroups of three rounds each. On the command ofthe officer in charge of the firing line, the targetwill be pulled and marked after the third shotof each group.

c. On reaching the firing point-

(1) Take the correct position and place yourscore card and pencil where you caneasily use them without moving fromyour position.

(2) Check the weather conditions, particu-larly the wind, and record it on the scorecard along with the hour, date, andrange.

(3) Using the first scoring space, strike outthe range not being used and the ele-vation and windage lines for that rangeas shown in figure 97(.

(4) As you have never fired this particularrifle, you first set the elevation at 12clicks (average elevation for 200 yards)and record this figure in the elevationcolumn.

(5) Assume that you estimate the wind tobe 10 miles per hour from 3 o'clock. Us-ing the wind formula, you find that thewind is worth 2 clicks of right windage.

242

Set your sights accordingly and in theWIND column you record the wind as2R.

(6) Under remarks write zeroing and proneposition.

d. On command, load your rifle and get readyfor the first shot.

e. After the command COMMENCE FIRING,hold your breath, align your sights, and squeezethe trigger in such a way that you do not knowexactly when the rifle will fire. Then, at the mo-ment of firing, you are able to call your shot cor-rectly.

f. In this case, suppose you call the first shota center bull's-eye. You then put a dot in thecenter of the circle in the call column. Supposeyou fire the second shot and call it a center bull's-eye. You again place a dot in the call column justas you did for the first shot. You fire the thirdshot, calling it a center bull's-eye and again entera dot in the call column. Lock your rifle and waitfor your target to be marked. When the targetis marked and disked, you see three spotters veryclose together at about 8 o'clock. The disk showsthat you have three fours. Looking at your tar-get and noting the exact location of the threespotters, you plot the shots on the recording tar-get of the score card. You number each shot witha small figure 1, 2, or 3. Do not fool yourself byplotting the shots out of place, because you aregoing to make a sight change using this groupas you have it plotted.

243

g. Now determine how far you have to movethe center of the group for it to be in the centerof the bull's-eye. By using the target dimensionsor the elevation and windage lines on the record-ing target for 200 yards, you determine that youhave to add 2 clicks of elevation and 3 clicks ofright windage. Enter this on the score card.Under elevation you enter 14 and under windyou enter 5R. Number the spaces for the nextthree shots as 4, 5, and 6. During the time youwere making these sight changes, the target waspulled, pasted, and run back up.

h. On command, load and begin to fire yoursecond group. Suppose you call the fourth shota center bull's-eye and place a dot in the centerof the circle in the call column. You call the fifthshot a high four at 12 o'clock. You indicate thisby placing a dot outside the circle in the callcolumn where you think the shot hit. You callthe sixth shot a center bull's-eye and plot it. Againthe target is pulled, marked, run up, and disked.The three shots of the second group are diskedas two fives and a four at 12 o'clock. You plotthese on the recording target. The fifth shot washigh, as you called it, so the center of the secondshot group is determined by the fourth and sixthshots. You also enter "called" in the remarkcolumn for the fifth shot.

i. By using the target dimensions or the ele-vation and windage lines (for 200 yards) on therecording target, you find that it is necessary tomake another sight change to place the next threeshots in the center of the bull's-eye. You find

244

that you should add 1 click of elevation, so youenter it in the elevation column, making a totalof 15 clicks of elevation. For windage you findthat you can take one click of right windage offthe rear sight. You record this in the wind col-umn, making a total of four clicks right windage.

j. The target has been pulled, pasted, and runup. On command, you begin to fire the thirdgroup. Suppose you flinch on the seventh shot.Because you cannot call the shot, you enter a ques-tion mark in the call column and write flinchedunder remarks. You squeeze the trigger correctlyfor the eighth and ninth shots, call both of themcenter bull's-eyes, and enter them in the call col-umn. After firing the third shot, lock your rifle.The target is marked and disked as two fives inthe center of the bull's-eye and a miss. You plotthe two shots and, since you flinched on the sev-enth shot and could not call it, your seventh shotwas the miss. The two fives are then numberedas 8 and 9. After entering the values, total thescore and enter it in the space provided.

k. You find that the sight setting which wasnecessary to hit in the center of the bull's-eye was15 clicks of elevation and 4 clicks of right wind-age. You know that the wind was worth 2 clicksof right windage before you began to fire. To getthe zero of the rifle, you have to take off the 2clicks of right windage (subtract it) from the'windage setting that you have on the rifle. Asyou have 4 clicks of right windage on the rearsight, take off the 2 clicks that you originally puton. The remaining 2 clicks of right windage is

245

the zero windage of your rifle. The zero of yourrifle at 200 yards is 15 clicks of elevation and 2clicks of right windage. Record this in the spaceprovided on the score card. On the zero recordcard, you enter the 200-yard zero in the spaceprovided, along with your rifle number.

1. Keeping your score card is important be-cause it is a record of your firing. Record every-thing that you think is necessary to help youremember each shot. Do not let the coach makean entry on your score card. Keep it clean andmake all entries small and neat.

m. Information collected on the 1,000-inchrange is recorded in the same way as that onthe 200-yard range. The only exception is thatone click of elevation or windage moves the strikeof the bullet on the target a quarter of an inchinstead of 1 inch.

137. EXAMINATION BEFORE RANGE FIRING

a. An examination is the last step of prepara-tory marksmanship training. During this stepyou will be examined in all the previous stepsto make sure that you are qualified to fire liveammunition on the range. The examination doesnot require much time. A chart of your progressis kept during training (par. 76).

b. The examination should be held far enoughin advance of range firing to permit additional in-struction to be given to those men who make anunsatisfactory showing in any phase of training.

246

iSTATION NO. 4

STATION NO. 3

STATION NO. 2 STATION NO,5

STATION NO. 6

STATION NOJ I v

START

iSTUOEN~~~~ tTRUC~ ~ STATION NO. 9

STUDENTS I TRUCTORS

Figure 98. A layout for a county fair method ofexamination.

247

c. There are several methods by which youmay be examined to see if you are prepared forrange firing:

(1) A written test, an oral test, or a prac-tical work examination using the countyfair method may be given (fig. 98).

(2) The county fair method is the most effi-cient way to conduct the examination.

d. During these tests, the examiners take thenames of the men who need extra instruction.These names are turned over to the instructor incharge who arranges for additional training.

138. QUESTIONS ON PREPARATORY MARKSMAN-SHIP TRAINING

The following questions cover the importantpoints of preparatory marksmanship training.Study them; know how to answer each one inyour own words. When you are in doubt aboutany point, ask your instructor or leader'to ex-plain it.

a. Care and Cleaning.Q. What four things do you do in cleaning a

rifle bore after it has been fired?A. First, remove the powder fouling from the

bore. Second, dry the bore thoroughly of theliquid used to remove the fouling. Third, inspectthe bore, repeating the cleaning if necessary.Fourth, oil the bore.

Q. How do you remove the powder foulingfrom the bore?

248

A. By swabbing it thoroughly with patchessaturated with bore cleaner. In the absence ofbore cleaner, use warm soapy water.

Q. How do you dry the bore?A. By running clean patches through the bore

until it is thoroughly dry.Q. How do you protect the'bore from rust?A. By swabbing it thoroughly with a cleaning

patch saturated with special preservative lubri-cating oil issued for this purpose.

b. Sighting and Aiming.Q. What is meant by sight alinement?A. The proper positioning of the front sight

post in relation to the peep of the rear sight.Q. Explain correct sight alinement.A. You have correct sight alinement when the

top of the front sight blade touches an imaginaryhorizontal line through the center of the peepsight and when an imaginary vertical line throughthe center of the peep sight divides the front sightin half.

Q. How do you obtain the correct sight picture?A. Add the bull's-eye to the correct sight aline-

ment so that the bottom of the bull's-eye justtouches the center of the top of the front sight.

Q. What is the purpose of the sighting andaiming bar?

A. To teach the rifleman how to aim.Q. Why is it better than a rifle for this pur-

pose?A. Because the sights on it are much larger

and slight errors can be more easily seen andpointed out.

249

Q. What does this represent? (The instructorpoints to the front sight.)

A. The front sight.Q. And- this? (The instructor points to the

rear sight.)A. The rear sight.Q. What is this? (The instructor points to the

eyepiece.)A. The eyepiece.Q. What is the eyepiece for?A. To cause me to place my eye in such a posi-

tion as to see the sights in the same alinement asthat seen by the coach.

Q. Is there an eyepiece on the rifle?A. No, I learn with the sighting bar how the

sights look when properly aligned, and I musthold my head so that. I see the sights the sameway when aiming a rifle.

Q. How do you hold your head steadily in thisposition when aiming a rifle?

A. By resting my cheek firmly against the sideof the stock and on top of my right thumb.

Q. Where do you focus your eye when aiminga rifle?

A. First I focus on the target, but the lastfocus of my eye will be on top of the front sightto be sure that I see the front sight sharply de-fined and properly centered in the rear sight.

Q. Tell me what is wrong with these sights.(The instructor now adjusts the sights of thebar, making various slight errors. He requiresthe men to point out these errors.)

250

Q. Now take this sighting bar and adjust thesights properly. (The instructor verifies all ad-justments.)

Q. Now that the sights are properly adjusted,move the small bull's-eye until the sights are prop-erly aimed. (The instructor verifies all sight pic-tures.)

Q. How do you hold your breath while aiming?A. I draw in an ordinary breath, let out a little

of it, and hold the rest by closing my throat. Ido not tighten the muscles of my stomach. I holdthis breath all the time that I am squeezing thetrigger. During sustained fire, I breathe'aftereach shot.

c. Positions.Q. Take the prone position, aim, and simulate

firing a shot at that mark. (The instructor pointsto a target and checks to assure himself that theman knows how to hold his breath properly whileaiming. Many men have great difficulty in learn-ing to do this correctly.)

Q. Take this rifle and demonstrate the stand-ing, kneeling, squatting, sitting, and prone posi-tions.

A. You demonstrate these positions.Q. Now show me how you take the prone,

kneeling, squatting, and sitting positions rapidly.A. You demonstrate these positions.d. Trigger Squeeze.Q. How do you squeeze the trigger?A. I take up the slack with a heavy initial pres-

sure. Then I squeeze the trigger with such a

251

steady increase of pressure that I do not knowexactly when the rifle will fire.

Q. On what do you concentrate while you aresqueezing the trigger?

A. I concentrate on keeping a perfect sightalinement.

Q. Is it necessary to take a long time to pressthe trigger in this way?

A. No, the method of squeezing the trigger isslow at first, but speed is developed by practice.

Q. How do you squeeze the trigger in sustainedfire ?

A. I squeeze it the same way as in slow fire,with such a steady increase of pressure that Ido not know when the rifle will fire.

e. Sustained Fire.Q. How do you fire sustained fire within the

time limit so that you are not compelled to hurryin aiming and squeezing the trigger?.

A. By taking the position rapidly, and by re-loading smoothly.

Q. Demonstrate how you load a clip of ammu-nition into the receiver.

A. After placing a full clip on the follower, Iball my right hand into a fist with the thumb ex-tended. With the elbow held high and the thumbon the right side of the clip and on the center ofthe top round, I push the clip down into the re-ceiver.

Q. In sustained fire, is it important to get intothe correct position before beginning to fire?

A. Yes, even though it takes more time, Ishould always get into the correct position beforebeginning to fire.

252

Q. Which is more important in sustained fire,speed or accuracy? Explain.

A. Accuracy. A few accurate shots are betterthan many scattered ones.

f. Calling the Shot.Q. What is meant by calling the shot?A. To tell where you think the bullet hit the

target as soon as you shoot and before the shotis marked.

Q. How can you do this?A. By following through and by knowing exact-

ly where the sights are pointed when the riflefires.

Q. If a man cannot call his shot properly, whatdoes it usually indicate?

A. That he did not squeeze the trigger properlyand did not know where the sights pointed at thetime the rifle was fired.

Section III. COURSES

139. GENERAL

a. Each officer, warrant officer, and enlistedman in the army is authorized to fire a qualifica-tion course with his basic weapon and a familiar-ization course with another weapon. See AR 775-10. With the M1 rifle, there are five rifle qualifi-cation courses. This variety of qualification coursesis provided'to fit the needs of various branches ofthe Army, some of which devote more time tomarksmanship than others, and to give a choiceto those posts and camps where the size and num-ber of ranges are limited. No matter where youare stationed, or what unit you are assigned to,

253

there will always be a qualification course for youto fire.

b. The amount of instruction firing is not lim-ited to that prescribed in the following tables.Such additional practice as time and ammunitionallowance permit may be given. No rifleman willbe permitted to fire sustained fire until he hasdemonstrated his ability in slow fire.

c. Although the 1,000-inch range does not ap-pear in the tables for the standard or A, B, andC courses, it can be used to great advantage forinstruction firing. When time or personnel for pitdetails is limited, the 1,000-inch range should beused for the initial phase of instruction firing.At,,this range, you become accustomed to the noiseand recoil of the rifle as you perfect your posi-tions, and the necessity for correct trigger squeezeis made obvious. The use of dummy rounds dur-ing 1,000-inch firing is desirable. They can beused to teach trigger squeeze and to detect andcorrect flinching. Having zeroed your rifle at1,000 inches, you can use this zero as a basis forzeroing your rifle at the longer ranges. Manymen find no difference between the 1,000-inchzero and the 200-yard zero. In short, the rifle-man can learn all basic elements of marksman-ship by firing on the 1,000-inch range. Pit de-tails and telephone operators are eliminated and,because each hit is visible, the time usually spentin target operation is used for firing practice.

d. You should be given the opportunity to zeroyour rifle with the bayonet and the grenadelauncher attached, preferably at 300 yards. This

254

firing should be conducted after known distancerecord firing, but before transition firing. (Noteto instructor-conduct this training before firingtable VI.)

e. Before range practice, organization com-manders should make sure that the qualifyingscores agree with the latest published regulations.Pencil changes should be made in all publishedmaterial that does not agree with the newestregulations.

140. STANDARD COURSEa. General. The standard course is prescribed

in eight tables. This course is designed to teachyou how to shoot the rifle and how to use thebattle sight (zero of the rifle at 300 yards (par.173) ) in firing at field targets at different ranges.When you complete the standard course, you arequalified to advance to the team phase. The stand-ard course includes known distance firing andtransition firing.

b. Known Distance Firing. The known dis-tance part of the standard course. is prescribedin five tables. Tables I, II, and III are fired atleast once during instruction for practice. TablesIV and V are fired once for record. During knowndistance firing you will use the sling. All theprinciples of rifle marksmanship as taught dur-ing preparatory training are applied during thefiring.

c. Transition Firing. Transition firing, pre-scribed in tables VI, VII, and VIII, includes firingat field targets from combat type positions as wellas firing from the crouch position at surprise

255

targets from very short ranges. It is precededby preliminary marksmanship training in thetheory and use of the battle sight at ranges upto 400 yards. Instruction is also given in the useof an aiming point (par. 208) and in range esti-mation (pars. 214-217). While firing table IV,you become familiar with the appearance of tar-gets and the distance to them at various ranges.When firing table VII, the sling should be usedin firing from all positions wherever possible (par.323). You are not permitted to fire tables VIIand VIII until after you have demonstrated yourability in firing table VI. Tables VI, VII, andVIII are fired at least once during instruction forpractice; then tables VII and VIII are fired oncefor record.

d. Qualification Scores. The total of your rec-ord firing scores for Tables IV, V, VII and VIIIdetermines your classification as a rifleman. Theminimum standard course qualifying scores forthe three classifications are-

(1) Expert rifleman ..................... 450 points(2) Sharpshooter ......................... 360 points(3) Marksman ............................. 300 points

Table I. Standard Course, Instruction Firing, KnownDistance Slow Fire

rdsange) Time Rounds Position Target Sling

100 No limit___ *9 Prone ---- A Loop.200 --- do ---- *9 --- do- .-- A Do.300 --- do ---- *9 --- do ---- A Do.500 --- do --- - *9 --- do ---- B Do.

*The rifle is zeroed in 3-round groups.

256

Table II. Standard Course, Instruction Firing, KnownDistance Slow Fire

Range Time Rounds Position Target Sling(yards)

100 No limit_ *8 Standing -.- A Hasty.200 --- do___ *8 Squatting or A Loop.

sitting.**200 --- do___ *8 Kneeling or A Do.

sitting.**.300 --- do___ *8 Prone ------ A Do.500 --- do___ *8 Prone -B Do.

*Four rounds may be fired under reduced ammunition allowance.**The sitting position may be substituted for either the kneeling or

squatting position but not for both.

Table III. Standard Course, Instruction Firing, KnownDistance Sustained Fire*

(yards) (seconds)

200 50 9 Kneeling or A Loop.squattingfrom stand-ing.**

200 50 9' Sitting or A Do.squattingfrom stand-ing.**

300 50 9 Prone from A Do.standing.

300 50 9 .. .do ------- A Do.

*Sustained fire begins with 1 round in the chamber and a loaded clipin the third pocket of the cartridge belt.

**The sitting position may be substituted for either the kneeling orsquatting position but not for both.

257

Table IV. Standard Course, Record Firing, KnownDistance Slow Fire*

Range Time(yards) (minutes) Rounds Position Target Sling

100 10 8 Standing ---- A Hasty.200 10 8 Kneeling or A Loop.

sitting.**200 10 8 Squatting or A Do.

sitting.**300 10 8 Prone -A Do.500 12 10 do ------- B Do.

*A time limit in slow fire depends on efficient target service whichshould average 20 seconds per round for pasting and marking. In caseiof a breakdown or slow service, the firer is allowed extra time.

**The sitting position may be substituted for either the kneeling orsquatting position, but not for both.

Table V. Standard Course, Record Firing, KnownDistance Sustained Fire*

Rang e Time onds Rounds Position Target Sling(yards) (seconds)

200 50 9 Squatting,sit- A Loop.ting, orkneelingfrom stand-ing.

300 50 9 Prone from A Do.standing.

*Sustained fire begins with 1 round in the chamber and a loaded clipin the third pocket of the cartridge belt.

258

Table VI. Standard Course, Preliminary Instruction forTransition Firing

R(ange Time Rounds Position Target* Sling

300 No limit__ 6 Prone- Silhouette HastyNo. 1.

300 --- do --- 8 do___ Silhouette Do.No. 2.

200 do... 3 do___ Silhouette Do.No. 1.

200 do . 5 - do_ Silhouette Do.No. 2.

400 do-- 6 -- do___ Silhouette Do.No. 1.

400 -- do-... 8 do_ Silhouette Do.No 2.

*For target arrangement, see figure 122. Three-round shot groupswill be fired on silhouette No. 1; one 3-round shot group will be firedon silhouette No. 2; thereafter, the target will be pulled and markedafter each shot. No scoring is required for this table.

259

Table VII. Standard Course, Instruction and RecordFiring, Transition Firing (fig. 123)

ane Range Timend Rounds Target Position(yards) (seconds)

1 150-300 60 4 E Standing fox-hole.

2 200-400 60 4 E Rubble pile.3 300-400 60 4 E Stump.4 200-325 60 4 E Window.5 150-250 60 *4 E Prone.6 500 60 4 B -Do.7 125-400 60 4 E Barricade.8 250-350 60 4 E Ditch.9 175-325 60 4 E Roof top.

10 125-275 60 4 E Log.

*Eight rounds when firing for instruction firing.Scoring notes-

1. Lanes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, and 10.For each hit .................................................. 5 pointsFor each unexpended round if both targets are

hit .......... .............................. 5 pointsPossible points for each lane ............................. 20 points

2. Lane 6.For each hit ...................................... 5 pointsPossible points for this lane ...................................... 20 points

Total possible points for course ............................ 200 points3. Ricochet hits are scored.

260

Table VIII. Standard Course, Instruction and RecordFiring, Quick Fire (fig. 124)

line (yard) (second, ) Rounds* Target Position

First 15-35 3 8 1 E Shoulder3 1 E or hip.4 2E3 2E

Second_ 15-35 4 8 2 E Do.5 2E5 3 E

Third- ... 15-45 4 8 2 E Do.5 3E4 2E

*Each firer is issued 24 rounds for the 20 silhouette targets. The fourextra rounds are to be used where necessary by the firer.

Scoring notes-1. For each silhouette hit (ricochets are scored as hits)2. For each unexpended round if all targets are hit 5 points3. Total possible for course ...................................... 120 points

141. COURSE A

a. General. Course A is prescribed in fivetables and is fired when the range facilities re-quired for the standard course are not available.The instruction firing outlined in tables I, II andIII is designed to serve as a guide only. Withreduced ammunition allowances, the number ofshots shown in parentheses may be fired.

b. Qualification Scores. The total of your rec-ord firing scores for tables IV and V determinesyour classification as a rifleman. The minimumcourse A qualifying scores are-

(1) Expert .. .............................-.. 185 points(2) Sharpshooter .-....................... 160 points(3) Marksman .......... .................. 135 points

261

Table I. Course A, Instruction Firing, Known DistanceSlow Fire

Range Time Rounds Target Position Sling(yards)

200 No limit 4 (4) A Prone___ Loop.200 --- do___ 8 (4) A --- do___ Do.300 --- do___ 4 (4) A --- do___ Do.300 --- do___ 8 (4) A --- do___ Do.500 --- do___ 4 (4) B --- do___ Do.500 --- do___ 8 (4) B --- do___ Do.

Table II. Course A, Instruction Firing, Known DistanceSlow Fire

(yards)yar$ . eTime Rounds Target Position Sling

200 No limit 8 (0) A Sitting___ Loop.200 _L__do___ 8 (0) A Squatting Do.200 --- do___ 8 (8) A Kneeling Do.200 --- do___ 8 (8) A Standing Hasty.300 --- do___ 8 (4) A Sitting___ Loop.300 --- do___ 8 (4) A Squatting Do.300 --- do___ 8 (0) A Kneeling Do.

262

Table III. Course A, Instruction Firing, Known DistanceSustained Fire

Range Time(yarang (se~onds) Rounds Target Position Sling(yardls) (seconds)

1200 26 23 (23) A Kneeling or Loop.

sitting fromstanding.

200 50 39 (39) A ... .do ------- Do.1300 26 23 (23) A Prone from Do.

standing.300 50 39 (39) A --- do ------- Do.

l Fire twice.2 The rifle is to be loaded with one round initially and reloaded with

a full clip, only two rounds of which are to be fired.3 The rifle is to be loaded with one round initially and reloaded with

a full clip.

Table IV. Course A, Record Firing, Known DistanceSlow Fire

oards) iTime Rounds Target Position Sling

200 No limit 4 A Kneeling Loop.200 --- do___ 4 A Standing_ Hasty.300 --- do___ 4 A Prone ----- Loop.300 do___ 4 A Sitting or Do.

squatting.500 --- do___ 8 B Prone ---- Do.

263

Table V. Course A, Record Firing, Known DistanceSustained Fire

Range Time(yards) (seconds) Rounds Target Position Sling

200 50 *9 A Kneeling or Loop.sitting fromstanding.

300 50 *9 A Prone from Do.standing.

*The rifle is to be loaded with one round initially and reloaded witha full clip.

142. COURSE B

a. General. Course B is prescribed in fivetables and is fired when the' range facilities forthe standard course and course A are not avail-able. The instruction firing outlined in tables I,II, and III is designed to serve as a guide only.With reduced ammunition allowance, the numberof rounds shown in parentheses may be fired.Tables II, III, and V of course B are the sameas tables II, III, and V of course A (par. 141).

b. Qualification Scores. The total of your rec-ord firing scores for tables IV and V determinesyour qualification as a rifleman. The minimumcourse B qualifying scores are-

(1) Expert .........-.......................... 185 points(2) Sharpshooter ........................- 160 points(3) Marksman .-..... ................... 135 points

264

Table I. Course B, Instruction Firing, Known DistanceSlow Fire


200 No limit 4 (4) A Prone___ Loop.200 -do___ 12 (8) A -- do_ Do.300 -- do_ 4 (4) A -- do_ Do.300 -do___ 16 (8) A -do_ Do.

Table IV. Course B, Record Firing, Known DistanceSlow Fire

Range(yards) Time Rounds Target Position Sling

200 No limit 6 A Kneeling__ Loop.200 -- do- 6 A Standing__ Hasty.300 do___ 6 A Prone - Loop.300 -- do _ 6 A Sitting or Do.

squatting.

143. COURSE C

a. General. Course C is prescribed in fivetables and is fired when the range facilities arenot adequate for the standard and the A and Bcourses. The instruction firing outlined in tablesI, II, and III is designed to serve as a guide only.

b. Qualification Scores. The total of your rec-ord firing scores for tables IV and V determinesyour qualification as a rifleman. The minimumcourse C qualifying scores are-

(1) Expert ........-........................ 175 points(2) Sharpshooter . ......................... 150 points(3) Marksman .............................. 125 points

265

Table I. Course C, Instruction Firing, Known DistanceSlow Fire. (Fired twice.)


200 No limit 4 A Prone - Loop.200 do_ 4 A do . Do.200 do 4 A Sitting - Do.200 do 4 A Squatting Do.200 do 4 A Kneeling Do.200 --- do___ 4 A Standing Hasty.

Table II. Course C, Instruction Firing, Known DistanceSustained Fire. (Fired twice.)

Range Time(yards) (seconds) Rounds Target Position Sling

200 26 *3 A Prone from Loop.standing.

200 26 *3' A Sitting from Do.standing.

200 26 *3 A Kneeling or Do.squattingfrom stand-ing.

*Rifle is loaded with one round. After the first round is fired, therifle is to be reloaded with a full clip, only two rounds of which are tobe fired.

266

Table III. Course C, Instruction Firing, Known DistanceSustained Fire

arge (ioe n Rounds Target Position Sling

200 50 9 c A Sitting from Loop.standing.

200 50 9 A Kneeling or Do.squattingfrom stand-ing.

200 50 9 A Prone from Do.standing.

Table IV. Course C, Record Firing, Known DistanceSlow Fire

(yange Time Rounds Target Position Sling(yards)

200 No limit 4 A Squatting or Loop.sitting. *

200 do__- 4 A Kneeling or Do.sitting. *

200 --- do___ 4 A Standing-.-- Hasty.

*The sitting position may be substituted for either the squatting orkneeling position but not for both.

267

Table V. Course C, Record Firing, Known DistanceSustained Fire

(yards) (seoinms) Rounds Target Position Sling

200 50 9 A- Kneeling or Loop.squatting

from stand-ing.

200 50 9 A Sitting from Do.standing.

200 50 9 A Prone from Do.standing.

144. COURSE D

a. General. Course D is prescribed in fourtables and is fired when range facilities requiredfor the standard and the A, B, or C courses arenot available or when training time and the avail-ability of ammunition permit 1,000-inch firingbefore instruction firing of the other courses. Theinstruction firing outlined in tables I and II isdesigned to serve as a guide only.

b. Qualification Scores. The total of your rec-ord firing scores for tables III and IV determinesyour qualification as a rifleman. The minimumqualifying scores are-

(1) Expert .................................... 132 points(2) Sharpshooter ........................- . 125 points(3) Marksman .- ............................ 100 points

268

Table I. Course D, Instruction Firing, 1,000-inchSlow Fire

Range Time(inches) (seconds) Rounds Target Position Sling

1,000 No limit 8 1,000-inch A Prone - Loop.1,000 do _ 8 do do Do.1,000 _- do _ 4 ..do ------- Sitting .. . Do.1,000 _- do _ 4 . do ---- Squatting Do.1,000 - do___ 4 do --- Kneeling__ Do.1,000 - do 4 do --- Standing_ Hasty.

Table II. Course D, Instruction Firing, 1,000-inchSustained Fire

(inches) (seconds)

1,000 50 9 1000-inch A Prone from Loop.standing.

1,000 50 9 .... do ------ Squatting or Do.sitting fromstanding. *

1,000 50 9 ... .do ------ Kneeling or Do.sitting fromstanding. *

*The sitting position may be substituted for either the kneeling orsquatting position but not for both.

269

Table III. Course D, Record Firing, 1,000-inchSlow Fire

Ranges Time(inches) (seconds) Rounds Target Position Sling

1,000 No limit 4 1,000-inch A Kneeling or Loop.sitting. *

1,000 ---- do___ 4 . do -- - Standing Hasty.1,000 - do_ 4 do Squatting Loop.

or sit-ting. *

*The sitting position may be substituted for either the kneeling orsquatting position but not for both.

Scoring note-Score only the fives, fours, and threes.

Table IV. Course D, Record Firing, 1,000-inchSustained Fire

Range Time(inches) (seconds) Rounds Target Position Sling

1,000 50 9 1,000-inch A Kneeling or Loop.squattingfrom stand-ing.

1,000 50 9 --- do ----- Prone from Do.standing.

Scoring note-Score only the fives, fours, and threes.

145. TRANSITION FIRING-COURSES A, B, C, AND D

a. Transition tables VII and VIII of the stand-ard course may be fired in courses A, B, C, and D.Where range facilities are not available, threealternate transition tables may be fired in lieu oftables VII and VIII. Table VI of the standard

270

course should be fired in all courses when rangefacilities are available.

b. While these alternate transition tables arenot fired for qualification, the rifleman shouldattain a satisfactory score as indicated for eachtable before being considered proficient with hisrifle. Those men not attaining a satisfactoryscore should fire until they do, providing that timeand ammunition allowances permit.

c. Alternate transition firing is conducted onthe known distance range and transition firingranges according to the procedure explained inparagraph 325. These tables 'will be fired afterknown distance record firing and- before firingcombat exercises. The exercises are preceded byinstruction in range estimation and in the use ofan aiming point.

Table I. Alternate Transition Firing

Range Time s Target**(yards) r(seRounds * Target** Position Sling

200 60 5 3 E Prone from Hasty.standing.

300 60 5 3 E --- do ----- Do.500 60 5 3 E .- do ------- Do.

*The rifle is to be loaded with a partial clip containing five rounds.**Targets should be approximately 5 yards apart and as near the pre-

scribed range as the terrain permits.Scoring notes-

1. For each target hit.................................................................. point2. For each unexpended round, if all targets are hit....... point

271

Table II. Alternate Transition Firing

Range* Time(yards) (seaonds) Rounds** Target Position Sling

........ 120 10 6 E Prone from Hasty.standing.

*Two targets between ranges of 200 and 300 yards. two targets be-tween 300 and 400 yards, and two between 400 and 500 yards. Eachpair of targets will be staggered and separated in depth from 250 to50 yards.

**The rifle is to be loaded initially with a partial clip of two roundsand reloaded with a full clip.

Scoring notes-For each target htc-

Between 200 and 300 yards ........................................... IpointBetween 300 and 400 yards ......................................... 2 pointsBetween 400 and 500 yards.- ................................... 3 pointsFor each unexpended round, if all targets are hit... 3 pointsSatisfactory score .............................................................. 8 points

Table III. Alternate Transition Firing

(yards) (smeonds) Rounds2

Target Positions

Sling

100 3 seconds 5 E Standing None.

per round.

Target will be exposed for a 3-second period during which rifle willbe brought to the shoulder and a round fired.

2Rifle is loaded before start of exercise.Rifle is held at the ready and brought to the shoulder for firing each

round.Scoring note-

For each target hit .............................................................. 1 point.Satisfactory score ................................................................ 4 points

146. FAMILIARIZATION COURSE

Four hours of preliminary instruction are pre-scribed for those men who are required to famil-iarize themselves with the rifle. The familiariza-

272

tion course is fired on the 200-yard known-distance range. The number of rounds to be firedis given in the table which prescribes the course.

Table I. Familiarization Course, Known-DistanceSlow and Sustained Fire

Range Time Rounds Target Position Remarks

200 No limit___ 6 A Prone ---- Zeroing 3-roundgroups.

200 8 minutes 8 A Kneeling Each roundand I o a d e d

squatting. separately.200 4 minutes 4 A Standing__200 50seconds 9 A Standing 1 round in

to kneel- receiver;ing or 8-roundsquatting. clip in

cartridgebelt.

147. RECORDING FIRING RESULTS ON RIFLE SCORECARD

Riflemen should use the method shown in figure99 for recording the conditions and results offiring on the range. Hard lead or indelible pen-cils should be used, and all entries should be neatand legible. Erasures should be kept to a min-imum. During record firing, if the scorer makesan error, it should be crossed out (not erased),the correction entered, and one of the officers ofthe unit firing should initial the change.

273

__ a. ATNAL GLL ETBATE VA. DTTLE SICH.3GBD0 EL 2.0 ZWP 1R

,F~ -e z .i IZ. /. I I - I

AGRA B. 2R.*- ..Z. ....

C~ ~~~~~~A)~TRA$1 FRN_ T ABLE

RIFLE SCORE CARDTO ANL -WD TO _ NAME 7DO' J.o'N.//. -. RAD£.ePL

o AraS GTAINNo FIaT ASNI - 55 6 GRA Co fl 24. /N.N. v

PI Onr*6S PL(Ci:) CAWA/A6. CR1S.AR 4

Q _ OTO EL A AO 5' 4, s 'TOT A D

Figure 99. Sample scoring recorded on the rifle

1 48. GENERAL

a. Range firing is started as soon as you com-

plete preparatory marksmanship training. Rangefiring consists of-

(1) Instruction firing, which is practice fir-ing on a target range with the help of

274

.0^ I '0 , Oo I:=Y0D00$ __''" ° 300 yARO0

RRR: fNT GE Q2 9 SeIo s, 0 0 _0 Z0 0/L05 0 7' 0 3 0 -, __O _ 0 00-0 g .50 - __

/zoo Y _ .0 OR30o°

L s

. nwiharcrbskp. T

::ClFi s1 1 lbasi s o£ a soli Ir s I I c1la s ifo n

( 0) Fmlr0zaon Oring, which is targetL.a.0

02t0 f 000ch 0 200o d 02 300 00002

practice to acquaint a firer with aweapon. It is fired only by those indi-

275

©~~~~~~~~~~~~~O

275

viduals who are not authorized to firea record course for qualification.

b. Range firing opens with instruction firing.Each rifleman will complete instruction firing be-fore he begins record firing. Once you start recordfiring, you must complete it before you are per-mitted to undertake additional instruction firing.As a rule, record firing will not be fired by anyrifleman on the same day that he fires any partof instruction firing. However, when the time al-lotted to range practice is limited, the unit com-mander may authorize record firing on the sameday. Instruction and record firing will not beconducted at the same time except on rangeswhere the firing points are in echelon or wherethe two types of firing are conducted on differentparts of the same range.

149. RANGE PERSONNEL

The range must be well organized and closelysupervised. Officers and noncommissioned officerassistants should be thoroughly oriented and as-signed specific duties before they go on the range.

a. The range officer is appointed by the appro-priate commander and is responsible to the com-mander for maintaining and assigning ranges,designating danger zones, and closing roads lead-ing into danger zones. The range officer makesarrangements for material and labor to place theranges in condition for range practice. He directsand supervises all repairs to shelters, butts, tar-gets, firing points, and telephone lines. He pro-vides for the safety of the'target detail and, when

276

necessary, he provides range guards and instructsthem in the methods to be used for the protectionof life and property within the danger area.

b. The range noncommissioned officer and suchassistants as the commander may consider neces-sary will be detailed permanently during therange practice season to assist the range officer.This detail is responsible for keeping the equip-ment in the target pits in a serviceable condition,for having targets ready for use, and for pro-viding all target and pit details with the properflags, marking disks, pasters, and spotters.

150. UNIT RANGE PERSONNEL

a. A unit range officer is appointed by the com-manding officer of the unit using the range whenthere is no regularly assigned range officer. Theunit range officer's duties are similar to those. ofthe range officer.

b. An officer in charge of firing and safety isdesignated by the responsible commander. Heshould be the senior officer of the unit occupyingthe range. The officer in charge of firing or hisassistant will be present during all firing. He isresponsible for the proper and safe conduct offiring.

c. A pit officer is designated by the commanderof the unit firing on the range. For his duties,see paragraph 190.

d. Pit details are provided by the organiza-tions firing. These details supervise, operate, andmark the targets used by their respective organ-izations, and also serve as telephone operators.

277

151. ORGANIZATION OF THE FIRING LINE(fig. 100)

The firing line is organized to insure the safeand orderly conduct of range firing and to in-sure supervision of the entire firing line by theofficer in charge of firing. The distances suggestedin b through f below for organizing the firingline may be modified by the officer in charge tomeet local conditions.

a. The line of scorers is stationed to the rearof the riflemen being scored. This line is usuallyon the slope or at the top of the slope of the firingline. Ordinarily, scores are set down only duringrecord firing.

b. The line of telephone operators is stationedten yards behind the firing line. There should beone telephone operator to every ten firing points.

c. The line of ammunition tables is located bythe officer in charge of firing at his discretionwith regard to safety. A good location is betweenthe ready line and the telephone line.

d. The ready line is the line where the nextorder for each target is awaiting its turn to fire.This line is located ten yards back of the line oftelephone operators.

e. The line of rifle rests and cleaning racks isfive yards behind the ready line.

f. The control stand for the officer in charge offiring is placed twenty yards to the rear of andcentered on the firing line. It must be located sothe officer in charge of firing can observe and con-trol the operation of the range.

278

40

I. m I. t~~~~0 N : .

~:o o

o

- 0

I. o. J

· ~~~~~~~~u ~~ ~~~o K

27 4

0 0 -- 0

279

I.~ ~ 4073

0 4

o x O~~~~~~~~~~0

I. ~ 0 4 9

I. *0 4$ b

I. Y

04 ~ ~ 0

279

g. Ordnance and aid men are located in rear ofthe center of the ready line.

h. A public address system, if available, is setup near the officer in charge. Enough speakersare placed at intervals behind the ready line toenable all personnel to hear fire commands andother announcements from the officer in charge.A speaker placed in the pit and connected througha telephone terminal to the address system en-ables the pit officer to hear all commands fromthe officer in charge of firing.

Section V. SUBJECTS COMMON TO INSTRUCTIONAND RECORD FIRING

152. CLOTHING

The uniform which is worn during firing isprescribed by the unit or higher commander.Normally, fatigue clothes are worn. A cartridgebelt is worn by the firer during all firing.

153. PADS AND GLOVES

You are encouraged to use pads and gloves toprotect your shoulder, elbows, and arms duringknown-distance firing. The pads ease the shockof recoil and provide comfort so the firer can con-centrate on shooting. The use of shooting coatsis permissible. If these items are not available,other padding may be used. Only pads of mod-erate size and thickness may be used. Pads thatform an artificial support for the weapon are notused. A hook or other devices on the sleeve arenot allowed to keep the sling in place. A glovemay be worn on either hand.

280

154. INSTRUMENTS

Binoculars and spotting scopes are authorized.Instruments may not be used for determining thevelocity and direction of the wind during recordfiring.

155. SHELTERS

Riflemen are not permitted to use sheds orshelter tents on the range.

156. THE RIFLE

a. The rifle as it is issued by the OrdnanceDepartment. The sights should be blacked duringall range firing. Weapons and appliances whichmay have been issued for test purposes will notbe used when firing for classification.

b. Trigger pull of the rifle must be at least4.5 pounds and not more than 7.5 pounds. Be-fore record firing, the trigger pull should betested.

c. Only ammunition issued by the OrdnanceDepartment will -be used. During record firingno one will be issued more than the prescribednumber of rounds.

d. The sling will be used on one arm only. Noknot will be tied in the sling, and the sling itselfwill neither be added to nor modified in any man-ner, except that additional holes may be punchedin the sling. The sling should be adjusted on thearm before the firer takes his position on the fir-ing line.

281

157. RANGE PRECAUTIONS

Safety regulations which must be observedwhen handling and firing the rifle are covered inparagraph 353.

158. DAMAGED 'OR BROKEN RIFLES

If a breakage occurs, the rifle will be repairedor a different rifle will be used. If repairs in-volve the sights or if a different rifle is used, thefirer will be allowed to rezero the repaired rifleor to zero the new weapon, and then to refire theexercise.

159. LOADING

Rifles are initially loaded only on command.Thereafter, they will be loaded at will as long asthe firer is in the firing position and until hehas expended his ammunition or the commandCEASE FIRE is given.

160. TELEPHONES

Telephones for the firing line and pit are usedfor official communications only. Only the officerin charge of the firing or one of his assistantsmay request the identification of a target oper-ator on any particular target. Pit personnel maynot request the name of any particular firer. Thefollowing commands should be used over the tele-phone:

a. When a shot has been fired and the targethas not been withdrawn for marking-MARKTARGET NUMBER-

282

b. When a spotter has been placed in the tar-get but the target has not been disked-DISKTARGET NUMBER

c. When the target has been disked but thevalue of the shot was not understood-REDISKTARGET NUMBER-

d. Fire commands as given by the officer incharge of firing. Example-

READY ON THE RIGHT?

READY ON THE LEFT?

READY ON THE FIRING LINE.

161. COACHING

During instruction firing, the coach will helpthe firer in many ways. The firer must followthe coach's advice. During record firing thereare certain limitations imposed on the coach (par.186). When enough experienced personnel areavailable, well-trained and well-rehearsed non-commissioned officers will be assigned as coaches.Otherwise, the firers take turns coaching. Mostorganizations assign specially qualified coachesto several extra targets on one end of the firingline. Firers who have difficulty may be sent tothese coaches for assistance and additional in-struction. The positions and duties of the coachduring preparatory marksmanship training arediscussed in paragraphs 75, 103, 104, 109, and111. The duties of the coach during instructionfiring are discussed in paragraphs 178 to 180.

283

162. SCORE CARD

The score card serves as a firing record of theweapon. The firer must keep his own score cardduring all of his firing.

Section VI. INSTRUCTION FIRING

163. GENERAL

Instruction firing involves the use of live am-munition in applying the principles taught dur-ing preparatory marksmanship training. Instruc-tion firing is outlined in each of the five riflecourses and is designed to serve as a guide only.Within the ammunition allowances of each unit,the number of shots to be fired at each rangeis determined by the organization commander.

164. DUMMY CARTRIDGES

a. The usefulness of dummy cartridges can-not be overemphasized. They save live ammuni.tion and can be used over and over. Used alone,they are an excellent training aid for simulatedfiring and, when used with live ammunition, theyare highly effective for detecting and putting anend to flinching.

b. To use dummy cartridges during instruc-tion firing, slow fire, the coach, at his discretion,has the pupil look away from his rifle. Then thecoach loads either a dummy or live cartridge, orlets the bolt close on an empty chamber. In thisway the pupil does not know how the rifle isloaded.

284

c. Insjtruction firing in sustained fire shouldinclude firing live and dummy cartridges mixedin a clip, thus doubling the amount of practice.The coach operates the bolt each time a dummycartridge is fired. Because of the slower rate ofmanual operation of the bolt, additional timeshould be allowed in firing these mixed clips.This training is needed to develop correct triggersqueeze.

165. ZEROING_

One of the purposes of instruction firing is toobtain the zero of your rifle. The rifle will bezeroed at each ra::ge to be fired for qualification.Be sure to reccrd the zero sight setting on yourscore card. After instruction firing or when thezero of the rifle has been definitely determined,the zero record card of the score card will be cutoff and pasted, glued, or shellacked onto the floorplate of the trigger housing group. Then by open-ing the bolt and looking into the receiver, youcan see the zero of your rifle for the differentranges.

166. THE 1,000-INCH RANGE

The target is so devised that when the sightsare correctly set and the aim is accurately takenat 6 o'clock on the bull's-eye, the center of theshot group should be in the center of the bull's-eye.

285

167. ZEROING RIFLE ON THE 1,000-INCH RANGE

Set your sight at 12 clicks of elevation and zerowindage. Take a steady aim in the prone positionand fire one round. Continue this until you havefired three rounds. You should be able to seeyour shot group. If the visibility of the shotgroup is limited, binoculars may be used, or theinstructor, after taking necessary safety precau-tions, may move along the line of targets andannounce the corrections to the coaches in termsof inches, or you may go to the line of targetsand observe your own shot group. You will thendetermine how many clicks to move your rearsight, and your coach will verify this change.On the 1,000-inch range, one click of elevationor windage will move the strike of the bullet one-quarter of an inch. Corrections are applied aftereach shot group, if necessary, with the thirdgroup being a confirming group.

168. ZEROING RIFLE ON KNOWN-DISTANCERANGES

The position of the spotters on the target willpermit the necessary corrections in elevation andwindage to be computed by the elevation anddeflection rules. These corrections are then ap-plied to the rear sight. Your coach or an experi-enced firer should check these changes.

169. ZEROING RIFLE AT 100 YARDS

Raise the elevation 14 clicks from the lowestclick on the rear sight and set the windage index

286

line in the center of the windage gage. To zeroyour rifle at 100 yards on a day when no windis blowing, proceed as follows:

a. Load your rifle, take the prone position, getthe correct sight picture, and fire a round.

b. Call the shot and enter your call on thescore card.

c. Fire two more rounds using the same pro-cedure.

d. When the target is marked, enter on yourscore card the location of the three shots on thetarget.

e. Determine how far the center of this shotgroup is from the center of the bull's-eye.

f. Using the elevation and deflection rules,make a change on your rear sight for elevationand windage to bring the center of your nextshot group into the center of the bull's-eye.

g. Fire three more rounds using the same pro-cedure as for the first group.

h. Plot the location of the second shot groupand make a sight change, if necessary, to'movethe center of this group into the center of thebull's-eye.

i. Fire the third group. This group should bein the center of the bull's-eye.

j. The setting that you have on the rear sightis the zero of your rifle at 100 yards on a daywhen no wind is blowing. Record the setting asyour 100-yard zero.

170. ZEROING RIFLE AT 200 YARDSRaise the elevation only 12 clicks instead of

14 clicks and proceed as you did for 100 yards.

287

Record the elevation and windage for the 200-yard zero on your score card.

171. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 100- AND 200-YARDSIGHT SETTING

You may wonder why your rifle requires 14clicks of elevation at 100 yards and only 12 clicksat 200 yards. To understand the reason for thischange, you must realize that although you aimat the bottom of a 12-inch bull's-eye, you haveset your sights so that the bullet will strike inthe center of the bull's-eye or 6 inches above youraiming point. In rising that 6 inches, at 200yards the bullet travels on an arc and, by thetime it has traveled 100 yards (half the distance),it has climbed approximately 4 inches above theline of aim. Therefore, if the target were at 100yards and the 200 yards sight setting were used,the bullet would strike 4 inches instead of 6 inchesabove the bottom of the bull's-eye. Two moreclicks of elevation at 100 yards are therefore re-quired' to cause the bullet to strike in the centerof the bull's-eye.


Add 3 clicks of elevation to your 200-yard zeroon the rear sight, then proceed as you did whenyou zeroed at 100 yards.. Record the elevationand windage for the 300-yard zero on your scorecard.

173. BATTLE SIGHTThe 300-yard zero of your rifle is also the set-

ting for your BATTLE SIGHT.

288

a. To set the battle sight (fig. 101), lock therear sight at the 300-yard zero by tightening therear sight locking nut; be careful not to disturbthis sight setting. Loosen the screw in the ele-vation knob with the screwdriver blade of thecombination tool. Move the elevating knob drumuntil the index line for BATTLE SIGHT, whichis the 300-yard line, is opposite the index line onthe receiver. Now tighten the elevating screw.Your sights are now set for the 300-yard or theBATTLE SIGHT zero. This sight setting on yourrear sight is most important. During combat,-

Figure 101. Setting the battle sight.

289

most of your firing will be done using this sightsetting.. Keep it on your rifle and keep the rearsight locking nut tight. Record the windage zeroon your score card.

b. With the new modified rear sight, there isno way of tightening the elevation knob whilethe adjustment is being made. For sights of thistype, proceed as follows:

(1) Zero your rifle as described in para-graph 172.

(2) Run the aperture all the way to the low-est position, counting the number ofclicks from the 300-yard setting.

(3) With the screw driver blade, loosen theelevation knob screw just enough tostart it or break it loose, but leave ittight enough to turn the sight.

(4) Run the sight back up the same numberof clicks you counted when running theaperture down to its lowest position;then, holding the elevation knob firmlyat this point, loosen the screw. Holdthe aperture with the right hand andreset the knob by pulling the knob outand turning it so that its 300-yard rangemarking is at the index line.

(5) Hold the knob and tighten the elevationknob screw as firmly as possible,- thenrun.the sight all the way up to the high-est point and set the screw tight.

(6) Check the setting by running the sightall the way down and then raising it,counting the number of clicks for the

290

300-yard setting. If the adjustment ofthe elevation knob has been done cor-rectly, the 300-yard line will be at theindex line on the receiver.

c. The reason for running the sight all theway down before trying to loosen the screw isthat at the bottom position the knob will not turnto the left. This furnishes the necessary resis-tance to hold. the pinion shaft while the screw isbeing turned to the left. In the same way, at thetop of its movement, the shaft can turn no fur-ther to the right and at that point the elevationknob screw can be tightened firmly.


Add 7 clicks of elevation to your 300-yard zero.Zero your rifle at the 500-yard range in the samemanner as you did for 100 yards. When you ob-tain a sight setting that allows you to place thecenter of a shot group in the center of the bull's-eye, you have the zero of your rifle at 500 yards.Record the zero elevation and windage for thisrange on your score card and memorize this sightsetting.

175. ZEROING RIFLE WHEN A WIND IS BLOWING

Determine the zero for each range by usingthe method for a windless day. Then determinethe value of the wind in clicks by using the windformula R x V. Subtract the result of this for-

10mula from the windage setting on the rear sight.The sight setting that you now have left on the

291

rear sight, both in windage and elevation, is thezero sight setting for that range on a day withno wind blowing.

176. SLOW FIRE

The first few shots you fire on the range shouldbe slow fire from the prone position. At first, youshould concentrate on developing the ability tofire a small group. Pay no attention to the score.Follow this with slow fire in the other positions.

177. SUSTAINED FIRE

No rifleman should fire sustained fire until hehas fired a satisfactory group at slow fire. Duringsustained fire, the tendency to jerk the triggeris increased. You must correct this tendency be-fore it becomes a fixed habit. Before firing asustained fire run with live ammunition, it isadvisable for each order to simulate a run ofsustained fire, using dummy cartridges. Follow-ing this, the firing of clips mixed with live anddummy ammunition is an important step in learn-ing correct trigger squeeze during sustained fire.

178. COACHING

You will work under the supervision of a coachduring instruction firing. This does not meanthat you will have an experienced marksman be-side you. Any man who has been instructed in pre-paratory marksmanship training and in coachingmethods can coach with good results and shouldbe used when more experienced riflemen are not

292

available. One or more targets should be set upon one end of the firing line with expert coachesin charge to take care of firers who are havingtrouble. The coach should be very patient so asnot to excite or confuse the rifleman.

a. Position of the Coach. On the firing linethe coach should take a position similar to thatof the man who is firing so he can watch thefirer's trigger finger and observe any indicationsof flinching.

b. Detecting and Preventing Flinching. Flinch-ing can usually be prevented by efficient coaching.One of the primary duties of a good coach is todetect flinching. An inclination to flinch may bedetected by watching the pupil's head and eye atthe time he is squeezing the trigger. If the pupil'seye begins to twitch during the application ofthe trigger squeeze and his head gradually isdrawn away from the thumb or stock, the coachhas positive indications that his pupil will flinch.As soon as the coach notices a tendency to flinch,he has the pupil bring his rifle down from thefiring position and relax for a few minutes. Whilethe pupil is resting, the coach points out therifleman's errors to him. These usually will be-

(1) Not taking up the slack with an initialheavy pressure.

(2) Applying the trigger squeeze by meansof a number of jerks of the triggerfinger instead of a continuous firm pres-sure.

(3) Concentrating on the discharge of therifle instead of on the sight picture.

293

c. Helping the Pupil to Detect Flinching. Afterhis mistakes have been pointed out, the pupil ispermitted to aim again. If the pupil continuesto flinch, the coach has him turn his head asidewhile he, the coach, puts a cartridge in the cham-ber and closes the bolt. The coach frequentlyloads a dummy cartridge into the chamber ormerely simulates loading without allowing thepupil to know whether the rifle actually is loadedor 'not. In this way the flinch becomes evidentto the pupil as well as to the coach. Indicationsof flinching are-

(1) Hunching the right shoulder at the in-stant the hammer falls.

(2) Winking the eye.(3) Pulling the head away from the rifle.

d. Remedies for Flinching. The coach thenproceeds to show the pupil that this difficultymay be readily overcome by applying the correcttrigger squeeze. The coach will do this by squeez-ing the trigger several times while the pupil aimsthe rifle. The shots that are fired when the coachsqueezes the trigger usually are good and mayprove to the rifleman that he is able to aim cor-rectly and that his inaccurate shooting is causedby incorrect trigger squeeze. To squeeze the trig-ger for the rifleman, the coach lies with his rightelbow on the ground to steady his hand, andplaces his forefinger against the trigger and histhumb against the back of the trigger guard. Inthis way, he can apply pressure to the trigger bya pinching action of his thumb and forefinger.The coach must be careful that his application

294

of force against the trigger is in a line parallelto the line of the sights, otherwise he will pullthe sights out of alinement. The coach watchesthe rifleman's'back, and between 5 and 10 secondsafter the rifleman begins to hold his breath, heapplies enough pressure to fire the rifle. He re-quires the rifleman to call each shot. After firingthe rifle in this way a few times, the coach letsthe rifleman try a few shots alone to see if hecan squeeze the trigger without knowing justwhen the rifle will fire. Sometimes it is neces-sary to repeat this exercise, but the majority ofbeginners can be cured of the tendency to flinchby a few minutes of this kind of coaching. Menwith previous firing experience who still have ahabitual tendency to flinch require more time andpatience.

179. COACH'S DUTIES DURING SLOW FIRE

The coach observes the pupil carefully andcorrects all errors. When necessary, the coachapplies the coaching methods of squeezing thetrigger to prevent flinching. He requires-

a. The sights to be blacked and set at the cor-rect elevation and windage.

b. The ammunition to be free from dirt.c. The pupil to adjust the sling properly and

to take the correct position.d. The pupil to turn his head away while the

coach loads.e. The pupil to hold his breath properly. (He

checks by watching the pupil's back.)

295

f. The pupil to take up the slack promptly anddecisively with one motion.

g. The pupil to fire without flinching.h. The pupil to release the pressure on the

trigger, and to lower his rifle for a moment whenhis shot has not-been fired in 8 or 9 seconds afterthe slack has been taken up.

i. The pupil to call his shot each time he fires.j. The pupil to keep his score card correctly.

180. COACH'S DUTIES DURING SUSTAINED FIRE

The coach observes the pupil carefully andcorrects all errors. He operates the bolt whendummy rounds are used and also watches thepupil's back from time to time to see whether heholds his breath while firing each shot. He notesimproper timing, and, in appropriate cases, rec-ommends to the officer, in charge of firing thatadditional preparatory sustained fire practice begiven. As the pupil's target is marked, the coachmakes sure that the pupil plots his shot groupaccurately and records everything pertaining tohis shots. Each of the following operations isdone in sequence, and the coach checks each inturn. He requires-

a. The sights to be blacked and set at the cor-rect elevation and windage.

b. The ammunition to be free from dirt.c. The pupil to adjust his sling properly and

take the correct position.d. The pupil to take up the slack promptly and

decisively in one motion.

296

e. The pupil to fire without flinching.

f. The pupil to count his shots aloud to insurehis breathing after each shot.

g. The pupil to reload properly.

h. The pupil to plot his shot group on the scorecard.

Section VII. RECORD FIRING

181. GENERAL

The purpose of record firing is to test the sol-dier's skill as a rifleman and to determine hisqualification. Qualification courses are outlined ineach rifle course. The course for qualification tobe fired by the individual is directed by ArmyRegulations or Training Programs. See AR 775-10, ATP 7-300, and ATP 21-ll10N.

182. RECORD CLASSIFICATION SCORE CARDS

During record firing a scorer is assigned to eachfiring point. Scorers should be thoroughly ori-ented in their duties and responsibilities. Froma position directly to the rear of the firing pointthe scorer will record, on a separate score cardof the same type used by the firer (fig. 99), thevalue of each shot as it is signaled from the pits.These score cards constitute the official record offiring for classification purposes. When recordfiring is completed, the officer in charge of firingwill collect all score cards and, after checking andsigning them, will turn them over to the organ-ization commander.

297

183. SLOW FIRE

Only one rifleman in each order will be as-signed to a target. When all riflemen are readyto' fire, the officer in charge of firing gives thecommand- LOCK; ONE ROUND, LOAD; COM-MENCE FIRING.

As each shot is disked in the pits, the scorer an-nounces its value in a tone loud enough for thefirer to hear:

Name .................-.................... (Sgt Jones)The number of the shot ..........- (1st shot)The value of the hit .................. (a five)

At this time, if a miss is indicated or if there isany doubt about the value, the firer may chal-lenge this shot. The officer in charge of firinghas the pit officer check the target in question.After rechecking, the scorer then records thevalue of the hit on the score card. At the endof the firing, the officer in charge of firing com-mands-CEASE FIRING, UNLOAD, CLEARRIFLES.

184. SUSTAINED FIRE

a. One rifleman in each order will be assignedto a target. The rifleman adjusts the loop orhasty sling on his arm before he takes his posi-tion on the firing line. He has one loose roundand a clip of eight rounds. After he checks hisclip for long rounds, the firer places the clip inthe third pocket of his cartridge belt. The tar-gets are run up and the firer takes his positionand sights on his target. When satisfied with

298

his position, he rises, relaxes, and waits for thefire command.

b. When all firers have checked their position,the targets are withdrawn and a red flag is dis-played at the center target. At this signal, theofficer in charge of firing commands-LOCK,ONE ROUND, LOAD.

When the rifle is locked and loaded, the coachsteps back two paces. This shows the officer incharge of firing that the firers are ready. Hecontinues with-

READY ON THE RIGHT?

READY ON THE LEFT?

Any firer not ready calls out, NOT READY ONTARGET NUMBER_. When everyone is ready,the fire command is continued-READY ONTHE FIRING LINE.

At this command, the firer unlocks his rifle, standsrelaxed with his eyes on his target and his righthand on the heel of his rifle butt.

c. At the command READY ON THE FIR-ING-LINE, the read flag is waved for 5 seconds,then lowered. Five seconds after the flag is low-ered, the targets appear, and remain exposed forthe prescribed length of time. This time startswhen the targets reach their highest point.

d. The rifleman takes his position as soon asthe target appears and fires the first round; hethen reloads with a full clip taken from the beltand attempts to fire the prescribed number ofshots.

299

e. At the end of the prescribed time the tar-gets are withdrawn, and the officer in chargecommands-UNLOAD, CLEAR RIFLES.In case of a stoppage through no fault of his own,the rifleman will be permitted to fire his remain-ing rounds if he applied immediate action. He isgiven 4 seconds t6 fire each remaining round andan additional 6 seconds if he has to load a clipinto the rifle. If the stoppage was his fault, hewill not be permitted to complete the firing. Ifa rifleman fails to fire at all, he will be givenanother chance to fire, but if he fires any shots,the score must stand as his 'record. He will notbe permitted to repeat his score on the claim thathe was not ready.

f. All unfired cartridges are removed from therifle and the bolt is left open. The firers remainin position on the firing line until their rifleshave been cleared and a clearance of the firingline is announced; they are then ordered off by'the officer in charge of firing.

g. As the targets are disked from the pits, thescore of each hit is announced by the scorer atthe firing line. For example, a score of 9 shots isannounced as follows, as each shot is disked:

Target __ . (Number of target)1-five, 2-fives, 3-fives, 4-fives, 5-fives.1-four, 2-fours, 3-fours.1-three.

As soon as the target has been disked, the scorercounts the number of shots disked. If there aremore hits than the prescribed number of roundsfired, the scorer requests that the target be re-

300

disked. When the target shows more than theprescribed number of hits, the rifleman must re-fire the exercise unless all shots on the targethave-the same value. Targets are usually left upfor approximately one minute after disking. Thisgives each firer time to plot the shot group onhis score card. The score card is kept during allfiring. Targets may be left up longer on the direc-tion of the officer in charge of firing.

185. SLOW AND SUSTAINED FIRE ON THE 1,000-INCH RANGE

Firing on the 1,000-inch range is done in amanner similar to firing on the known distancerange with the following exceptions:

a. The officer in charge of firing gives thecommands COMMENCE FIRING and CEASEFIRING.

b. The prescribed time starts with the com-mand COMMENCE FIRING and ends with thecommand CEASE FIRING.

c. On completion of slow fire and sustainedfire for each order, the firer and scorer are giventime to examine the target for the purpose ofrecording the scores.

186. REGULATIONS

The record course normally is fired for qualifi-cation; thus additional regulations are imposedon record firing. Some of these regulations are-

a. Restrictions on Identification of the Firer.Members of the pit detail should not know who

301

is firing on any particular target and no attemptwill be made to obtain this information. Per-sonnel on or in rear of the firing line will nottransmit this information to members of the pitdetail.

b. Coaching. Coaching is permitted. However,the coach may not touch any part of the firer'sbody or weapon while he is firing.

c. Warming or Fouling Shots. Warming orfouling shots are not permitted.

d. Cleaning. Cleaning is permitted only be-tween firing exercises.

e. Slow Fire Course Interrupted. If you areinterrupted through no fault of your own whenfiring the slow fire course, the unfired shotsnecessary to complete the course will be fired atthe first opportunity.

f. Misses.(1) Slow fire. In disking targets during

slow fire, before any miss is signaled,the target will be withdrawn and care-fully examined, preferably by an officer.Whenever the target is run up and amiss is disked, it will be presumed thatthis examination has been thoroughlymade. If a challenge of a miss is made,the target will be very closely checkedand the result disked to the firing line.

(2) Sustained fire. If a challenge is madefrom the firing line after the target hasbeen marked in sustained fire, it maybe withdrawn and reexamined to deter-mine possible corrections in the original

302

marking. After a challenge, the exam-ination of a sustained fire target formisses will be made, preferably by anofficer, before the target is run up tobe disked.

g. Accidental Discharge. All the shots you fireafter taking your place on the firing line are con-sidered a part of your record score. This applies,regardless of whether your weapon is directedtoward the target or fired accidentally.

h. Firing on the Wrong Target. Each shotthat you fire on the wrong target is entered asa miss on your score card, regardless of whatthe value of the shot may be. You receive creditonly for those shots which you fire on your owntarget.

i. More Than the Prescribed Number of Hitson the Target.

(1) In slow fire. If two shots strike yourtarget at nearly the same instant thatyou fire, you will receive credit for yourshot only if both hits are of the samevalue. The other hit is not recorded. Ifthe hits are of different value you willhave to refire the shot.

(2) In sustained fire. When your target hasmore than the prescribed number ofhits, the target will not be marked un-less all hits have the same value, inwhich case the target will be markedand you will be given credit for eachshot you fired.

j. Withdrawing the Targets Prematurely. Dur-

303

ing slow fire, if a target is withdrawn just as youfire a shot, report this fact at once to the officerin charge of firing or one of his assistants. Youwill be allowed to fire another round if the com-plaint is warranted. The scorekeeper will bedirected to disregard your last shot. During sus-tained fire exercises, you will be allowed to re-fire the exercise if your target is withdrawn pre-maturely.

k. Stoppages During Sustained Fire. If youhave a stoppage during sustained fire, you mustapply immediate action and attempt to finish theexercise. If this action does not reduce the stop-page, try to lock the rifle, then raise your handand call STOPPAGE. The, officer in charge offiring or one of his assistants will investigatethe cause of the stoppage. When it is determined*that the stoppage was caused through your faultor neglect you will not be allowed to complete theexercise. You will receive credit only for thescore made on the number of rounds fired. If itis determined that the stoppage was causedthrough no fault of yours, you will be given per-mission to refire the-entire exercise. If time andammunition are not available, you will be givenpermission to complete the exercise on the basisof four seconds for each round that remains tobe fired. If a clip has to be loaded into the rifle,six additional seconds will be allowed. In no case,will you be given any information regarding yourprevious hits on the target until the exercise iscompleted.

1. Unfired Rounds in Sustained Fire. Each un-

304

fired cartridge is recorded as a miss except asstated in k above.

m. Damaged Rifle. If your rifle is damagedwhile firing, through no fault of yours, your lastshots will be disregarded and the target will notbe marked. You will refire the exercise after yourrifle is repaired.

n. Shots Cutting Edge of Bull's-Eye or AnyDividing Line. Any shot cutting the edge of thebull's-eye will be signaled and recorded as a hitin the bull's-eye. Because the limiting line of eachdivision of the target is the outer edge of theline separating it from the next lower division,a shot touching this line will be disked and re-corded as a hit in the higher division.

187. FIRE COMMANDS

Each fire command you receive on the rangefollows a set form. Sample fire commands forslow and sustained fire exercises on the 1,000-inch and known distance ranges .are listed below.

a. Fire commands for the 1,000-inch range.(1) Slow fire.

LOCKONE ROUND, LOADCOMMENCE FIRINGCEASE FIRING

(2) Sustained fire.LOCKONE ROUND, LOADREADY ON THE RIGHT?READY ON THE LEFT?READY ON THE FIRING LINE

305

COMMENCE FIRINGCEASE FIRING

b. Fire commands for the known distanceranges.

(1) Slow fire.LOCKONE ROUND, LOADCOMMENCE FIRINGCEASE FIRING

(2) Sustained fire.LOCKONE ROUND, LOADREADY ON THE RIGHT?READY ON THE LEFT?READY ON THE FIRING LINE

(Appearance of targets is the signal to commencefiring, disappearance of targets is the signal tocease firing.)

c. Explanation of fire commands:(1) READY ON THE RIGHT (LEFT).

This is the command used to determinewhether all firers on the right (left)portion of the firing line are preparedfor the firing exercise. If firer is notready, he raises his hand and calls NOTREADY ON TARGET.

(2) READY ON THE FIRING LINE. Thiscommand means that all personnel onthe firing line are prepared for the firingexercise. To the officer in charge of thepit detail, this command is a signal towave the red flag from the center of theline of targets.

306

(3) COMMENCE FIRING. This commandis used to grant permission to the rifle-men to start firing. It is used on theknown distance range for slow fire andfor all 1,000-inch fire commands.

(4) CEASE FIRING. This command meansto stop firing at once.

(5) UNLOAD. This command means to un-load the unfired cartridge from thechamber and to remove the clip from therifle.

(6) CLEAR RIFLES. This command meansto pull the bolt all the way to the rearand to lock the rifle. The chamber isthen inspected by an assistant instruc-tor who is near that section of the firingline.

(7) FIRING LINE IS CLEAR. This com-mand means that the firing has stoppedand all rifles have been cleared. Move-ment in front of the firing line or outof the pit is now safe.

Section VIII. PIT OPERATION

188. GENERAL

The pit detail's efficient operation of the targetis essential to good shooting. At some time youwill assist in operating the pits. You may be atarget operator, a telephone operator, or a non-commissioned officer assisting the pit officer.Whatever your job may be, do it well.

307

189. ORGANIZATION

When possible, a unit other than the one thatis firing provides the pit detail. This is especiallydesirable during record firing. Although it isdesirable to have three or four target operatorsfor each two targets, the pit can be run efficientlywith only one operator per target. Besides targetoperators, an operator must be provided for eachtelephone and ammunition point. Normally, thereis one telephone in the pit for every ten targets.Enough officers and noncommissioned officers areassigned to assist in supervising the pit detail.To insure efficient pit operation, one officer shouldbe assigned to every twenty targets and one non-commissioned officer to every eight targets.

190. PIT OFFICER

The officer in charge of the pit is responsiblefor the safety of the pit detail and for the effi-cient operation of the targets. He will arrive onthe range in advance of the pit detail and thefiring unit to see that everything is in workingorder and ready to be used. He will know thenumber of men firing, the number of targetsneeded, and the number of men he will have tooperate the targets, the telephones, and the am-munition points.

191. ORIENTATION

The officer in charge of the pit will explain anddemonstrate marking and operation of the tar-gets by using the following equipment:

a. One A target with several 3-inch spotters

308

and a short range disk. These are used for the100-, 200-, and 300-yard ranges.

b. One B target with several 5-inch spottersand a midrange disk. The short range disk isused for 100-, 200-, and 300-yard firing and themidrange disk is used for 500-yard firing. Themidrange disk as well as the 5-inch spotters maybe used at the 100-, 200-, and 300-yard ranges,if they are needed during periods of poor visibil-ity.

192. MARKING

a. Use of the Spotter. In known distance fir-ing the rifleman cannot see where the shot hitsthe target. To indicate the exact location of theshot, the target operator places a spotter in thebullet hole. He uses the 3-inch spotters whenfiring is conducted at 100, 200, and 300 yards,and the 5-inch spotters when the firing is doneat 500 yards. If the shot hits the target outsideof the bull's-eye, he places the spotter in the bullethole with the black side of the spotter exposedto the firer. If the shot hits the bull's-eye, thespotter is placed in the bullet hole with the whiteside of the spotter exposed to the firer.

b. Use of the Disk. The disk is used to indi-cate the value of each shot as follows:

ShotDisk value

White ............................................. 5Red ........... ............................ 4White with a black cross ................................................. . 3

Note. A red flag indicates a miss. Ricochets are in-dicated as misses except when specific instructions allowthem to be counted as hits.

309

c. Procedure for Using Disk and Red Flag.(1) For a 5- or a 4-ring hit, raise the disk

to the upper right hand corner of thetarget and then lower the disk over thecenter of the spotter.

(2) For a 3-ring hit, raise the disk to theupper left hand corner of the target,then lower the disk over the center ofthe spotter.

(3) For a miss, move the flag slowly acrossthe front of the target oncefor eachmiss. It is advisable during instructionfiring to mark the shots that hit outsidethe 3-ring. They are still recorded asmisses, but the location of the shot canbe seen from the firing line, enablingthe rifleman to make a practical sightchange in order to bring the next shotinto the center of the bull's-eye. Missesoutside the 3-ring will not be markedduring record firing.

193. OPERATING AND MARKING TARGETS DURINGZEROING

While zeroing, the firer on your target will firethree rounds to form a group. Leave the targetup until you are ordered to withdraw it by theofficer in charge of the pit. Place a spotter ineach of the three holes, then raise the target. Diskeach hit. Hits of the highest value are diskedfirst. Care must be taken that the correct sideof the disk is exposed while marking the shotsDisk the shots slowly to avoid confusing the firer.

310

When one spotter is used to cover more than onehit, the disk is placed over the spotter the re-quired number of times. After disking one hit,the disk is raised to the upper right (or left)corner before disking the next shot. You willthen be told to withdraw the target, remove thespotters, paste the bullet holes, and raise the tar-get for the next group of three shots.

194. OPERATING AND MARKING TARGET DURINGSLOW FIRE

Withdraw and mark the target for each shot.You must remain alert in order to give good pitoperation. Watch' and listen for the bullet tostrike the target. When your target is hit, pullit down and place a spotter in the hole. Since therifleman might have fired more than one shot,always check the target for more than one hit.If there is more than one hit, place a spotter ineach bullet hole and disk the hits as required.The spotter is left in the target until the nextshot is fired. At that time the spotter is re-moved, placed in the new hole, and the old holeis pasted. If the hit is in the bull's-eye and thespotter interferes with the firer's sight picture,the spotter will be removed and the bullet holepasted if the firer requests it.

195. OPERATING AND MARKING TARGET DURINGSUSTAINED FIRE

You must stand by your target at all timesduring a sustained fire exercise because the timeallowed for the exercise is short. Before the exer-cise starts, you will be told to raise your target.

311

This allows the rifleman to check his aim andposition. Later, the pit officer will tell you towithdraw the target and stand by for the nextcommand. That command will be RAISE ALLTARGETS. A whistle may be used for givingthis command. All targets should be raised atthe same time. The pit officer times the exercisestarting when the targets reach their highestpoint. Several seconds before the end of theexercise, the pit officer instructs STAND BYYOUR TARGETS. The command TARGETSDOWN is given so that the targets are loweredjust at the expiration of the time limit. All tar-gets should be lowered at the same time. Nor-mally, the targets are raised again before mark-ing in order that those firers with stoppages mayfire their alibis. When marking the target fora sustained fire exercise, you need to place onlyenough spotters in the target to indicate the lo-cation of the shot group. When disking the tar-get, however, remember to disk each shot. Writethe number of fives, fours, threes, and misses atthe bottom of the target. This helps you if thefirer should request a redisking of the targetafter you paste the bullet holes. If there are morehits on your target than the number of roundsfired by the firer, have the target checked by theofficer in charge of your section of the pit. Afterchecking, he will notify the officer in charge ofthe firing line. Usually, you will be directed topaste the target and raise it again so the firermay refire the exercise. If all the hits are of thesame value, the exercise is not refired. The firerreceives credit for the number of shots he fired.

312

196. EQUIPMENT

All necessary equipment to be used for mark-ing and pasting targets is found in the targethouse. For a list of the equipment used in theoperation of the pit, see paragraph 199.

a. The target is pasted on target cloth whichis mounted on a wooden frame 6 feet square. Thisframe is easily broken and the target can be punc-tured, so it is best for two -men to carry thetarget and place it in the target carrier.

b. The target carrier is mounted on a steelframe for holding the target. The carrier has acounterweight to balance the target. This counter-weight may be another target or some otherweight. In all cases the carrier must be tied tothe steel frame when placing a target in thecarrier or when removing the target. Some tar-get carriers have a rope tied to the bottom. Thisrope can be used to tie the carrier down. If thisis not done, the counterweight will drop and maycause personal injuries or damage to the targetequipment. If another target is used for counter-balance, the blank side will be placed toward thefiring line.

197. LOCATION OF LATRINES AND WATER POINTS

If these are within safety limits, the men mayuse them at any time. If they are not withinthe safety limits, the officer in charge of the pitwill permit their use only when the firing hasceased and a clearance of the firing line has beengiven the pit officer by the officer in charge offiring.

313

198. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following safety precautions must be ob-served while you are working in the pit:

a. You must remain near your target duringall firing. The only exception is in securing mark-ing equipment or using the latrine and waterpoint if they are within the safety limits.

b. Do not expose any part of your body abovethe butts.

c.' Be careful when operating the target car-rier, so that you do not injure yourself.

d. When handling the disk, take care not tostrike other target operators nearby. When youplace the disk down, be sure that it is secure sothat it will not fall and strike anyone.

e. No one may leave the pit until the firingline is clear. This permission is given by theofficer in charge of the pit after he has receivedclearance from the firing line. If one of two fir-ing sections finishes firing, the pit detail for thatsection may not leave the pit until authorized bythe officer in charge of firing.

Section IX. EQUIPMENT AND TARGETS

199. EQUIPMENT

A great amount of equipment is needed to teachyou how to shoot your rifle. There is equipmentfor the preparatory field, the range, the firingline, and the pit. A list of equipment and its usefollows.

314

a. Preparatory Marksmanship Equipment.1 numbered stake per four soldiers or less.1 rifle rack per 20 soldiers or less.1 stake (with the A 1,000-inch target bull's-

eyes painted or tacked on at heights tocorrespond to the standing, sitting, andprone positions) per twelve soldiers orless.

1 sighting and aiming bar, complete, foreach 2 soldiers.

1 M15 sighting device per 4 soldiers.1 rifle rest (box) per 4 soldiers.1 box with white paper, tacked on, per 4

soldiers.1 bull's-eye disk per 4 soldiers.1 pencil per 4 soldiers.1 score card for each soldier1 clip of dummy rounds per 2 soldiers.1 stop watch.1 M2 aiming device per 4 soldiers.1 table5 cleaning rods M3.1 first aid box1 spare parts box.1 progress chart to show the progress of

each soldier.Trash containers.Carbide lamps, with carbide and water. Other

sight blacking equipment may be used iflamps are not available.

Waste for cleaning purposes.Blackboards, chalk, and erasers to meet re-

quirements.Necessary charts to meet requirements.

315

Public address system (if available).

b. Range Equipment at the Firing Line.

Ammunition.Carbide lamps or suitable blacking equip-

ment.Tables (1 per ammunition loader).Chairs (1 per firing point, telephone oper-

ator, and ammunition loader).Binoculars (1 per point for use by the coach

or scorer at the 500-yard line).Score cards (1 per rifleman).Cleaning and preserving materials.Indelible pencils (1 per point, used during

record scoring).Boxes for brass (1 per 10 points).Boxes for trash (1 per 20 points).Spare parts box.Telephones (sufficient number for require-

ments) .First aid box.Ambulance.Cleaning racks (these may be located in the

company area).Dummy rounds (for use in detecting flinch-

ing).Stop watch for officer in charge of firing and

officers assistants on the firing line.Aiming device M2 (to check the sight pic-

ture of soldiers not shooting consistentlywell).

316

Public address system (if available).c. Range Equipment in the Pit.

A targets. (1 per target point.)B targets. (1 per target point.)3-inch spotters (9 spotters for each A tar-

get).5-inch spotters (1 for each B target).Marking disks (1 short range and 1 mid-

range per target).Pasters (buff and black) and paste for each

target point.Red flag (1 per target).Red flag attached to.long staff for use by pit

officer.Telephones (1 per phone terminal).First aid box.Stop watch and whistle for officer in charge

of the pit.Public address system (if available).

200. TARGETS

a. The A 1,000-inch rifle target is used for allpreparatory marksmanship training and firingon the 1,000-inch range. This target is a reduc-tion of the large A rifle target. The value of hitson the reduced target is the same as the value ofhits on the large target. Hits in the 2-ring arenot scored.

b. The A rifle target (fig. 91) is used for the100-, 200-, and 300-yard ranges for both slow andsustained fire. It is 6 feet high and 4 feet wide.It has a black circular bull's-eye (the 5 ring) 12

317

inches in diameter, an inner ring (the 4 ring) 24inches in diameter, and an outer ring (the 3 ring)36 inches in diameter. No value is given for hitsstriking the target outside of the 3 ring.

c. The B rifle target (fig. 92) is used for the500-yard range and is 6 feet square. It has ablack circular bull's-eye 20 inches in diameter,an inner ring 40 inches in diameter, and an outerring 60 inches in diameter. The value of hits onthe B target is the same as the value of hits onthe A target.

d. The diameter of the bull's-eye on the A tar-get (12 inches), the width of the 4 ring (6inches), and the width of the 3 ring (6 inches)are designed to correspond with the change ininches that clicks in elevation and windage causeat 300 yards. For instance, a 2-click change inwindage at 300 yards moves the strike of thebullet 6 inches, or the width of the 4 or 3 ring.Similarly, the diameter of the bull's-eye on theB target (20 inches) and the width of the 4 and3 rings (10 inches each) correspond to the changein inches that clicks in elevation and windagecause at 500 yards. For instance, a 2-click changeat 500 yards moves the strike of the bullet 10inches, or the width of either the 4 or 3 ring.

e. Targets E and F are used for unknown-distance firing and represent a figure about theheight of a man in the kneeling and prone posi-tions, respectively. They are constructed by tack-ing the pasteboard target, E or F, to a targetstake.

318

Section X. SMALL-BORE FIRING

201. PURPOSE

Small-bore firing provides marksmanship train-ing with the caliber .22 rifle and ammunition thatrepresents the application of the principles taughtin the preparatory exercises. Small-bore firingprovides an excellent means of improving theshooting in organizations and of sustaining in-terest in marksmanship throughout the year. Byfiring this course the company commander candetermine the state of training of his command.Thus he can concentrate his efforts on trainingthe men who are most deficient in their marks-manship.

202. CONDUCT OF SMALL-BORE FIRING

Small-bore firing may be carried on through-out the year, subject to limitations such as maybe imposed by the ammunition allowance. Sol-diers who have never been instructed in shootingmethods prescribed in this manual will be givenpreparatory instruction before being permittedto fire on the small-bore range. All small-borefiring will be organized and supervised accord-ing to the methods of instruction prescribed inthis manual.

203. COURSE E

When time and available facilities permit, or-ganizations may fire the small-bore course out-lined below. All firing is at 50 feet on the official50-foot small-bore target.

319

a. Instruction firing should be performed atleast twice, and may be fired three or more timeswhen ammunition allowances and training timepermit.

b. The minimum course E qualifying scoresfor the three classifications are-

(1) Expert rifleman ......-......... 320 points(2) Sharpshooter .......-................. 290 points(3) Marksman ............................. 260 points

Table I. Course E, Instruction Firing, Slow Fire(for Zero)

Time Shots Position Sling

No limit *10 Prone --------- Loop.

*AIl slow fire is single loaded.

Table II. Course E, Instruction Firing, Slow Fire


No limit -------- *5 Prone -_ Loop.... do --------- *5 Squatting ----- 'Do.... do --------- *5 Kneeling ------ Do... do ---.-.-.-- *5 Standing ------- Hasty.

*All slow fire is single loaded.

Table III. Course E, Instruction Firing, Sustained Fire


40 seconds 5 Squatting from standing Loop.40 seconds 5 Kneeling from standing Do.40 seconds *5 Prone from standing---- Do.

*Fired twice for one score (a total of 10 rounds from prone).

320

Table I. Course E, Record Firing, Slow Fire*


5 minutes ------- **5 Prone ---------- Loop.5 minutes ----- **5 Squatting ----- Do.5 minutes . ...... **5 Kneeling ------ Do.5 minutes ------- **5 Standing ----- Hasty.

*Fired once. In this record firing both slow and sustained fire, oneshot only will be fired on each bull's-eye of each 10-bull target.

**All slow fire is single loaded.

Table II. Course E, Record Firing, Sustained Fire* .


40 seconds 5 Squatting from standing Loop.40 seconds 5 Kneeling from standing Do.40 seconds **5 Prone from standing_. Do.

*Fired once. In this record firing both slow and sustained fire, oneshot only will be fired on each bull's-eye of each 10-bull target.

**Fired twice for one score (a total of 10 rounds from prone).

321

CHAPTER 4

MARKSMANSHIP, MOVING GROUND ANDAERIAL TARGETS

Section S. GENERAL

204. INTRODUCTION

a. General. This chapter covers the funda-mentals of firing at moving targets. You will betrained to fire at moving men, vehicles, 'and ap-propriate aerial targets within the effective rangeof your rifle. Rifle fire may be used against light-ly armored vehicles and motorized troops. Itcauses more heavily armored vehicles, like tanks,to button up, which restricts the vision of thecrew.

b. Effective Range. Under normal conditionsmoving ground targets may be engaged effective-ly at ranges up to 400 yards. Effective resultsbeyond 400 yards are considered exceptional.Therefore, training in the technique of fire atmoving ground targets is normally limited toranges up to 400 yards. Against parachutistsand slow flying aircraft, the maximum effectiverange is 500 and 600 yards respectively.

c. Battle Sights. Under combat conditions mov-ing targets are seldom exposed for long periods oftime. You can also expect the targets to movequickly while they are exposed. Under these con-ditions, you may not have time to make sight set-tings. Therefore, instruction in the technique of

322

firing at moving targets is based on the use ofthe battle sight and adjustment of the point ofaim on the target.

205. WHEN TO CONDUCT TRAINING

Instruction in the technique of firing at movingtargets follows instruction on known distance fir-ing and precedes combat type firing. You willbe trained to estimate the range and speed ofmoving vehicles before you practice firing at mov-ing targets. Instruction in the technique of firingat aerial targets is limited to training in theaerial target firing position and in the leads tobe taken for slow-moving aerial targets.

206. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

For applicable safety precautions, see SR 385-310-1, paragraph 353 of this manual, and localregulations.

Section II. MOVING PERSONNEL

207. TECHNIQUE

In combat, moving enemy soldiers present smallfleeting targets. This increases the importanceof an accurate sight setting and an accurate lead.When targets appear suddenly, 'allowing no timefor sight adjustment, you will have to use thebattle sight and select a proper aiming point withrespect to the center of the target so that the mov-ing target and the bullet meet.

323

208. METHOD OF AIMING

a. Aiming Point (fig. 102). When you useyour battle sight setting (300 yards zero), thepath of the bullet's flight is relatively flat up toa range of 400 yards; when firing at a stand-ing man, you should aim at the center of hisbody about belt level. Therefore, if the enemy sol-dier is moving directly toward or away from you,

AIMING POINTUSING BATTLE SIGHT (300 YDS)

AGAINST PERSONNEL

400. YDS OR LESSAIM HERE

Figure 102. Aiming point.

324'

use this same aiming point, his belt. Should youfind it necessary to engage an enemy soldier ata range greater than 400 yards, effective resultscan be obtained by setting your sight at theproper range and continuing to use the same aim-ing point.

b. Leads. To get the proper lead for firing ata man walking across your line of fire, aim therifle as shown in figure 103. If the man is run-ning, double the lead. Accuracy in this type offiring depends largely on the amount of time youdevote to the practice of leading the target, aim-ing, squeezing the trigger, following through, andthe correct battle sight setting. Use the follow-ing aiming points as a basis for obtaining theproper leads:

(1) At ranges less than 300 yards, aim atthe forward edge of the body.

(2.) At ranges of 300 yards or more, leadyour target by the width of the body.

Section III. MOVING VEHICLES

209. HOW TO DETERMINE THE POINT OF AIM ANDTO APPLY LEADS

a. The lead in terms of apparent target lengthnecessary to hit a moving vehicle will depend onthe size and'speed of the vehicle and on its range.Vehicles moving across country rarely exceed aspeed of 7 miles per hour. Vehicles moving onroads near the battle position will move muchfaster but as a general rule they seldom will beable to exceed a speed of 20 miles per hour.

325

b. Therefore, it is possible to establish a rulewhich will enable riflemen to hit most movingvehicles encountered on the battlefield.

(1) Normally, aim and fire at the leadingedge of the target.

LEADS(MAN WALKING)

USING BATTLE SIGHT (300 YDS)AGAINST PERSONNEL

300 YDS OR LESSAIM HERE

MORE THAN 300 YDSAIM HERE l

WIDTH OF BODY

Figure 103. Leads.

326

(2) If the speed of the target is greater than15 miles per hour and the range isgreater than 300 yards, aim and fireat a point one-half the apparent lengthof the vehicle ahead of the target. (One-half length lead.)

c. Using the apparent target length in estab-lishing the amount of lead makes it unnecessaryto correct for the angle at which the targetcrosses the line of sight. For example, two iden-tical vehicles, A and B, are crossing your sectorof fire. Each vehicle is at the same range andis traveling at the same speed. A is moving ap-proximately straight across your front. B iscrossing your front at an angle. As yqu look atthe vehicles, A will appear to be moving faster.B will appear shorter and will seem to be movingslower. Any vehicle crossing your front at anangle will require less lead than a vehicle movingstraight across your front. The correct amountof lead will be taken automatically when the ap-parent length of the target is used as a unit ofmeasure.

d. When no other facilities are available, prac-tice in aiming and leading a target may be ob-tained by tracking vehicles moving along roadsnear the training areas.

210. TECHNIQUE OF FIRE

The following technique is suggested for firingat moving vehicles, using the battle sight:

a. For approaching or receding targets, holdyour aim on the center of the target and squeezeoff each shot.

327

b. For targets crossing your front at any angle,align your sights on the front edge of the target;then swing the rifle laterally in the direction thetarget is moving (if necessary, take and hold theestimated lead), and squeeze off the shots. Swingthe rifle with a smooth, uniform motion.

c. Fire as rapidly as accurate aiming and lead-ing will permit.

Section IV. AERIAL TARGET

211. AIRCRAFT AND PARACHUTISTS

a. A volume of rifle fire is effective against lowflying troop carrier and slow flying observationaircraft, provided that shots are aimed well aheadof the target. Because of their speed, armor, andtactics, other types of aircraft are not consideredsuitable targets for rifle fire.

b. Descending parachutists are also targetsagainst which a volume of rifle fire is effective.Airborne troops are particularly vulnerable tocollective small-arms fire at the moment of land-ing and for a short time after landing while theyare securing their equipment and attempting toreorganize.

c. The maximum effective range of rifle fireagainst slow moving aircraft is approximately600 yards; against parachutists it is 500 yards.

212. TECHNIQUE OF FIRE

a. For aircraft targets descending directly to-ward or climbing directly from your firing posi-

328

tion: aim directly at the target'and squeeze offyour shot.

b. For aerial targets flying across your line offire and within effective range, aim ahead of thetarget and distribute your fire along the path ofthe target's flight. When the range to the targetexceeds 400 yards, aim the rifle above as well asin front of the target. To estimate the lead, usethe length of the target as the unit of measure.A lead of two lengths is recommended for slowflying observation planes, and a lead of one lengthis suggested for troop carrier planes and gliders.To hit a descending parachutist at a range of 300yards or less, aim at his feet. At ranges over300 yards, lead him by one length.

c. After having acquired the fundamentals ofgood shooting in your course of training in riflemarksmanship, you need only to have practice inswing and follow-through to enable you to fireon aerial targets. Steps to follow in firing ataerial targets are-

(1) Estimate the required lead, using thelength of the target as a unit of measure.

(2) Align the sights on the target, then rap-idly swing ahead to the required lead.

(3) Swing your rifle with a smooth, uniformmotion to maintain your aim along thepath of flight and at the required lead.

(4) Apply correct trigger squeeze to fire asmany rounds as possible without dis-turbing your aim.

d. Infantrymen should be prepared to fire assoon as possible after receiving warning of the

329

approach of hostile aircraft. You should begintracking the target before it comes within effec-tive range. This will enable you to track itsmoothly and to fire the maximum number ofrounds while it is within effective range.

330

CHAPTER 5

TECHNIQUE OF FIRE OF THE RIFLE SQUAD

Section I. GENERAL

213. INTRODUCTION

The steps in technique of fire training and thesequence in which they are given follow:

a. Range determination.

b. Rifle and automatic rifle fire and its effect.

c. Fire commands.

d. Application of fire by the squad.

e. Landscape target firing.

f. Field target firing.

Section II. RANGE DETERMINATION

214. IMPORTANCE

Range determination is the method of findingout how far it is from your position to anotherposition such as an enemy target. It is importantthat you know how to determine ranges accurate-ly. Then you will be able to set your sights cor-rectly and place effective fire on enemy targets;you will be able to locate targets quickly fromyour leader's commands and you will be ableto designate accurately the targets which youhave located.

331

215. METHODS

In the field you will use two methods of deter-mining ranges-

a. Estimation by eye.b. Observation of the strike of tracer or ball

ammunition.

216. ESTIMATION BY EYE

You will use this method most frequently indetermining ranges. There are two ways to esti-mate ranges by eye-the mental unit of measure(yardstick) and the appearance of objects. Youneed training and practice in both methods overvaried terrain and under varied conditions oflight and weather.

a. Mental Unit of Measure (Yard-stick).(1) You can picture in your mind short units

of measure such as an inch, a foot, or ayard. But can you picture 100 yards?Think of the distance from goal to goalon a football field (100 yards). Alsothink of the distances on the 100-, 200-,and 300-yard rifle ranges. With thesemental yardsticks, try to estimate dis-tances on your drill field, on city streets,or across open country. When you havemade your estimate, check yourself bystepping off the distance to the estimatedpoint-120 normal steps is about 100yards. This is a good game you can playalone while you are hiking. With prac-tice you will soon learn to estimate 100yards quite accurately (fig. 104).

332

(2) After you learn to estimate 100 yardsaccurately, apply your mental yardstickto 200, 300, and then to 500 yards. Dis-

RANGES UP TO 00o YDS AREDETERMINED BY APPLYING A

100 YD UNIT OF MEASURE.

THIS ESTIMATE BY TWO.

/j,'

HALFWAY POINT

Figure 104. ~Applying the 100-yard unit of measurein estimating ranges by eye.

333

tances beyond 500 yards can be meas-ured more accurately by selecting a half-.way point. Estimate the distance to thishalf-way point; then double it.

b. Appearance of Objects.(1) When there are hills, woods, or other ob-

stacles between you and the target wheremost of the ground is hidden from view,it is impractical to apply the 100-yardmental yardstick with accuracy. In suchcases you may use another type of yard-stick; that is, how an object looks to youat 100 yards and at greater distances.For example, watch a man when he isstanding 100 yards away from you. Fixhis appearance firmly in your mind: hissize and the details of his features andequipment. Watch him in the kneelingposition, then in the prone position. Bycomparing the appearance of a man inseveral positions at 100, 200, 300, 400,and 500 yards you can establish a seriesof mental pictures that will give youanother mental yardstick. You will findthat, as the distance increases, a man'sfigure becomes smaller. His outline be-comes increasingly blurred and his otherfeatures gradually fade out.

(2) In the same way, the appearance ofother familiar objects can be appliedas a mental yardstick.

c. Factors Affecting Range Estimation byEye. Once you have established the principles of

334

o o '9 * , °'- 0 EiC 1 Ca~a .4 Z

.4 M d 0 0 4 , o

-9 o -F C c e o 0 0 0 >

tzo

0- 0' ~1- C Ca 0

0-. C cOPa

>~C) 0. 0

0 o- "-' O .3

i9 .,~ o 3

o' 9 0 o + 0 0

.004 to44-40C35"" omE-~~~~1~0 0 .-4-s~~~~~~ ~~~~~~4 ~~~~~ca

~~~0 ~ 3

estimating ranges by eye, you will find it neces-sary to make allowances for variables like light,weather, and the terrain. Your understanding ofthe factors shown in table II will help to makeyour estimates more accurate.

d. In Training, Several Men Should Work To-gether. When there are differences in estimates,you should determine the reasons for the differ-ences. By adding the estimates of several mentogether and dividing the result by the numberof men, the average obtained will be more ac-curate than a single estimate. Even in combatwhen time and circumstances permit, averageestimates should be obtained.

217. OBSERVATION OF FIRE

Accurate range determination can be madeby observing the strike of tracer or ball ammuni-tion. This method can be used if your presenceis known to the enemy or if surprise is not im-portant. An observer is necessary because it isdifficult for a firer to follow his own tracer -andpick up the strike 'of his own shot. The proce-dure follows:

a. The firer estimates the range by eye, setsthe rear sight of his rifle for that range, and fires.

b. The observer follows the path of the traceror picks up the strike of the bullet.

c. The observer gives the firer the correctionfor the sight setting (up or down) in clicks ofelevation necessary to hit the point.of aim (tar-get).

336

d. The firer makes the sight change and con-tinues to fire and make corrections until a hit onthe target is, observed.

e. The final sight setting to hit the target(with consideration to the zero of the rifle) indi-cates the range to the target. The firer announcesthe range by voice or signal.

Section III. RIFLE AND AUTOMATIC RIFLE FIREAND ITS EFFECT

218. GENERAL

The second step in the technique of rifle firetraining is rifle and automatic rifle fire and itseffect. A knowledge of what the bullet does whileit is in flight and an understanding of the effectsof your fire on the enemy help you to use yourrifle so that its fire is most effective. A study ofthe terms, principles, and illustrations given inthis section will enable you to understand how touse your rifle to the best advantage in combat.

219. TRAJECTORY

a. Trajectory is the path of a bullet in itsflight through the air. The bullet of M2 armor-piercing ammunition leaves the muzzle of yourrifle at 2800 feet per second (muzzle velocity).At this great speed, the trajectory is almost flatat short ranges. However, as the range increases,the height of the trajectory increases (fig. 105).

b. The space between the rifle and the target,in which the trajectory does not rise above a manof average height, is called the danger space (fig.

337

8~~~a

00. I~wU WO~~~~~~O

0 .. I

· w--- [

.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.

~~~~~o in ,.,0

a

z

o Z to 0 ,

0 o

0

w~ ~ ~ ~~I W d~~~~~8 a

0 D C) -

w 0 8~u0C) 00~

o~~-o

U.0 * U. ~0 L

a - 0 I

0 w I

'1 ai z

x w cJ

:;' o~~~~IA

a~li')W 4

338

105). A bullet fired from the rifle or automaticrifle at ground level (prone position) and at atarget 750 yards away will not rise more than68 inches above the ground, providing the groundis level or slopes uniformly. A man of averageheight standing on the gun-target line would behit by the bullet; therefore, the entire 750 yardsis danger space. At ranges greater than 750yards, only parts of the space between the gunand the target will be danger space because thetrajectory' of the bullet will rise above the headof a man of average height.

220. CONE OF FIRE

Each bullet fired from the M1 rifle or the auto-matic rifle follows a slightly different path ortrajectory through the air. The small differencesin trajectories are caused by slight variations inaiming, holding, squeezing, the powder charges,or the wind and atmosphere. As the bullets leavethe muzzle of the weapon, their trajectories forma cone shaped figure known as the cone of fire(fig. 106).

221. BEATEN ZONE

The area on the ground in which the bullets ofthe cone of fire strike is called the beaten zone.The cone of fire striking a horizontal targetforms a beaten zone which is long and narrowin shape. Because of the variation in the degreeof flatness of trajectories at different ranges, thebeaten zones on horizontal targets vary in lengthfrom 100 yards at long ranges to 400 yards at

339

Figure 106. The cone of fire.

short ranges. The slope of the ground affects thesize and shape of the beaten zone. Rising groundshortens the beaten zone; ground sloping down-ward at an angle less than the curve of the tra-jectories lengthens it. Ground that falls off atan angle greater than the fall of the bullets willnot be hit and is said to be in defilade.

222. CLASSES OF FIRE

Rifle and automatic rifle fire is classified bothwith respect to the target (direction) and withrespect to the ground.

a. Fire with respect to the target (fig. 107)is-

(1) Frontal fire when it is delivered at right.angles to the front of a target.

(2) Flanking fire when it is delivered againstthe flank of a target.

(3) Oblique fire when it is delivered so thatthe long axis of the beaten zone is at anoblique to the long axis of the target.

(4) Enfilade fire when it is-delivered so thatthe long axis of the beaten zone coin-

340

FLAN KING aENFILADE

FRONTALONLY

% BLIQUE

Figure 107. Classes of fire with respect to the target(direction).

cides or nearly coincides with the longaxis of the target. Enfilade fire may beeither flanking or frontal.

b. Fire with respect to the ground is-

(1) Grazing when the bullets do not riseabove the height of a man standing.Rifle and automatic rifle fire from theprone position may provide grazing fireat ranges up to 750 yards over level oruniformly sloping ground.

(2) Plunging when the bullets strike theground at a high angle, so that the dan-ger space is practically confined to thebeaten zone and the length of the beatenzone is materially shortened (fig. 108).Fire at longer ranges becomes increas-

341

\ ??,i' \'~t ~"/'3,?/ :

\ ';,: ~~~1// .:1,.'I· '1 ~, ,~ I

il / , /'

\?kr: ~ W' . " ;T ,,l !~~~si~

342f,) \ .

ill ~~~~~~~~~~cl

~IR

I t

~d

ft~~~~~r I'4~~~~~'

342 ;

ingly plunging because the angle of fallof the bullets becomes greater. Firefrom high ground to a target on lowground may be plunging fire. Firinginto abruptly rising ground will re-sult in plunging fire at the point of im-pact.

(3) Overhead when it is delivered over theheads of friendly troops. Rifle and auto-matic rifle fire is considered safe whenthe ground offers protection to thefriendly troops to the front or if theyare in position at a sufficient distancebelow the line of fire. Its use in any par-ticular case depends on necessity andgood judgment.

223. EFFECT OF RIFLE AND AUTOMATIC RIFLE FIRE

a. The most decisive results from rifle andautomatic rifle fire are obtained when yoursquad is close to the enemy. Your unit will usecover and concealment offered by the terrain andwill take advantage of the supporting fires ofmachine guns, mortars, and artillery to advanceas near to the enemy as possible before openingfire. Normally, you should not open fire at rangesgreater than 500 yards, which is the maximumeffective range of your rifle.

b. Under favorable conditions, the automaticrifle may be used against enemy groups or enemyareas at ranges between 500 yards and 1,000yards.

343

c. The automatic rifle can be used effectivelyagainst a sniper concealed in a tree by firing asustained burst, sweeping up and down the tree.

d. The fire of the rifle squad can be effectiveagainst appropriate vehicle and aerial targetsas discussed in paragraph 204-212.

e. Enemy positions are likely to be. concealedand difficult to locate exactly. However, the areain which the enemy is located can usually be de-termined by the sound of his firing. Men maydistribute continuous fire in width and depth tocover an entire area, causing the enemy to keephis head down and making his fire ineffective.When covering an area by fire, each riflemanshould aim each shot at a likely firing position:a bush, a rock, a stump, a patch of grass, or a foldin the ground.

f. Ricochets are effective if they strike a manshortly after glancing from the ground. There-fore, if there is a question whether to fire shortof the target or over it, fire short.

Section IV. 'FIRE COMMANDS

224. IMPORTANCE AND PURPOSE

To be effective, the collective fire of your squadmust neutralize the enemy's fire. Enemy troopswill be trained in the use of cover and conceal-ment. Therefore, your targets will be indistinct,rarely exposed, and often invisible to the nakedeye. When a target is discovered, leaders andsquad members must clearly define its locationand nature. Squad members must be trained to

344

identify the target area quickly and accuratelyand to place a heavy volume of fire on it eventhough no enemy personnel are visible. A smallpoint target like an enemy sniper might be as-signed to only one or two riflemen, while a targetof considerable width like an enemy skirmishline requires the combined fire of the entiresquad. The rifle squad leader, having made adecision to fire on a target, gives certain instruc-tions as to how the target is to be engaged. Theseinstructions form the fire command by which hedirects and controls the fire of his squad.

225. ELEMENTS

A fire command contains six basic elementsthat are always announced or implied. Fire com-mands for all weapons follow a similar order andinclude similar elements. Only essential elementsare included. The six elements are-

Alert.Direction.Target description.Range.Target assignment.Fire control.

a. Alert. This element brings the unit to astate of readiness to receive further information.It may also tell who is to fire. Usually it is thecommand SQUAD; it may be the command ARor RIFLEMEN. However, the leader may alertonly a few individuals by calling to them by nameor by number.

345

6,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~5

\w.34&

(~~~

2

,-q *, II~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I

cl~~~~~~~~~~~~4

346

346~~~~~~~~0

b. Direction.(1) The direction element tells you which

way to look to see the target. This maybe given in one, or in a combination, ofthe following ways:

(a) Orally. General directions to the tar-get may be given orally and shouldtell the relationship between the tar-get and the unit as it is deployed. Fig-ure 109 shows the general directionswhich may be expressed as FRONT,RIGHT FRONT, LEFT FRONT,RIGHT FLANK, LEFT FLANK,RIGHT REAR, LEFT REAR, REAR.

(b) Pointing. Direction may be shown bypointing with the arm or the rifle.When you desire to show directionsto individuals, the following methodsmay be used:

1. Use the arm to point toward the tar-get so that a rifleman standing behindyou can look over your shoulder andalong your arm and index finger toestablish a correct line of sight.

2. To use the rifle to point, put it toyour shoulder, cant it to the right,and aim at the target. Move yourhead to the left without disturbingthe rifle so that the men to the rearcan move up and look through therear sight to observe the same sightpicture and locate the target.

3. Time permitting, use a rifle rest. A

347

bayonet stuck into the ground at anangle, a log, or a tree crotch willkeep the rifle in place. Once sightedon the target, a number of men cantake position behind the weapon andlocate the target. The automatic riflewith its bipod can be effectively usedin this manner.

4. Tracer ammunition is a quick andsure method of indicating the direc-tion to an indistinct target and ismost accurate for pinpointing theflanks of an obscure linear target.When possible, the general directionis given orally to direct the squad'sattention to the desired area, forexample,

FRONT-WATCH MYTRACER(fire 1st round)-RIGHTFLANK(fire 2d round)-LEFT FLANK

Firing tracer ammunition to desig-nate targets has limitations. It maydisclose your position, and in anyevent, will make known your presenceand lessen the surprise effect of asudden burst of fire on the enemyposition.

(2) Reference points.(a) To help the member of the squad locate

invisible or indistinct targets, the

348

squad leader may use reference pointsto give the direction to the target. Heselects a reference point that is nearthe target and one which is easy torecognize.

Example--Bridge, stone house,church steeple, windmill.

(b) Terrain features may also be used asreference points. You should be fa-miliar with the names of common ter-rain features such as--crossroads,road junction, road fork, cut, fill, draw,ravine, bluff, hill, ridge crest, militarycrest, skyline. (FM 21-25.)

(c) When using a reference point, use theword REFERENCE in describing thereference point and the word TAR-GET in describing the tArget. This isdone to show the difference betweenthe two objects. Example-

FRONTREFERENCE: BUSHY PINE

IN DRAWTARGET: SNIPER IN

FIRST BUSHTO THERIGHT

LEFT FRONTREFERENCE: MOUND OF

DIRT INBARNYARDAT A LESS-ER RANGE

349

TARGET: MACHINEGUN

FRONTREFERENCE: ROAD JUNC-

TION; TOTHE RIGHTOF ROADJUNCTION,CORNER OFORCHARD

TARGET: MACHINEGUN.

(d) In using a reference point always givethe direction to the reference pointand the range to the target.

(e) Sometimes a target can best be locatedby using successive reference points.For example-

LEFT FRONTREFERENCE: STONE HOUSE.

RIGHT OFSTONEHOUSE,SMALLBARN.

TARGET: MACHINEGUN INFIRST HAY-STACKRIGHT OFBARN

(3) Finger Measurement.(a) Distances across your front, known as

lateral distances, are difficult to esti-

350

mate in terms of feet or *yards. Tomeasure the distance right or left ofa reference point to a target or tomeasure the width of a target fromone flank to another, finger measure-ments may be used.

(b) The method of using finger measure-ments is as follows:

1. Hold your hand at arms length, palmto the rear, index finger pointing up-ward.

2. Close one eye.3. Sight along the sides of the finger so

that one edge is on the referencepoint or starting point. Note wherethe sight over the other side of thefinger strikes the ground or target.This is the measurement for onefinger.

4. For two-finger measurement, hold upthe index and middle finger. Forthree-finger measurement, hold upthree fingers, etc.

(c) Examples of use of finger measure-ments--

REFERENCE: LONE PINETREE RIGHTONE FINGER

TARGET: MAC HI N EGUN INSMALLBUSH

351

REFERENCE: CROSS ROADTARGET: L I N E O F

RIFLEMENEXTEND-ING FROMCROSSROADRIGHTTHREEFINGERS

c. Target Description. The third element ofthe fire command is a brief and accurate descrip-tion of the target. You may have a target thatextends in depth, or you may have a point, linear,oblique target. Examples of such target descrip-tions are-SNIPER, MACHINE GUN, LINE OFRIFLEMEN, COLUMN OF RIFLEMEN,TRUCK, MORTAR POSITION.

d. Range. Range, given in yards, tells you howfar to look to see the target. It also gives you theinformation you need to set your sight or toadjust your point of aim with the battle sight.The word RANGE will not be used; it is ex-pressed merely as ONE SEVEN FIVE, TWOFIVE ZERO, or THREE HUNDRED.

e. Target Assignment. The assignment elementtells who is to fire on the target. Frequently, thewho has been announced in the alert element. Ifthis is the case, the target assignment elementwill be omitted. It is not necessary to repeat in-formation already announced. When the leaderintends to alert the entire squad, but plans to useonly part of the squad's fire on a target, the tar-get assignment element is included. Examples of

352

target assignments-RIFLEMEN; AR; JONESAND SMITH; or NOS. 3 AND 4.

f. Fire Control. The fire control element con-sists of a command or signal to open fire. If sur-prise fire is not required, the command COM-MENCE FIRING normally is given without apause as the last element of the fire command.If the leader wants all his weapons to open fireat once in order to obtain the maximum surpriseand shock effect, he prefaces the command orsignal to commence firing by the words, AT MYCOMMAND or AT MY SIGNAL. When all themen are ready, the leader gives the command orsignal: COMMENCE FIRING. Examples-AR,ONE MAGAZINE, COMMENCE FIRING; AR,ONE MAGAZINE, SHORT BURSTS, COM-MENCE FIRING; SQUAD, ONE CLIP, AT MYSIGNAL-(Signal, COMMENCE FIRING).

226. SIGNALS

Since oral commands are likely to be difficultto be heard on the battlefield, it is essential thatthe squad fully understand all appropriate sig-nals. These signals must be used constantly intraining. Improvised signals may be arrangedfor use under special situations. Signals applic-able to fire commands are described in FM 7-10.

227. EXAMPLES

Examples of complete fire commands follow:a. In this example, the leader desires to place

the fire of his entire squad on an easily recognizedtarget.

353

SQUADFRONTTROOPS

FOUR HUNDREDCOMMENCE FIRING

b. In this example the leader desires to desig-nate the target to his entire squad, but wants onlythe automatic rifle team to engage it. Becausethe target is indistinct, he uses a reference point.

SQUADFRONT

REFERENCE: RED BARN, RIGHT TWOFINGERS

TARGET: MACHINE GUNFOUR FIVE ZERO

ARCOMMENCE FIRING

c. In this example it is assumed that the squadis engaging a target and the squad leader desiresto shift the fire of his riflemen to a new target.He does not interrupt the firing of the AR team.

RIFLEMENLEFT FLANK

REFERENCE: ROAD JUNCTIONTARGET: RIFLEMEN; EXTENDING

RIGHT THREE FINGERSTHREE FIVE ZEROCOMMENCE FIRING

354

Section V. APPLICATION OF FIRE BY THERIFLE SQUAD

228. ORGANIZATION OF RIFLE SQUAD

a. The rifle squad consists of a squad leader,No. 1; five riflemen, Nos. 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6; anautomatic rifleman, No. 7; an assistant automaticrifleman, No. 8; and an assistant squad leader,No. 9. The automatic rifleman and his assistant,Nos. 7 and 8, are referred to as the AR team.

b. The squad leader is responsible for the dis-cipline, training, control, and conduct of hissquad. His squad is trained to use and care forits weapons and equipment, to move and fightefficiently as individuals, and to function effec-tively as part of the fighting team.

c. The assistant squad leader performs dutiesassigned by the squad leader and takes commandof the squad in his absence. The assistant squadleader usually controls the automatic rifle team.

229. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT

a. Application of Fire for the Attack. Thesquad has two general means of action-fire andmovement. Fire, movement, assault fire, andclose-in fighting are combined in the attack bythe squad. The squad and smaller groups mustbe trained to place a large volume of accuratefire upon visible enemy targets, probable enemylocations, and indistinct or concealed targets suchas enemy machine guns or small groups of enemysoldiers. The squad and smaller groups must betrained to apply fire quickly on the order orsignal of its leader and, in appropriate circum-

355

stances, to apply it without an order. The squadleader's primary job during a fire fight is to placeeffective fire of his squad on the target. In doingthis, he keeps in mind the fire power of the auto-matic rifle team which he uses to place auto-matic fire on suitable enemy targets such as sur-prise targets, crew served weapons, or automaticweapons and to support the advance of the othermembers of his squad. He selects positions forthe automatic rifleman from which he can delivereffective fire on any target holding up the re-mainder of the squad and from which the auto-matic rifle can fire across the entire squad front.He usually selects a position with the best fieldof fire; however, tactical or terrain considerationsmay require that fields of fire be given secondaryconsideration.

b. Application of Fire for the Defense. In thedefense, the fire of a small rifle unit such as asquad is delivered by small groups and individualsfrom positions which they must hold. Each sol-dier's firing position is selected so that he has agood field of fire. and can take advantage ofcover and concealment. The rifle unit can alsobe used to place grazing fire along predeterminedlines to stop an assault. These lines are calledfinal protective lines (FPL). In defensive situa-tions, the possibility of such use should be con-sidered in selecting positions for the riflemen.

c. Application of Fire by the Automatic RifleTeam.

(1) The automatic rifleman and his assistantwork together as a team and alternate

356

duties during training so that eachknows all the duties of the other.

(2) The automatic rifleman performs thefollowing duties during a fire fight:

(a) Receives orders from his squad leaderor the assistant squad leader.

(b) Takes position and fires on designatedtargets and other targets that presentthemselves.

(c) Watches for ways to help the advanceof the squad by the use of the fire-power of his weapon.

(3) The assistant automatic rifleman per-forms the following duties during a firefight:

(a) Selects a position where he can assistthe automatic rifleman.

(b) Aids the automatic rifleman in adjust-ing his fire on the target.

(c) Transmits orders or signals from thesquad leader or assistant squad leaderto the automatic rifleman.

(d) Watches for new targets.(e) Helps the automatic rifleman to re-

duce stoppages.(f) Replaces the automatic rifleman if he

becomes a casualty.(g) Helps to carry ammunition for the

automatic rifle.(h) Participates in the fire fight with his

rifle when necessary.

357

230. METHODS OF APPLYING SQUAD FIRE

a. In combat, the size and nature of a targetmay call for the fire power of the entire squador only certain parts of it or of the entire platoon.Fire may be directed at a point or distributedalong a line or over an area.

b. Concentrated fire is a term applied to aheavy volume of fire directed at a single point.It is used for knocking out machine guns, otherautomatic weapons, or enemy concentrations.

c. Distributed fire is a term applied to firedistributed in width so that a wide target canbe effectively covered. The rifle squad uses thefollowing method of fire distribution:

(1) Each rifleman fires his first shot on thatportion of the target corresponding gen-erally to his position in the squad (orplatoon, if the platoon fires as a unit).He then distributes his remaining shotsto the right and left of his first shot,covering that part of the target wherehe can deliver accurate fire withoutchanging his position. The portion ofthe target which each rifleman can coverwill depend on the range to the targetand on his firing position. In some cases,each rifleman will be able to cover theentire target with accurate fire. Fire isnot limited to points known to containan enemy, but is also directed to pointswhich may hide an enemy, a bush,around a tree, a fold in the ground. Theflank riflemen are taught to fire beyond

358

the flanks of the target as designated toinsure that both flanks are covered orthat the fires of more than one squadoverlap. Fire is distributed in this waywithout command (fig. 110).

(2) The automatic rifleman distributes hisfire over the entire target area, or onany specific target where his fire willbest support the advance of the squad.

(3) Should other targets appear while thesquad (or platoon) is employing thismethod of fire distribution, the squad(or platoon) leader announces necessarychanges in the target assignment.

d. Area fire is fire that is distributed in depthas well as width. It is effective in smothering andneutralizing an area. In area fire, each riflemandistributes his fire laterally in the same manneras in distributed fire. In addition, he must dis-tribute his fire in depth. The automatic rifle-man distributes his fire at likely targets over

*the entire area (fig. 111).

e. Assault fire is the violent and heavy fire byassault elements as they close on the enemy atclose range. Its purpose is not only to kill orwound the enemy but also to terrify and demoral-ize him. It keeps the enemy deep in his hole wherethe shock effect of the supporting fires put him-hugging the ground with his weapon idle-or itforces him into a .hurried and disorderly retreat.When assaulting troops reach the assault posi-tion, usually from 100 to 150 yards, they are de-ployed as skirmishers and advance at a rapid walk

359

·360T - - I

g C .4

III

I i /i~

( IH- Ii- 4 & N I Y.

a t4

36X)I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Z

R ~~~~~~~~ZWto

bi.~~~~~~~~~~~~~6

toward the objective. The riflemen, with bayonetsfixed, deliver a heavy volume of fire, firing everytwo or three steps from either the shoulder orhip. The automatic rifleman carries the auto-matic rifle slung over his left shoulder and de-livers fire from the hip or crouch position. Theassistant automatic rifleman does not fire butassists the automatic rifleman. The squad leaderand assistant squad leader seldom: fire but takepositions in rear of the squad to enforce the con-tinuity of fires and to control the alinement ofthe men..

231. RATE OF FIRE

The maximum rate at which any riflemanshould fire the M1 rifle is determined by his abil-ity to align the sights and squeeze off accurateshots. To exceed this rate is a waste of ammuni-tion. The first few rounds, particularly in thecase of surprise fire, should be delivered at themaximum rate in order to pin the enemy to theground. Thereafter, it should be slowed downto a rate which is just sufficient to maintain firesuperiority. This conserves ammunition and al-lows for adjustment of the fire by the squadleader.

232. FIRE DISCIPLINE

a. Fire discipline is the efficiency with whichtroops deliver effective fire on designated targetsat the commands of their leader. Fire disciplinein the rifle squad is achieved through training inthe use of weapons and the exact execution of

362

orders. It requires skill in sight setting, aiming,and trigger squeeze, and close attention to thesquad leader and assistant squad leader for sig-nals or orders. Training in fire discipline can-not be completed during the brief period devotedto technique of fire; it starts with the soldier'sfirst drill and continues throughout his militarycareer.

b. Fire discipline also includes the correct re-sponse of each member of a unit to emergenciesand surprise targets. If the leader becomes acasualty, it is essential that one of the group as-sume leadership and carry out the assigned mis-sion or that-he attach the group to the nearestorganized unit. A soldier separated from hissquad fights on his own initiative only when hehas reason to believe that his singlehanded effortwill accomplish some important result; otherwise,he reports to the nearest leader at once. Thistype of discipline is the result of interchangingsquad positions and responsibilities during train-ing.

233. FIRE CONTROL

a. Fire control is the name applied to all oper-ations connected with the planning, preparation,and actual application of fire on a target. Thedegree of fire control exercised may vary fromcarefully thought out plans and arrangements toa simple signal by the squad (or platoon) leader.The assistant squad leader assists the squad leaderin maintaining control.

b. During a fire fight, a squad leader takes a

363

position where he can best control his squad. Attimes the squad leader moves from man to manand personally directs each man's fire to makesure that everyone is firing on the correct target.On orders from his platoon leader, or on his owninitiative, he shifts the fire of all or part of hissquad to new targets.

c. The irregular formations used for an ad-vance will make control by the squad leader diffi-cult at times. Under these conditions, fire mustbe opened and maintained on the initiative of in-dividual riflemen as circumstances require. How-ever, the squad leader should seek to gain fullcontrol of the fire of his men at the first oppor-tunity.

d. When the platoon is used as the fire unit,the method of fire distribution is basically thesame as that used by the squad. The platoonobjective (target) is broken down into areas ofsquad responsibility. The fire of the weaponssquad of the platoon is used in much the samemanner as the fire of the AR team is used withinthe rifle squad in that its fire is used to cover allof the platoon target area. The platoon leadercontrols the fire of the platoon by signals to ordirect contact with the squad leaders.

234. LOW VISIBILITY FIRING

a. During night or periods of low visibility andwhen there is a shortage of automatic weapons,the rifle can be used to deliver fixed grazing fireby using rests for the rifle.

364

b. When the rifle is to be used for this pur-pose, the following must be done in daylight.

(1) Rests are made from any material avail-able for the front hand guard and stockat a point immediately in front of thetrigger guard (fig. 112).

(2) The rifle is placed on the rests andzeroed to hit the desired point. Therests are adjusted so that when the rifleis placed in them it will be pointing inthe desired direction and will hold therifle at the desired elevation.

c. To fire from the rest, the rifleman placeshis rifle on the rest and takes a prone positionwith his right shoulder firmly against the butt,his left hand pressing down firmly on the fronthand guard, his right hand at the small of thestock. He can deliver fire along the final protec-tive line or at the point target as rapidly as hecan manipulate the trigger. He must hold therifle in the rest in the exact position in which itwas held when it was sighted in.

d. By using additional notched stakes, thefirer can sight his rifle for use against more thanonq point (fig. 113).

e. The automatic rifle can be used in a sim-ilar manner by use of the bipod and a rest forthe trigger guard.

f. For training purposes, firing should bedone at night or the rifleman should be blind-folded. This gives him practice in handling therifle by feel rather than by sight.

365

;...i,.- -,. ,C3

i . ,~ ' . As

:~ i33: 6i .i6

.E .a

~~~~~~366~g

'~_~'~ ~ ~ ~ '.'1,,, [,dI:I~ ,~ir.-~;L. :~~,~r' ~' ~

366~~O~~l·.

X i

I·

i,; , Ae

'.

h~ ', '4 ' *, t,, t: ·

Section VI. LANDSCAPE TARGET FIRING

235. SCOPE AND ADVANTAGES

a. Landscape target firing is conducted on a1,000-inch range, firing at panels which containa picture of a landscape as it might appear to asquad in combat.

b. After you have been trained in the firstfour steps of the technique of rifle fire, you areready for training in landscape target firing.

c. Some advantages of landscape target firingare-

(1) It permits close supervision of all mem-bers of the firing unit.

(2) It clearly and quickly demonstrates theapplication and effect of fire.

(3) Advantageous training can be accom-plished in a limited area and without theneed of personnel to operate targets,telephones, etc.

(4) It can be conducted indoors when lackof outdoor facilities or when weatherconditions make this desirable.

d. Landscape target firing should not be con-sidered a substitute for field target firing butrather a step before and in preparation for field-target firing. Before engaging in field target fir-ing, each squad should receive training in land-scape target firing.

236. DESCRIPTION OF LANDSCAPE TARGETa. General. A landscape target, which is a

panoramic picture of a landscape, is drawn so

368

_ = >

'I~~~ glb · U i6

----i· '- '1·-- ~I -;.

r~~~~~~~r

369

that all or nearly all of the features are recog-nizable at a distance of 1,000 inches. The stand-ard-target is the series A target of five sheets inblack and white.

b. Range Indicators. To designate the targets,assumed ranges are used on landscape targets.Small cards painted with appropriate numbersrepresenting yards of range are tacked along oneor both edges of a series of panels (fig. 114). Thefirer must remember that the range announcedis a simulated range designation and that thezero sight setting on his rifle must not be changed.

c. Direction Indicators. To provide the direc-tion element in oral fire commands, small cardson which are painted "front," "right front," "leftfront," "right flank," "left flank" are tackedabove the appropriate panels of the landscapeseries (fig. 114).

237. WEAPONS TO BE USED

Indoor firing at landscape targets should beconducted with caliber .22 rifles. The M1 rifle,the automatic rifle, or the caliber .22 rifle may beused on an outdoor range.

238. ZEROING OF RIFLES

a. Rifles used in landscape target firing exer-cises are zeroed for 1,000 inches. A blank targetwith a row of eight 1-inch-square black pastersis used for this purpose. The black pasters areplaced 6 inches from, and parallel to, the bottomof the blank panel (fig. 114). Beneath the zero-

370

ing panel are numbers which correspond to thefirers' positions on the firing line (9-7-8-5-3-2-4-6, indicating a squad deployed with the ARteam to the left). Other types of deployment maybe used.

b. The procedure follows:(1) Rifle sights are blacked.(2) The squad is deployed on the firing line

in the same order that the numbers ap-pear on the zero panel; the squad leadertakes his position behind the squad.

(3) The instructor requires each riflemanto set his sights at 200 yards elevationand zero windage, or at zero elevationand zero windage for the caliber .22rifles. The sight setting for the auto-matic rifle is minimum elevation andzero windage.

(4) For an aiming point, each man is as-signed a 'spotter.

(5) Three rounds are issued to each man onthe firing point. These rounds are loadedand fired singly, at the command of theinstructor, or are loaded as a partialclip of three rounds (par. 39).

(6) At the command THREE ROUNDS,COMMENCE FIRING, each man firesthree shots at his paster.

(7) The instructor commands - CEASEFIRING, UNLOAD, CLEAR RIFLES.The squad leader checks to see that therifles are clear (par. 42).

(8) The instructor and the squad leader in-

371

spect the target and, judging from thelocation of the center of impact of theshot group, give each man the necessarycorrection for his next shot. They givethe correction in terms of clicks. At1,000 inches, one click of windage orelevation will move the strike of thebullet one-fourth inch.

(9) The firing continues as outlined aboveuntil each rifle is zeroed. The firing ofthree shot groups should be sufficient todetermine the zero.

239. SCORING AND SCORING DEVICES

a. Point Targets.(1) A suitable template for scoring point

targets can be constructed from cellu-loid, cardboard, or similar material.. Theinner rectangle of the template shouldbe 21/2 inches high by 2 inches wide,while the outer rectangle should be 5inches high by 4 inches wide. The tem-plate is shown in the insert -on figure115. (It has been found that in firingat a point target at a range of 1,000inches, 75 percent of the rounds firedwill normally hit this target in an areathat can be covered by a 4-inch x 5-inchrectangle. At the same time, it wasfound that 50 percent of the total roundswill hit in an area that can' be coveredby a 2-inch x 21/½-inch rectangle.) Theinner rectangular area is known as the

372

50 percent zone. The outer rectangulararea is known as the 75 percent zone.Each hit in the 50 percent zone counts2 points. Each hit in the 75 percent zonecounts 1 point. Hits cutting or touch-ing the line count where they have themost value.

(2) The template is placed on the panel withthe center of the target exactly centeredwithin the 50 percent zone, and the scor-ing space is then lightly outlined in pen-cil. Do not make the marks plain enoughto be seen from the firing point. Mark-ing is done before the problems are firedto avoid any tendency to place the tem-plate on the shot group so as to receivethe maximum score (fig. 115).

(3) All problems are fired on the basis of 50rounds per problem. Possible score forany problem is 100. One point targetmay be designated for the AR team (25rounds) and a separate point target forthe rifleman (25 rounds).

b. Linear Targets.(1) .The template for scoring linear targets

can also be constructed of material sim-ilar to that recommended for the pointtarget template. Here, as with pointtargets, the template outline should bedrawn in very lightly before the prob-lem is fired. The insert on figure 116shows a drawing of the template out-line. The 50 percent zone consists of

373

V~~~~~~~~~~~ -

f ~~~~ a ~

· ' ~. ,- .....~~~~~~~~.., ,.. .

l.?\ *'1/Y, ?

"

~~ ~ ~ ~ · , ,:' , "

..,~, pi! L7 IX

LCrii~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~'~

374~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~s~

f.; ; II·

i, .9 ''P ':~

I, f 7

375

two lines drawn 21/2 inches apart paral-lel to the longer axis of the target. Twoadditional lines, similarly drawn 5 inchesapart above and below the 50 percentzone, constitute the 75 percent zone. Be-cause riflemen and automatic riflemenare taught to distribute their fire be-yond the known flanks of the enemy,the template is extended one inch be-yond each flank of the target to give ad-ditional scoring space for proper firedistribution. The entire area is dividedinto ten equal parts regardless of thelength of the target. These parts areknown as distribution spaces (fig. 116).

(2) Fifty rounds are fired per problem anda problem is scored as follows: Each hitin the 50 percent zone counts 2 points;each hit in the 75 percent zone counts 1point. The value of each fire distribu-tion space hit at least 3 times is 10points.

(a) No more than 5 hits in any fire dis-tribution space may be counted in thescore.

(b) The distribution score plus the scorefor hits divided by 2 is the score forthe problem. A total of 100 is a per-fect score.

240. PROCEDURE FOR CONDUCTING PROBLEMS

The following procedure is used for conductingfiring exercises:

376

a. All members of the squad except the squadleader face to the rear.

b. The instructor takes the squad leader to thepanels and points out the target to him. Theyreturn to the firing line; the squad leader takescharge of the squad and has the men resume theirfiring positions.

c. The squad leader gives the command LOAD,and then gives his complete oral fire command.For the first one or two problems it is advisablefor the squad leader to give his fire commandswithout having the rifles loaded. After givinghis fire command, the squad leader questions theindividual members of the squad as to where theyare going to aim their various shots. By doingthis the squad leader can find out if every mem-ber understands the fire command and the correctmethod of fire distribution.

d. The squad engages the target with fire.e. The squad leader commands CEASE FIR-

ING, UNLOAD, CLEAR RIFLES and checks tosee that all rifles are clear.

f. The squad leader holds a critique immedi-ately after each problem is fired. This score isrecorded and posted for comparison and competi-tion with the scores of other squads.

g. Suggested distribution of ammunition is asfollows:

(1) When the automatic rifle is used, fiverounds are issued to each member of thesquad except No. 7 who gets 15 rounds(3 magazines of five rounds each).

(2) When no automatic rifle is used, five

377

rounds are issued to each of the rifle-men, nine rounds to No. 7, eight roundseach to Nos. 8 and 9.

Section VII. FIELD TARGET FIRING

241. SCOPE OF TRAINING

The training in this phase is similar to thatwhich you received in landscape target firing butwith the added features of the use of cover andconcealment, range determination, firing the rifleand the automatic rifle with live ammunition atfield targets at unknown ranges, and fire controlunder more difficult conditions. Training must beprogressive. You will first be given an oppor-tunity to fire at targets that are more or less ex-posed, followed by fire at targets which are con-cealed from view but exposed to fire.

242. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

a. Progressive Training. Training in movingfrom an approach march formation or a coveredarea to firing positions is included under the fieldtarget firing phase of training for the followingpurposes:

(1) To teach the soldier the use of cover andconcealment and how to select firing posi-tions.

(2) To combine the technique of applyingand controlling collective fire with patrol-ling and other related subjects.

b. Firing Positions and Representation of theEnemy. In battle, no unit, friend or enemy, de-ploys with troops evenly abreast and at regular

378

intervals apart. The selection of individual andgroup positions is governed by the field of fire,cover or concealment while firing, covered routesof approach to those positions, fire, control, andthe nature of the target. Therefore, in field targettraining, squad (platoon) firing positions and tar-gets representing the enemy should conform toirregular battle formations.

c. Use of Cover.(1) The use of available cover is important

because the man who neglects the use ofcover will unnecessarily disclose his orhis squad's position.

(2) The individual use of cover and conceal-ment is taught in FM 21-75. The prin-ciples outlined in that manual should befollowed during training in firing at fieldtargets.

(3) In seeking covered and concealed firingpositions, you must avoid those placeswhich mask the fire of others or whereyour fire may be dangerous to other menof your unit. Also, if it is likely that theenemy will see you when you are movinginto position, seek a covered or concealedroute of approach which will permit youto fire from an undisclosed position.

d. Marksmanship Training Applied.(1) The principles of rifle and automatic rifle

marksmanship training are followed infield target firing.

(2) These principles should be applied in fir-ing at field targets and in combat in acommon sense way. It should be appre-

379

ciated that the conditions encountered incombat situations will differ from thosefound on the target range. In firing atfield targets and in battle, the soldiertakes advantage of trees, rocks, or anyother rest which will make his fire moreaccurate. The positions prescribed in riflemarksmanship training are used when-ever the ground will permit, but onrough ground it is often necessary tomodify them in order to get a comfort-able and steady position. To simulateactual battle conditions, some of the fir-ing should be conducted with bayonetsfixed' and with grenade launchers at-tached.

e. Use of the Battle Sight. The battle sight isa sight setting of 300 yards. It is used on targetsfrom 0 to 400 yards when you do not have timeto make sight changes. Normally, keep the 300-yard setting on your sight because you can useit for any combat firing emergency.

243. CONDUCT OF EXERCISES

Exercises for firing at field targets should besuitable to the actual terrain upon which they areconducted. They should be repeated until all menhave demonstrated their proficiency in firing.Some of the exercises should be fired with the gasmask adjusted. Hand and arm signals should beused frequently to control the action of the squadand for fire control.

380

a. Each exercise should be started when theunit (squad or platoon) is-

(1) Already deployed in a firing position; or(2) Halted in approach march formation or

in a place of concealment with its secur-ity element present in the formation, theunit either acting alone or as part of alarger force; or

(3) Advancing in approach march formationwith its own security.

b. Positions should be assumed as follows:(1) When the squads are halted with the

security element present, and when prac-ticable, squad leaders conduct theirsquads forward by covered and concealedroutes and send the riflemen and theautomatic rifleman to their firing posi-tions by individual routes. Each manmust try to occupy his firing positionwithout exposing himself.

(2) When the squad is advancing with thesecurity element out, the security elementis held up by either simulated or assumedenemy fire. The squad leader then de-ploys his squad in a suitable firing posi-tion on line with the security element.This will prevent having to withdrawthe security element before the squad canopen fire;

244.. CRITIQUE OF EXERCISES

On completion of each firing exercise, the in-structor conducts a critique. A suggested list of

381

items to be covered during the critique follows:a. Purpose of the problem.b. Orders of the squad leader.

(1) Instructions in preparation for action-check of equipment, ammunition, dutiesof individuals, and special instructions.

(2) Orders for the action.(3) Fire command (initial).(4) Fire commands (subsequent).

c. Approach and occupation of the firing posi-tion.

(1) Method.(2) Time taken (if time is a factor).(3) Deployment.

d. Actions of individuals.(1) Use of cover and concealment.(2) Attention to orders.(3) Looking to the leader for signals.(4) Individual initiative.

e. Rate of fire.(1) Initially rapid to pin the enemy to the

ground.(2) Controlled to conserve ammunition while

retaining maximum effective fire on theenemy.

f. Fire control.(1) Position.

(a) Initial position of the squad leader.(b) Initial- position of the assistant squad

leader.(c) Movement of leaders during firing.

(2) Methods used.

382

(a) Signals.(b) Oral orders.(c) Use of assistant squad leader.(d)- Time required to shift fire to new tar-

gets.(3) Distribution of fire.(4) Adjustment of fire.(5) Teamwork developed.

g. Effect of fire.(1) Were all targets fired on?(2) Were all targets hit?(3) Score.Note. Only those items are discussed which apply

to the exercise being critiqued.

245. TYPES OF EXERCISES

a. Exercise No. 1.(1) Purpose. Practice in fire commands,

application of the fire of a squad in posi-tion, fire control, and individual conceal-ment in the occupation of a firing posi-tion.

(2) Method. The enemy is represented byone group of targets exposed to fire butpartially concealed from view. The tar-gets are indicated to the squad leaderwho formulates and issues his fire com-mand. The members of the squad engagethe targets and cease fire on commandor signal from the squad leader.

b. Exercise No. 2.(1) Purpose. To give practice in deployment,

individual concealment in the occupation

383

of the firing position, issuance of firecommands, application of the fire of arifle squad on a linear target, fire con-trol, and engagement of a surprise tar-get.

(2) Method. Silhouette targets representinga deployed enemy squad are partiallyconcealed from view but exposed to fire.Initially, the squad is in a concealed posi-tion behind the firing positions. Thesquad leader (or a member of the secur-ity element) is shown the linear target.He then conducts the squad forward anddisposes it in a concealed firing position.The squad leader gives his oral fire com-mand and has the squad engage thetarget with fire. A surprise target rep-resenting an enemy machine gun appearsshortly after the squad has engaged thelinear target. The squad leader shiftsa part of his squad fire to this surprisetarget.

c. Exercise No. 3.(1) Purpose. To give practice in having a

target designated by the security ele-ment with tracer ammunition and to givepractice in approaching and assuming asquad firing position.

(2) Method. The squad is in the approachmarch with the security element wellforward. When the security elementreaches the firing position, they are firedon by an enemy group about 400 yards

384

to their front (burst of fire from a ma-chine gun in a pit near the targets).They determine the range by firing onthe target with tracers. The squad leaderdirects the remaining members of hissquad into- appropriate firing positions.The security element designates the tar-get with tracer ammunition and thesquad engages the target. When selectingand occupying their position, and whenmoving up, all men give special attentionto the use of cover and concealment.

246. ADDITIONAL EXERCISES

Suggested subject matter for additional prob-lems is listed below:

a. A situation to show the action of the secur-ity element, squad leader, and other members ofthe squad when the security element discovers agroup of the enemy without being seen them-selves.

b. A situation which requires the leader to usehis automatic rifle team while keeping his rifle-men under cover initially.

c. A situation which initially requires the useof either a part or all of the riflemen and which,later in the exercise, requires the use of the auto-matic rifle team against a surprise target.

247. RELATED TRAINING

Depending on the -availability of time, rangefacilities, and ammunition, field target firing exer-cises should be -extended to include tactical situa-

385

tions requiring actions and orders of platoon,squad, and assistant squad leaders. This type oftraining is referred to as combat training exer-cises. At the end of this training period; highercommanders conduct platoon combat proficiencytests to determine the proficiency of rifle platoons.

386

CHAPTER 6

ADVICE TO INSTRUCTORS

Section I. GENERAL

248. PURPOSE

The material contained in this chapter is ad-visory and should be considered as a guide only.It is not meant to limit your imagination, initia-tive, or the scope of your instruction.

249. ASSISTIANT INSTRUCTORS

Train in advance as many noncommissionedofficers and selected privates as are necessary tomeet your requirements for use as demonstratorsand assistant instructors. Rehearse these mencarefully in the duties they are to perform sothat when they present a demonstration it iscorrect in every detail and gives a clear pictureof the work under discussion.

250. SUBJECT SCHEDULES

To aid in the individual training phase, a sub-ject schedule for a course in rifle marksmanshiptraining is shown in paragraphs 254-255, 282,290, and 291. This schedule is based on the desir-able number of training hours for a rifle course.Use it as a guide in preparing lesson plans. Con-ditions may require a longer or shorter period tocomplete the training. When time is available,

387

more training should be added to the subjectschedule. This will help develop efficient and fullytrained riflemen. When suggested references,equipment, and training aids are not available,improvise or substitute the best that are avail-able. For men not assigned to a rifle unit, afamiliarization subject schedule with accompany-ing training notes is included in this chapter.All references in the training schedule, unlessotherwise noted, may be found in this manual.

251. TRAINING NOTES AND TRAINING PROGRAMS

a. To supplement the subject schedules and toprovide the detailed procedure to be followedfor each period, training notes are included. Dur-ing training, reinforce your lectures with demon-strations. Teach at a speed that enables the mento grasp clearly the material presented. Allotmost of the, training time to applying the prin-ciples brought out in the lectures and demon-strations. For this practical work, organize theunit into small groups and place an assistant in-structor in charge of each group.

b. The training program included in this sec-tion meets the requirements for training riflemenquickly and thoroughly in the basic essentials ofrifle marksmanship. Use this program as a guide.When additional, training hours are available, theprogram may be expanded to more adequatelytrain the soldiers. For training purposes, an houris considered to be 50 minutes except for rangefiring, when an hour is 60 minutes.

388

252. ALLOTMENT OF TRAINING HOURS FOR ARIFLE MARKSMANSHIP COURSE

a. Mechanical training ...................... 6 hoursb. Preparatory marksmanship train-

ing ........... - -........ .......... 24 hoursc. Range firing:

(1) Instruction firing, 1,000-inch.... 6 hours(2) Instruction firing, known-dis-

tance - ....................................... 16 hours(3) Record firing, known-distance.. 8 hours(4) Preliminary transition firing.. 6 hours(5) Transition instruction and rec-

ord firing .............. .................. 12 hours

Total .................. .................... 78 hours

253. ALLOTMENT OF TRAINING HOURS FOR AFAMILIARIZATION RIFLE MARKSMANSHIPCOURSE

a. Mechanical training ...................-... 2 hoursb. Preparatory marksmanship train-

ing ..........-............... ... 2 hoursc. Range firing .......................-............ 4 hours

Total .....................................- . 8 hours

389

~ h .g , xdZ~~~~~~~~~~~c 0

~' ~ ~~~~~~ 00 4 : '~ C

Eo ~o

,~3 : I:~~, "~,

bB M W

4A c i~d m m md

x L

.o ..,

v, r r co a, 'C m ol oItr- 6

c "u3*D 4 .

C4

390

. t ¢ m ¢ m ^ o

E ~_ ~=E. : t E .

~ o-.'5 , .t

-c E ,, & ~ ,,

'O om

0 C)C'

' ' V

S co

~- ~o- C

Cl

Cl CC Cl,

CC) a .C) p.-

a, ~ ~ ~ ~ C CI C) Q~ -I~C) C)C))

,'B ~~~~~~~~3 e ~~~~~~~~~~ $ Cd ~ ~ ~ ~ Q--C -o -eb h

O to~~~~~~~~~~~UO C a d U "3~~~~~~~~~~TagC)

"~~~~~~~~~~~~~o .- '~ '~ 4 r o

~ ~4 4m ~_.. ' E-4 . bj, 0 ~c

.~ .~ ~ ~:~-~~~~~~~~' .c ce bl)O

0 ~ 'jGo ~loZ

;14

bl Ce CS E

Ix bo~~

" ~~~~~~~~J

C~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C

'c _ C.S

n LO r

~.. r~I r-" ' c

392

-a O q C ,

8o M *ooE, * R Mi '

.

'IO C C 3,

C X nQ s rC

NOO oO

393

' E:

038 0a C .

_4 s ¢ .,

bD~~~~~~~~~~~~e ''

n 'B~~~~~~~~~~~9

a V C1

. i a E e

-o U)

_O > 7 O

3 z0 4 -C

'-" CI n T T

z r e

.9

_ ) E 0) t E

C C O

. : a , , a a

: ·a a· b o : 0 r.- , O u0

4 -4 CI CC . .. CC

- .,

394

0Y Ci o0

*-~ CC 0 ~4 s .9o

In -a - 1In CO = --

394~~ a

,O C~~o d ~0 d Z 0 C

d:°E o dSo~ e amO

C', gX; i m __ w

bc ; ' O oA

,~~~~~~~~~~~~~r C

ao _

'i>,9 a z r ,! @ ii a3 -a

"' I S , ga I s,rP 't :: a <; c, °o , rZ

u, 1 La L t r O _J n

_1 1

3~~~~~~~~~~~9

·' ~ ~~.~'~; ~PI ~

U1· h bDbm iCC ~ ~.~ ~ ~.i: e 1·· -~

" ~- a.=~ ~ ~~~abO~ ~~~~ a ' ~~~~~ i ~

U1 .B FI bD oi~~~·?

n 0~~~~~~~~~~-C 0 m Q a 0 C t

0 '

·: O a II :',

F~~~~~~~ 0

0 El ~ d ~ ;

LL 0 .

z El 4 c

-F "SS -~~ 5 E-ESO oi .=$, =+,

O O~t , °f O K 2 ; ;

U '1 m 'ELUUa ~

C4

396

° .- .o o . o0 d r, 0 'E5 0 w

_ -- C)

E0 C s~ o34 5 o g E.-o' .~ Y o a

397

C) -,

._ C

C) i3

c)~ -~

·~~~~~~~~~3 ·- ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~CC)C) C).C) C)

U) C) "

C C

E mo AO '

E ., 0 - oUI S CO , C C C C

_ 0 O . 0

a : :0<1: : : C C c

U 5 _ C co EC

398

o

iia

256. TRAINING NOTES, MECHANICAL TRAINING-6 HOURS

For suggestions as to the class arrangementand method of conducting mechanical training,see paragraphs 298-302.

257. FIRST PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach each manthe characteristics, general data, and the disas-sembly, and assembly of the barrel and receivergroup. Nomenclature is learned during mechan-ical training.

a. With the men seated at the tables, have therifles checked for safety. Clips.of dummy roundsare broken down and checked for live rounds (5min.).

b. Explain and describe the characteristics andgeneral data of the rifle. After the explanation,have an assistant instructor disassemble the rifleinto its three main groups (10 min.).

c. Explain, demonstrate, and conduct practicalwork in disassembling and assembling the barreland receiver group and the bolt, and removingand replacing the gas cylinder lock screw (35mnin.).

258. SECOND PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this period is to familiarize eachman with the trigger housing group. Explain,demonstrate, and conduct practical work in thedisassembly and assembly of the trigger housinggroup (50 min.).

399

259. THIRD PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this period is to teach the soldierhow the trigger housing group functions, and tointroduce the functioning of the barrel and re-ceiver group, including the first phase of func-tioning.

a. Explain and conduct practical work to showhow the trigger housing group works (15 min.).

b. Explain and show how the parts of the bar-rel and receiver group are related to each otherbefore placing a full clip into the receiver (10min.).

c. Explain and have demonstrated the firstphase of functioning of the barrel and receivergroup (25 min.).

260. FOURTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this period, is to teach the soldierthe second and third phases of functioning of hisrifle.

a. Explain and demonstrate the second phaseof functioning (10 min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate the third phase offunctioning (10 min.).

c. For practical work, have the assistant in-structors review the phases of functioning withthe members of their groups (30 min.).

261. FIFTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this period is to teach the soldierthe fourth phase of functioning of his rifle and

400

to review all phases by the use of a trainingfilm.

a. Explain, demonstrate, and conduct practicalwork in the fourth phase of functioning (20min.).

b. Show training film 9-1172 (20 min.).c. Complete the assembly of the rifle (10 min.).

262. SIXTH PERIOD-- HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the soldierhow to operate his rifle; what causes stoppagesand how to clear them; how to apply immediateaction; what spare parts he needs for the rifle;what types of ammunition are used; and how tocare for and clean the rifle.

a. Explain and demonstrate the operation ofthe rifle (5 min.).

b. Name the different types of stoppages andexplain each one by a series of set-ups and a chartbased on table I (10 min.).

c. Explain and demonstrate how to apply im-mediate action when a stoppage occurs (5 min.).

d. Explain, and have for display, spare partsand ammunition (5 min.).

e. Explain the importance of care and clean-ing. Discuss and demonstrate authorized clean-ing materials, lubricants, rust preventives,and the accessories used in cleaning. Explaincare and cleaning in garrison, before firing, dur-ing firing, and after firing. Care and cleaningunder unusual conditions is ordinarily taught be-fore these conditions are actually encountered(25 min.).

401

263. TRAINING NOTES, PREPARATORY MARKSMAN-SHIP TRAINING, MN RIFLE

a. Preparatory instruction in marksmanshipfollows mechanical training. At this point intraining, the trainee must be cautioned as to theimportance of the habit of accurate rifle firing;why he must do everything exactly right; that,to acquire good shooting habits, he must practiceand exert the maximum effort. Once the habitof exactness is formed, speed and smoothness canbe developed with practice.

b. The preparatory marksmanship trainingsteps are taught in the order that they are listedin paragraph 74. Each step includes the prin-ciples covered in the preceding steps. Example:to squeeze the trigger correctly, the firer musthave a steady position and a correct sight pic-ture. The fifth step, which includes the effect ofwind, sight changes, and use of the score card,may be taught at any time before the examinationprior to range firing.

264. SEVENTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach each manwhy he must practice before he begins to shoot;to show him the correct sight alignment and sightpicture; to have him go through the first sightingand aiming exercise; and to show him how toapply himself both as a coach and as a pupil.

a. Explain preparatory marksmanship train-ing and its importance (15 min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate correct sight align-ment and sight picture. Show why sight align-

402

ment is more important than sight picture (10min.).

c. Explain and demonstrate the first sightingand aiming exercise (10 min.).

d. Conduct practical work in the first sightingand aiming exercise (15 min.).

265. EIGHTH PERIOD-- HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the men theuse of the sighting device, M15, and the secondsighting and aiming exercise.

a. Explain and demonstrate the use of thesighting device, M15 (5 min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate the second sight-ing and aiming exercise (10 min.).

c. Conduct practical work in the second sight-ing and aiming exercise (35 min.).

266. NINTH PERIOD-I HOUR

The object of this lesson is to demonstrate theimportance of maintaining an accurate sight aline-ment and sight picture in firing the M1 rifle andto determine if the men thoroughly understandthe principles of sighting and aiming.

a. Explain and demonstrate the third sightingand aiming exercise (10 min.).

-b. Each man should make at least two plottedshot groups which are small enough to be cov-ered by the unsharpened end of a lead pencil.Each shot group must be examined and discussedbefore the soldier is permitted to make a succeed-ing shot group (40 min.).

403

267. TENTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the manhow to make the loop sling, how to adjust it tohim arm, and how to assume the correct proneposition.

a. Explain and demonstrate the loop sling andits adjustment (5 min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate the prone positionand the common errors found in this position (10min.).

c. Conduct practical work in adjustment of theloop sling and the prone position (35 min.).

268. ELEVENTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the menthe kneeling and squatting positions.

a. Explain and demonstrate the kneeling andsquatting positions and the common errors foundin each position (15 min.).

b. Conduct practical work in the kneeling andsquatting positions (35 min.).

269. TWELFTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the menthe sitting and crouch positions.

a. Explain and demonstrate the sitting andcrouch positions (15 min.).

b. Conduct practical work in the sitting andcrouch positions (35 min.).

270. THIRTEENTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the men

404

the hasty sling adjustment and the standing posi-tion.

a. Explain and demonstrate the hasty sling andits adjustment (5 min.).

b. Conduct practical work in the adjustment ofthe hasty sling (10 min.).

c. Explain and demonstrate the standing posi-tion. Emphasize the need for a steady, well bal-anced position to cut down the natural wobble ofthe muzzle in this position (10 min.).

d. Conduct practical work in the standing posi-tion (25 min.).

271. FOURTEENTH PERIOD-3 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to teach the menthe correct principles of trigger squeeze, to de-velop their ability to squeeze the trigger properly,and to provide additional practice in assumingall positions. The M2 aiming device should beused to check the sight picture as each soldierpractices this exercise.

a. Explain and demonstrate trigger squeeze,emphasizing its importance in shooting (15 min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate the use of the M2aiming device (5 min.).

c. Conduct practical work in trigger squeezein all positions (except the crouch position) (130min.).

272. FIFTEENTH PERIOD-2 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to teach the menthe principles of firing at the sustained rate offire.

405

a. Explain the principles of and reasons forsustained fire. Give a brief explanation of thethree exercises used to teach sustained fire (20min.).

b. Conduct practical work in the first sustainedfire exercise in all positions except the standingand crouch positions (80 min.).

273. SIXTEENTH PERIOD-2 HOURSThe object of this lesson is to teach the men

how to take positions rapidly.a. Explain and demonstrate taking the prone

and kneeling positions rapidly (10 min.).b. Conduct practical work in taking the prone

and kneeling positions rapidly (40 min.).c. Explain and demonstrate taking-the squat-

ting and sitting positions rapidly (10 min.).d. Conduct practical work in taking the squat-

ting and sitting positions rapidly _(40 min.).

274. SEVENTEENTH PERIOD-1 HOURThe object of this lesson is to teach the men

how to reload in all positions.a. Explain and demonstrate reloading in the

prone, kneeling, squatting, and sitting positions(15 min.).

b. Conduct practical work in reloading in theprone, kneeling, squatting, and sitting positions(35 min.).

275. EIGHTEENTH PERIOD-2 HOURSThe object of this lesson is to teach the men to

fire nine rounds (one round, simulate reloading

406

eight more rounds) in 50 seconds, from standingto the prone, kneeling, squatting, and sittingpositions.

a. Explain and demonstrate the second sus-tained fire exercise in the prone and kneeling posittions (10 min.).

b. Conduct practical work in the second sus-tained fire exercise in the prone and kneeling,positions (40 min.).

c. Explain and demonstrate the second -sus-

tained fire exercise in the squatting and sittingpositions (10 min.).

d. Conduct practical work in the second sus-tained fire exercise in the squatting and sittingpositions (40 min.).

276. NINETEENTH PERIOD-2 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to teach the menhow to fire nine rounds (one round, reload witha clip of dummy rounds and, fire eight rounds)in 50 seconds in the prone, kneeling, squatting,and sitting positions. Conduct practical work inthe third sustained fire exercise in the prone,kneeling, squatting, and sitting positions (120min.).

277. TWENTIETH PERIOD-1 HOUR.

The object of this lesson is to teach the menhow to make sight changes, how the wind affectsthe flight of the bullet, and how to use the wind-age and elevation rules.

a. Describe the rear sight. Explain how andin which direction to move the windage and

407

elevating knobs; that sight changes are made byclicks; how far each click will move the strike ofthe bullet at different ranges (15 min.).

b. Explain the dimensions of the A and B tar-gets. Explain how to determine the velocity ofthe wind and how to use the wind rule. Explainall wind values (10 min.).

c. Conduct practical work problems in makingsight changes, with and without a wind (25 min.).

278. TWENTY-FIRST PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the use ofthe score card. Explain and conduct problems infilling out the score card. During these problems-the men will make the changes on their rear sight(50 min.).

279. TWENTY-SECOND PERIOD--1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the menhow to zero their rifles at different ranges. Ex-plain how to set the rear sight for the battle sightafter having zeroed at 300 yards.

a. Explain the zero of a rifle. Explain how tozero the rifle at 100, 200, 300, and 500 yardswhen no wind is blowing, then how to zero therifle at these ranges when a wind is blowing (40min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate how to set the rearsight on battle sight after zeroing the rifle at 300yards (10 min.).

408

280. TWENTY-THIRD PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach range pro-cedure and safety precautions and to review im-portant points of preparatory marksmanship.

a. Explain range procedure and safety precau-tions (15 min.).

b. Review all important steps covered in previ-ous instruction and answer by explanations anddemonstration (if necessary) all questions thatthe men may ask (35 min.).

281. TWENTY-FOURTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this examination is to test themen in all the steps of preparatory marksmanshipbefore going on the range for firing. Conduct anexamination to test the men in all steps of pre-paratory marksmanship (50 min.).

409

CC

'C 1 P-

'CC

Z o < o ° = Xm o ba

- = C) * . C) C o C

2t4 COC C O C

cC cC

Cs

cCcJ rd

C"' d f

410 i d

C 5 CL o IC ° C) CL aaCV B :, C C

a 3 c3 v V _U)CCL CC CR '

CC+C o, E .5 = CC~~~C-p.

2· ,B

.,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ I

C)C

o rZ: e

C I

o I I:S

Eq Eq ct , 14 ~

o~~~~~ C

CI .

Om O

t C I

OF O

aC ,, s .Vc -

C~ ~ CCCo

'CC CCC bflo >V

C)Cm C)c3 ) C I

C C

I- -4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

00 CC oC _

411

283. TRAINING NOTES, RANGE FIRING

For a detailed discussion of the method of con-ducting range firing, see paragraph 317.

284. TWENTY-FIFTH PERIOD-6 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to have the menbecome familiar with firing live ammunition andto apply the principles of good shooting taughtduring preparatory marksmanship training.

a. Explain and demonstrate the value of usingdummy cartridges during 1,000-inch firing (20min.).

b. Conduct instruction firing tables I and II,course D (par. 144). Use the 1,000-inch A targetthroughout (340 min.).

285. TWENTY-SIXTH PERIOD--16 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to have the menzero their rifles with live ammunition and perfecttheir shooting ability before firing for qualifica-tion. Conduct instruction firing, slow and sus-tained fire, tables I, II, and III, standard course(960 min.).

286. TWENTY-SEVENTH PERIOD-8 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to test the men forqualification in rifle marksmanship. Fire for rec-ord tables IV and V of the standard course (480min.).

287. TWENTY-EIGHTH PERIOD-6 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to familiarize men

412

with the use of the common aiming point whileusing the battle sight at 200, 300 and 400 yards.Conduct instruction firing, table VI, standardcourse (360 min.).

288. TWENTY-NINTH PERIOD-6 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to have men per-fect their ability to engage field type targets atunknown ranges, using the battle sight beforefiring for qualification. Conduct instruction fir-ing, tables VII and VIII, standard course. (360min.).

289. THIRTIETH PERIOD-6 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to test men for quali-fication in transition firing. Fire for record tablesVI and VII of the standard course (360 min.).

413

~~~~~~~Z2

- - C -rl 6< 5 C)t

O C ¢ 5 $ - oo > ~Q C --; t

C,

Z bD E

z:E* ;- c3~

· "~

_ o 4Uh U

ui 1 .

M.I Cl..

414

U-l "IF '

cn . '$ aU o -

c~ 4 c~ qq

oz Im . J

U - 44.i

Z cd o ·

cQ~~~~~~ a s~~~C· ~~P " ii~

LL.·

6 C1 104

UCC

414~ j··t

m a) .c . m oc

,~ vo 3a ,a uD S; o Br

Ea , , li; E - 2 e do "O MO

" ":~~~~~~~~~~~~C m m~ acc

3 ,O·r

bkrr

o~~~~

,5& 4

cd m

°q Oi _l _ , CD

s^ o

rHto hjN Ir 7

cd flN m U

.~~~~ . -aa

a ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ sc: ·- ;t

m c~~~~~~~1

· )

_ b

I .

F4

z 4 .

I- 1 ¢

4 t

292. TRAINING NOTES, MECHANICAL TRAININGAND PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP

The purpose of the familiarization course isto give the soldier enough training to enable himto maintain and operate the rifle during an emer-gency. For suggestions as to the class arrange-ment and method of conducting mechanical train-ing, see paragraphs 298-302.

293. FIRST PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the menthe capabilities, limitations,\ and maintenance ofthe rifle.

a. Explain and describe the characteristics andgeneral data of the rifle (5 min.).

b. Explain and have the assistant instructorsto demonstrate the disassembly of the rifle intoits three main groups (5 min.).

c. Conduct practical work in disassembling therifle into the three main groups (5 min.).

d. Explain and demonstrate the disassemblyand assembly of the barrel and receiver group,excluding the bolt (5 min.).

e. Conduct practical work in the disassemblyand assembly of the barrel and receiver groupexcluding the bolt (10 min.).

f. Explain and demonstrate stoppages andimmediate action (10 min.).

g. Conduct practical work in applying imme-diate action (5 min.).

h. Assemble the rifle (5 min.).

417

294. SECOND PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the valueof marksmanship, how to correctly aim the rifle,the adjustment of the loop sling, and the proneposition.

a. Explain the value of rifle marksmanshipand why each man, regardless of prior experienceor qualification must take it (5 min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate the first sightingand aiming exercise and the use of the M15 sight-ing device (10 min.).

c. Conduct practical work in the first sightingand aiming exercise (15 min.).

d. Explain and demonstrate the adjustment ofthe loop sling and the prone position (10 min.).

e. Conduct practical work in adjustment of theloop sling and the prone position (10 min.).

295. THIRD PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach the kneel-ing, squatting, and sitting positions; adjustmentof the hasty sling; the standing and crouch posi-tions; and trigger squeeze.

a. Explain and demonstrate the kneeling,squatting, and sitting positions (10 min.).

b. Explain and demonstrate the hasty slingand the standing and crouch positions (10 min.).

c. Explain and demonstrate trigger squeezeand the use of the M2 aiming device (5 min.).

d. Conduct practical work in trigger squeezein the prone, kneeling, squatting, and standingpositions. (Coaches use M2 aiming device.) (25min.).

418

296. FOURTH PERIOD-1 HOUR

The object of this lesson is to teach sustainedfire, sight changes, care and cleaning, safety pre-cautions, and range procedure.

a. Explain and demonstrate sustained fire (10min.).

b. Conduct practical work in sustained fire inthe kneeling and squatting positions (15 m~in.).

c. Explain and demonstrate sight changes (10min.).

d. Explain care and cleaning (5 min.).e. Explain and discuss safety precautions and

range procedure (10 min.).

297. FIFTH PERIOD, RANGE FIRING-4 HOURS

The object of this lesson is to have the menapply with live ammunition the principles astaught during preparatory marksmanship train-ing. Conduct familiarization firing as outlined inparagraph 146 (240 min.).

Section IV. MECHANICAL TRAINING

298. GENERAL

a. The suggestions in'this section are made tofit the needs of officers and noncommissioned of-ficers who are training a large number of troops.Do not let this section limit your initiative andoriginality in any way except to observe all safetyprecautions.

b. In teaching mechanical training, arrangeyour instruction so the class as a whole will pro-

419

gress together. Explain each step, then have eachstep demonstrated in detail in each subgroup ofthe class. After each step is explained and dem-onstrated, have each man perform that step.Whenever you or your assistants find a manwhose progress is slow, give him special help.

c. This instruction can best be conducted in-doors. However, outdoor areas may be used whenthe weather permits. It is desirable to seat themen at tables. When tables are not available,shelter halves may be spread on the floor or theground as an expedient. Arrange the tables orshelter halves to accommodate groups of 4 to 8men. A trained assistant instructor should be incharge of each group.- Provide space betweengroups to allow movement of other instructorsthrough the assembled class. Rehearse each classwith your assistant instructors beforehand sothey will know what you are explaining or de-scribing. They must know what you want dem-onstrated and exactly how and when to do it.

d. If available, use a public address systemfor large classes.

e. Make all charts and working models largeenough' to be clearly seen by all men. If they arenot large and clear enough, do not use them inyour lectures but display them in the instructionalarea. During breaks the men can study this dis-play.

f. In conducting instruction, be sure to allowample time for demonstrations by the assistantinstructors and for practical work by the men.

420

g. Each group of men should be provided withthe following equipment:

Two clips of dummy rounds.Ball of waste or rags.Small wire pointer for the assistant instruc-

tor, M1 rifle, complete with combinationtool, and oil and thong case for each man.

299. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

After disassembling the rifle into its threegroups, have the men lay aside the groups notin use to make room for the parts with whichthey are working. With the rifle separated intoits three main groups, conduct the disassemblyand assembly of the barrel and. receiver groupand the trigger housing group. Have the menlay the parts out, from left to right, in the orderthat the parts are removed. This will aid in theassembly of the groups and will help them tolearn and remember the names of each part. En-courage the men to ask questions so you canclarify points that are not understood.

300. FUNCTIONING

a. Explanation. Some men will have difficultyin understanding the functioning of the rifle thefirst time they receive such instruction; there-fore, you must be prepared to explain each stepin more than one way.

b. Time. In arranging your instruction, donot cover more than one phase of functioning ata time. Each period of instruction should allowsome time for the instruction to be understood,

421

for the men to ask questions, and for you to re-peat various steps when necessary.

c. Training Aids.(1) If you use a large working model to

explain a step in functioning, each as-sistant instructor with the rifle shouldexplain the same step to his group.

(2) A chart that lists the four phases offunctioning and separate charts that listthe steps in each phase will aid your in-struction.

301. STOPPAGES AND IMMEDIATE ACTION

Explain the cause for each type of stoppage.Use a chart listing the types and causes of stop-pages. Using a chart, explain how to apply im-mediate action. Have the assistant instructorsdemonstrate it at each group. Require the mento practice applying immediate action severaltimes.

302. CARE AND CLEANING

The assistant instructors should demonstrateeach step in cleaning the rifle. All necessaryequipment and materials, including rifle borecleaner and oil, should be used for these demon-strations.

Section V. PREPARATORY TRAINING

303. GENERAL

a. Arrange preparatory marksmanship train-ing to give the soldier short conferences followed

422

by periods of practical work in each step of in-struction. Make each man want to become anexpert shot. It is your duty as an instructor togive your men confidence in their weapon.

b. Units should be relieved from routine dutyduring preparatory marksmanship training andrange firing so that all mnen will spend a maximumof training time learning to shoot the rifle.

304. ASSISTANT INSTRUCTORS

Train your assistant instructors in advance inthe methods of instruction and the material tobe presented. If you use well trained, rehearsedassistant instructors, your instruction will be wellpresented and supervised and the men will pro-gress in their training. These assistant instruc-tors must be able to assume the correct positionsduring demonstrations and, if possible, theyshould be experts with the rifle.

305. EQUIPMENT

a. All equipment used in preparatory exercisesmust be accurately and carefully made. One ofthe objects of these exercises is to cultivate asense of exactness and carefulness in the mindsof the men undergoing training. They cannotbe exact and they will not be careful when work-ing with equipment that is carelessly made.

b. You, the instructor, should personally in-spect the equipment for the preparatory exercisesbefore training begins. If the equipment is to beconstructed by the units, have a model set avail-able to be used as a pattern. If the equipment is

423

already available, the condition and amount ofit must be closely checked.

306. INSPECTION OF RIFLES

No man is expected to fire with an unserviceableor inaccurate rifle. All rifles should be carefullyinspected far enough in -advance to permit or-ganization commanders to replace all inaccurateor defective rifles before the training period be-gins. Rifles having badly pitted barrels shouldnot be used.

307. PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP FIELDS

The preparatory marksmanship training fieldis selected, inspected, and prepared in advance,and the equipment and training aids are movedto the training area and set up for use before theclass arrives. There are two types of preparatorymarksmanship training fields-the, parallel linetype, and the circular type. The parallel line andcircular fields are discussed in succeeding para-graphs.

308. PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP FIELD (TEM-PORARY)

The parallel line type and modified circulartype preparatory fields are temporary installa-tions. Therefore, when they are not in use formarksmanship training, the areas may be usedfor other purposes.

a. Organization of the parallel line type. Theclass is organized in two parallel lines facing

424

cm ~ *

I~ '~ I " RI I,

425

A El .ooo

BLEACHERS220 CAP

RADIIA-1OO0" STAKES 6 FEETB-50' AIMING BOXES- 29 FEETC-INNER FIRING POINTS- 79 FEETD-OUTER FIRING POINTS- 107 FEETE-50' AIMING BOXES 157 FEETF- 100" STAKES 190 FEET

DISTANCE ALONG FIRING LINE BETWEEN AIMING POINTSC RING 16 FEETD RING 17 FEET

Figure 118. Detailed layout of the preparatory

marksmanship field, modified circular type (temporary).

away from each other. The preparatory field isorganized as shown in figure 117.

b. Organization of the modified circular type.This preparatory field is organized as shown infigure 118. Observe the following guides in or-ganizing the training area:

(1) Bleachers are placed on the circle as

426

shown in figure 122. All periods of con-ference and demonstration are conductedin front of the bleachers.

(2) The public address system, if available,is located around the control stand sothat announcements can be heard byeveryone on the field.

309. PREPARATORY MARKSMANSHIP FIELD (PER-MANENT)

a. General. The preparatory marksmanshipinstruction circle is a permanent installation;therefore, this training area cannot be used forother instruction.

b. Organization. The preparatory marksman-ship instruction circle may consist of four con-centric circles (for two companies) or two con-centric circles (for one company). The two-com-pany installation (four concentric circles) is or-ganized as shown in figure 119. Observe the fol-lowing guides in organizing the training area:

(1) The field is centered around a demon-stration platform which is fronted bybleachers for seating the class. A slid-ing target frame, similar to the typeused on the known-distance range, maybe constructed on the rear of the demon-stration platform for use as a trainingaid. Other training aids may be requiredfor each step of the instruction.

(2). The inner and outer circles consist ofmanually operated disappearing targetsfor sustained fire exercises (figs. 120 and

427

SI)TA INWFI RE ,, \ ,

GROT UP POSTS

· -- I P. . ...

Figure 119. Detailed layout of the two companycircular preparatory marksmanship field (permanent).

121) and vertical posts 51/2 inches widefor the second and third sighting andaiming exercises. The men take posi-tions at the' numbered stakes which areplaced on the circular lane formed bythe two middle circles and face the tar-gets indicated above. If the installationis designed for one company, the mentake positions on either circle facing thetargets on the other circle.

428

7~~~~

*I----it · -- 'c'1

af~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~a

z hi

*

I-.~~~~~I-1

a. UJI

44

,~~~~~~~~c >

a-

4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~2

Z~~~~~~~i~~~~~~~j~p

Wa- ~~~~~~r

-c~Ij I

Q ? 1 1 I I I

4 U,~~~~~~~~~~

0 IU,4-.

OD r4

v, re~~~~~~~~0

Q o ~~~~~~~~ C d~~~~2

UJ~-I- - - -;-1 .. .. .

AS + -e-

0 4.t

iL4 1- I. 1

430

(3) Lanes or aisles are provided so that theassistant instructors may move freelyin supervising the work and so that the

.men may move from the bleachers totheir numbered positions on the circles.

(4) Several sustained fire targets can beoperated simultaneously by connectingthem with a draw rope.

(5) The public address system, if available,is located around the control and dem-onstration stand so that announcementscan be heard by everyone on the field.

310. LECTURE AND DEMONSTRATIONS

At the beginning of each step of instruction, itis desirable to give a short explanation to as-sembled groups, undergoing preparatory rifletraining. These talks should be made by selectedofficers who are expert shots or at least experi-enced riflemen.

311. SIGHTING AND AIMING.

The class is assembled where all can hear theinstructor and see the demonstrations.

a: Equipment. The following equipment shouldbe provided:

1 sighting bar complete.1 sighting device (M15).1 rifle rest.1 rifle.1 small sighting disk.1 small box with paper, pencil, and thumb

tacks.

431

Material for blacking sights.1 enlarged model of sight pictures.1 blackboard with chalk, or chart.

b. Orientation. The following subjects are cov-ered in the first conference as an orientation forsighting and aiming exercises. Use these pointsas a basis for your conference. This in no waylimits your initiative or the scope of your con-ference.

(1) Value of knowing how to shoot.(a) The rifle is the basic arm of the in-

fantry.(b) Every infantryman must know how

to fire the rifle.(c) If you know that you can hit the

enemy, you will have confidence inyour rifle.

(d) As you gain skill in the use of yourrifle, the efficiency of the infantry in-creases.

(e) Firing the rifle is good sport and isa challenge to every man.

(f) YOUR LIFE MAY, AND PROB-ABLY WILL, DEPEND ON YOURABILITY TO SHOOT TO KILL.

(2) Objects of target practice.(a) To teach the men to use good shooting

habits instinctively.(b) To show the men how to teach others.(c) To train future instructors.

(3) Training to shoot well.(a) Good firing requires. coordination of

your mind and body.

432

(b) Any man who is physically fit can betaught to shoot well.

(c) Shooting requires no inborn talent,just the desire to shoot and to do wellin what you undertake.

(4) Coach and pupil method.(a) Each man will act as a coach and a

pupil.(b') A good coach, who demands perfec-

tion, will usually teach his pupil toshoot well.

(c) Coaching is an important duty andeveryone should do his best to be agood coach.

(d) Coaching is continuous.(5) Importance of accuracy. Impress the

men with the need for carefulness andaccuracy in performing each step of thepreparatory exercises; emphasize thefact that good shooting habits resultfrom precision acquired in preparatorymarksmanship training.

(6) Progress chart. Explain that a progresschart will be kept on each man to meas-ure his ability to use the rifle. Themarking system should be explained byusing a blackboard or chart.

(7) Examination of men on preparatorywork. Explain that each man will beexamined on all preparatory marksman-ship steps before going on the range.

c. Sighting and aiming exercises.

(1) Sight alinement. Show by use of the

433

model sight picture, or by use of a black-board, the correct sight alinement. Ex-plain its importance.

(2) Sight picture. By adding the bull's-eyeto the sight alinement, the sight pictureis completed. Show this by using themodel sight picture device or a black-board.

(3) Coach and pupil training. Show how themen will be organized into coach andpupil teams.

(4) First sighting and aiming exercise. Ex-plain the purpose of this exercise andgive a demonstration to show how it isconducted.

(5) Blacking the sights. Explain why thesights should be blacked and demon-strate how to do it.

(6) Second sighting and aiming exercise.After the men are qualified in the firstexercise, explain and demonstrate thesecond sighting and aiming exercise.

(7) Third sighting and aiming exercise. As-suming that the. men know the secondexercise, explain and demonstrate thethirid sighting and aiming exercise. Atthis stage of the training, the shotgroups will show you the progress thatthe men are making.

(8) Attitude of instructor and assistants. Ifthe instructor and his assistants are in-terested, enthusiastic, and energetic, themen will be the same. If the instructorand his assistants are inattentive, care-

434

less, and bored, the men will be the same,and the scores will reflect this attitude.

(9) Suggestions. Before concluding eachportion of the lecture, the instructor willask if there are any questions. If noquestions are asked, he should have sev-eral questions to ask members of theclass. He requires all leaders to keepthe progress charts up to date. The workshould be organized so that the menare kept busy at all times. Allow ampletime for your assistant instructors andcoaches to make corrections. The menshould be allowed a 10-minute break dur-ing each hour. Short periods of calis-thenics involving stretching provide re-lief from possible tedium and also con-dition men for position exercises. Donot hesitate to reassemble the class topoint out or demonstrate the most fre-quent errors noted and to emphasize orclarify important points. Before theclass is dismissed; it should be giveninformation and study references aboutthe period of instruction for the nextday.

312. POSITIONS

a. General. The class is assembled where allcan hear and see the instructor and demonstra-tions.

b. Equipment. The following equipment shouldbe provided for this lecture and demonstration:

435

1 rifle with sling.1 stake or box with 1,000-inch target.

c. Orientation. The instructor explains thatthe steps in preparatory marksmanship traininginclude all instructional matters covered duringthe preceding classes and that each of the essen-tials of.good shooting should be learned thorough-ly and should be practiced repeatedly. Men whoassume poor positions for firing are seldom goodshots. A good shot's firing positions will not varymuch from the prescribed positions. Instructionin firing positions includes correct aiming andbreathing but does not include trigger squeeze.

(1) Holding the breath. The instructor ex-plains, demonstrates, and has the menpractice the correct manner of holdingthe breath. The instructor then explainshow a coach, by watching the pupil'sback, should observe whether his pupilis breathing.

(2) Position of the thumb and cheek. Theinstructor explains that the thumb isnot placed along the right side of thestock because this makes it difficult tograsp the small of the stock securely andawkward to apply pressure straight tothe rear when squeezing the trigger. Byplacing the thumb over the small of thestock or on top of it with the cheelkresting on top of the thumb (spot weld),the following advantages are obtained:

(a) The eye can be placed at the same

436

distance from the peep sight for eachshot.

(b) The small of the stock can be moreeasily grasped.

(c) Pressure can be applied on the trig-ger, straight to the rear, more easilyand uniformly.

(3) Position of the trigger finger. The posi-tion of the forefinger on the trigger willdepend upon the conformation of thefirer's hand. No part of the finger shouldbear against the stock. This insures thatall pressure, when exerted, will be ap-plied straight to the rear.

(4) Progress charts. Leaders are remindedthat the progress chart of their men willbe kept up to date and that each manshould have a mark for each of the itemsshown that have been covered in histraining.

(5) Relaxation and bone support. The in-structor explains that complete muscularrelaxation and bone support is the goalto be attained in taking all positions.He should show with each exercise howa man may test any position for natural-ness and relaxation. This method is asfollows: have him take what he be-lieves to be a correct position with hissights aligned on the target correctly;have him close his eyes and consciouslyrelax his muscles for 5 or 6 seconds;

437

have him open his eyes and again lookthrough his sights. If his position iscorrect, his sight picture will still becorrect or very nearly so. Otherwise,the position is faulty and should be cor-rected by moving the whole body andrepeating the entire process until a cor-rect position has been attained.

(6) Coach. The instructor explains and dem-onstrates that in each position the coachshould take a position from which hecan observe the pupil's trigger fingerand the eyes.

d. Prone Position.(1) Explain and demonstrate the correct

prone position, calling attention to theelements'which go toward making a cor-rect position-gun sling properly ad-justed, body at the correct angle, legsspread apart, position of the butt plateon the shoulder, position of the handson the rifle, position of the cheek againstthe stock and on top of the right thumb,and position of the elbows. Stress thefact that when pupils take a positionthey should always aim at a target.

(2) Demonstrate the errors which most fre-quently occur in taking the prone posi-tion and show the methods for correct-ing them.

(3) Show how the work is organized, usingthe coach and pupil method, so thatevery man is kept busy.

438

e. Squatting, Sitting, Kneeling, Standing, andCrouch Positions. Explain and demonstrate thesepositions in the same manner described above forthe prone position.

f. Aerial Target Position. Explain and demon-strate this position in the same manner describedabove for prone position.

g. Instructor's Procedure. After each positionhas been explained and demonstrated, send theclass to their designated positions on the prepara-tory field for practical work.

313. TRIGGER SQUEEZE

a. General. Read paragraph 105. Explain thatthere is only one correct method of squeezing thetrigger-a firm initial pressure which is con-stantly increased so that the rifleman does notknow when the explosion will take place. Empha-size the fact that this method of squeezing thetrigger produces the best results and must beapplied in both slow and sustained fire.

b. Accuracy. Regardless of how well a manmay have been instructed in the sighting andaiming exercises and in position exercises, if hefails to squeeze the trigger correctly, he will notshoot well. Consequently, the instructor shoulddemonstrate that, in the final analysis, the ac-curacy of rifle fire-all other things being satis-factory--depends upon correct trigger squeeze.

c. Improper Trigger Squeeze. To demonstratehow improper trigger squeeze affects the shot,place the rifle on a table and tell the men to as-sume that it is pointing at a target 500 yards

439

away and that the rifle is in a machine rest thatruns on a track parallel to the line of targets.Tell the men to assume that you have fired a shotthat hits the left edge of the 20-inch bull's-eye;then move the rifle 20 inches to the right. Callattention to the fact that the rear and front sightsmove the same distance and in the same direc-tion. Explain why a shot fired from this positionwill hit the right edge of the bull's-eye. Movethe rifle backward and forward between thesetwo positions, commenting. that the front andrear sights move the same distance in the samedirection. Explain why a shot fired while therifle is moving will hit in the bull's-eye. Nowmove the butt of the rifle while holding it at thestock ferrule swivel. Point out that this causesthe muzzle to move in the opposite direction andexplain why it would cause a shot to miss thetarget. Reemphasize that a shot hits the targetwhen the whole rifle is moved parallel to the lineof sight but misses the target when one end ismoved in one direction while the other end re-mains stationary or moves in the opposite direc-tion. The man who moves his shoulder forward'into the butt of the rifle to catch the recoil ormoves his shoulder back to lessen the recoil willhave a bad shot because he is actually pivotingthe rifle about a point. Breathing will cause thesame result. As the man inhales, the shouldersand butt end of the rifle rise and the muzzle endof the rifle is lowered. The shot will be low. Afirer prevents these errors by holding his breathwhile he aims, applies correct trigger squeeze,and follows through.

440

d. Aim and Hold. Any man can easily learnto hold a good aim for 15 to 20 seconds, whichis a much longer period than is necessary tosqueeze off a well-aimed shot. Require the mento practice holding the aim for a short period oftime to develop steadiness.

e. Coach Squeezing the Trigger. When thecoach squeezes the trigger for the pupil, the factthat the shot is almost invariably a good oneproves that poor shooting is caused principallyby errors in the trigger squeeze. By watchingthe firer's back, the coach knows when the rifle-man has stopped breathing and is aiming. Dur-ing such time, the coach presses steadily on thetrigger. Demonstrate how this is done.

f. When the Rifle is Fired Before the Man isReady. Often a man who has been doing poorshooting will state upon firing a shot, "I cannotcall that shot. I didn't know it was going off."Almost invariably these shots are well placed.His poor shots have been caused by getting setfor them.

g. Follow-Through. Explain the meaning offollowing through (par. 107) and why it is im-portant.

h. Calling the Shot. Explain the meaning ofcalling the shot (par. 106) and why this is done.

i. Application. Demonstrate the duties of thecoach during practical work involving triggersqueeze. Do this by calling attention to each ofthe checks that the coach must make on the firer.Practice trigger squeeze in all positions. Eachcoach should assure himself that his pupil under-

441

stands how to squeeze the trigger properly. Hedoes this by placing his own finger on the trigger.The pupil then applies the squeeze on the coach'sfinger. The M2 aiming device should be used dur-ing these periods.

j. Instructor's Procedure. See paragraph 108.Do not let the practical work lag; keep the menbusy. Explain that it requires a lot of practiceto train the muscles to do the right thing. Inorder to have the training progress satisfactorily,.do not hesitate to assemble the group to empha-size certain points and to make necessary correc-tions.

314. SUSTAINED FIREa. Equipment. The following equipment is re-

quired for this lecture and demonstration:1 rifle with sling.1 clip fitted with wooden block to be inserted

into the receiver.2 clips of dummy rounds.1 stake or box with 1,000-inch target.

b. Sustained Fire Exercises. The followingsubjects should be included in the discussion:

(1) Superiority of fire in battle depends onthe ability to deliver sustained and ac-curate fire on the enemy. Both theamount and accuracy of fire are ob-tained by careful training and practice.

(2) Trigger squeeze is applied the same insustained fire as in slow fire.

(3) Explain the advantages of keeping theeye on the target. Time is not lost and

442

the chance of firing on the wrong targetis eliminated. In combat the target mustbe kept in sight and not become lost.

(4) Emphasize that accuracy of perform-ance for each shot is of primary im-portance in the sustained fire exercises.Speed is secondary and will increasewith experience. The coach should neverurge his pupil to increase his rate of fireat a sacrifice of accuracy.

(5) Explain that a certain time is allottedfor each part of sustained fire-10 sec-onds to take the position and fire thefirst round, 10 seconds to reload and firethe second round, then 4 seconds foreach remaining round. A cushion of 2seconds is provided, making a total of50 seconds.

c. Taking Positions Rapidly. Explain and dem-onstrate the method of going into each positionrapidly and firing the first shot. The time pre-scribed in sustained fire for assuming the prone,kneeling, sitting, and squatting positions and fir-ing the first round is 10 seconds. Send the classto the preparatory field for practice in taking allpositions rapidly. A time greater than 10 secondsmay be used to begin with.

d. Reloading in all Positions. Explain and dem-onstrate loading and unloading in all positions.To practice reloading, the clip of dummy roundsshould be placed in the third pocket of the car-tridge belt. Explain the duties of the coach in allpositions.

443

e. First Exercise (Cadence).(1) Explain what is meant by cadence in

firing and the necessity for it.

(2) Explain that the starting cadence forbeginners is 5 seconds, and that as skillincreases, it is reduced to 4 seconds. Acadence of 4 seconds is the ideal time tofire each round.

(3) Demonstrate the use of the clip with thewooden block in it. Have the coach dem-onstrate how to cock the rifle during thecadence exercise.

[. Second Exercise.(1) Demonstrate the exercise in all posi-

tions, pointing out the use of the clipwith the wooden block and the mannerin which the coach cocks the rifle.

(2) Reemphasize the fact that exactness inperformance is the goal and that speedis of secondary importance.

g. Third Exercise.(1) Explain that -in this exercise the pupil

is required to fire nine dummy roundsat the sustained fire cadence, going fromstanding to the prescribed position andreloading from the belt.

(2) Demonstrate the exercise in each posi-tion, pointing out the duties of the coach.

(3) Emphasize the fact that smoothness andaccuracy are more important than speed.

h. Conclusion. Following the explanation anddemonstration of each exercise, send the class to

444

the preparatory field for practical work in eachof the sustained fire exercises as prescribed inparagraph 119.

315. SIGHT CHANGES, EFFECT OF THE WIND, ANDUSE OF THE SCORE CARD

a. Equipment. The following equipment isneeded for this lecture and demonstration:

1 blackboard, chalk, and eraser.1 enlarged chart of the score card (painted

or drawn on a blackboard).1 A and B target with necessary spotters.

(Each man should have his rifle, scorecard, and pencil.)

b. Sight Changes.

(1) Explain that elevation and deflection ismeasured in clicks. Explain approxi-mately how far a click will move thestrike of the bullet for each 100 yards.Require the men to work various prob-lems involving application of this rule.

(2) Explain the dimensions of the A and Btargets.

(3) Explain how wind affects the flight ofthe bullet and the methods of determin-ing the direction and velocity of thewind. Work several examples on theblackboard. Require the men to workseveral of these problems.

RV(4) Explain the wind formula -. Work

10

445

several examples and then give the menseveral problems to solve.

c. Zero of the Rifle.

(1) Explain what is meant by the zero of arifle.

(2) Explain that rifles differ and that eachman must find the zero of his own rifle.

d. Use of the Score Card.

(1) Explain the score card.(2) Using the score card, an A target, and

spotters, solve a problem to determinethe zero of a rifle at 100, 200, and 300yards when no wind is blowing. Nowdetermine the zero of the rifle at theseranges when a wind is blowing.

(3) Using the score card, B target, andspotters, determine the zero of a rifleat 500 yards.

316. EXAMINATION BEFORE RANGE FIRING

a. If each step of the instruction in the pre-paratory marksmanship training has been pre-sented carefully and thoroughly, all men shouldbe well qualified by the time the examination isgiven. Progress charts based on daily observationor preliminary examinations should have beenkept on each man and should be studied continu-ally to determine those men who are weak in thevarious phases of marksmanship. These menshould receive additional instruction.

(1) Time of holding the examination. Theexamination should not require an ex-

446

cessive amount of time. It should beheld well in advance of range firing topermit additional instruction to be givento those men who are found unsatisfac-tory in any phase of training.

(2) Preparation. The questions and answers(par. 138) covering the preparatorytraining should 'serve as a guide to in-structors while conducting this exam-ination. The examination outline bythese questions and answers should sup-plement rather than take the place ofpractical tests during the various phasesof instruction. All required equipmentshould be assembled and set up prior tothe time of the examination.

(3) Plan of conducting the examination. Thefollowing is an efficient plan for givingthe examination that covers each stepof preparatory marksmanship training(fig. 98).

(a) Designate enough qualified noncom-missioned officers to act as examiners.

(b) Lay out stations to cover the examin-ation in the following steps:

Sighting and aiming.Positions (one station for eachposition).Trigger squeeze.Sustained fire.Sight changes.Wind estimations and corrections.Use of the score card.

447

(c) Assign examiners to each station toinsure prompt and thorough examin-ations. Duplicate stations will savetime.

(4) Supervision. The leaders move from sta-tion to station and, by questioning, as-sure themselves that examinations aregiven as prescribed. Names of men whoare found to be deficient in any phaseof instruction are noted by the exam-iners on a slip of paper. The names areturned over to the platoon leader, whoarranges for the necessary additionaltraining.

b. The following check list may be reproducedand used in examining each soldier. The officeror noncommissioned officer conducting each stepof the examination enters the appropriate rating.

Company -- D -- -__ st__ Inf.Name -------- John, F. A.......... Rank__Pvt.Squad .--------- 1 st ----- -Platoon- 2d

Examination Reexaminat'nSubject

Sat. Unsat. Sat. Unsat.

1V Mechanical training X X

2 Functioning X X

3 Care and cleaning X

4 Sighting bar X

5 Shot group exercises X

448

Examination Reexaminat'nSubject

Sat. Unsat. Sat. Unsat.

6 Loop sling X X

7 Prone position X

8 Squatting position X

9 KneelSitting positions x

10 HIasty sling X

11 Standing) .,. X X

Crouch f positions

12 Trigger squeeze X X

13 1st sustained fire exercise(cadence) X X

14 Taking prone position rapidly X X

15 Taking squatting position rapidly X

16 Taking kneeling position rapidly X

17 2d sustained fire exercise X

18 3d sustained fire exercise (withdummy rounds) X X

19 Immediate action X X

20 Stoppages X X

21 Effect of wind and sight changes X X

22 Score card X

449

317. RANGE FIRING

a. The range work should be organized so thateach man loses only a minimum of his firing time.Long periods of inactivity while awaiting a turnon the firing line should be avoided. To do this-

(1) Six men per target are about the maxi-mum and three men per target the mini-mum for efficient handling.

(2) When four orders are designated oneach target, the double coaching systemmay be employed. This system' is par-ticularly desirable because all men arekept busy and get additional practice(dry firing).

b. To organize the range for this system, dividethe class into groups of four men each; each groupconstitutes four orders. At the commencementof firing, order No. 1 fires from the right side ofthe numbered stake or firing point, coached byorder No. 3. On the left side of the numberedstake, No. 2 is dry firing, coached by No. 4. No. 1sets the pace; that is, he fires the course using theallotted time as directed and as it fits his par-ticular needs. No. 2 keeps pace with No. 1, dryfiring in each position until No. 1 has but twoshots left in his last position. At this point, No.1 informs No. 2 that he has but two shots re-maining, whereupon No. 2 adjusts his sling forthe first firing position, ready to commence firingwhen No. 1 has finished. At the completion ofhis firing,. No. 1 clears his rifle (No. 2 begins hisfiring). An officer or noncommissioned officer in-

450

spects the rifle. No. 1 then returns from the fir-ing line and deposits his equipment. No. 3 getshis rifle, comes up and begins dry firing on theright of the stake while No. 2 is firing on theleft. No. 1 coaches No. 3. No. 4 coaches No. 2.This procedure is continued until the four ordershave completed all firing. This procedure keepseach man of a four-man group busy all of thetime. The double coaching system may be usedin both slow and sustained fire.

c. Subject to ammunition allowances, the fol-lowing range firing has been found to produceuniformly excellent results when. the full allow-ance of time is devoted to this phase of training.

(1) Firing is begun by a group consisting ofapproximately half of each organization.This group is made up of those men'found to be best qualified as a result ofthe examination on preparatory workand those known to be good shots. Themen who are not included 'in this firstgroup make up all fatigue details andundergo additional preparatory train--ing.

(2) After the first group, except those fewwho have not been firing well, completesits instruction firing, they then fire forrecord. After these men have completedrecord firing, they then perform fatigueduties.

(3) When the first group has completed fir-ing, the second group, made up of those

451

who have not fired and those who wererejected from the first group, begin in-struction firing.

(4) When the second group completes in-struction firing, those who have beenfiring well and who have a very goodchance to qualify, fire for record.

(5) During the remainder of the allottedtime, officers and noncommissioned of-ficers concentrate their efforts on themen who were not considered ready tofire for record with the second group.This last group must complete firing forrecord by the end of the allotted timefor range firing.

d. When range facilities are limited so the en-tire organization cannot fire at one time with-out having more than four, or at most, six menper target, the same general scheme as that out-lined above may be applied.

(1) Firing is begun with all of the men ofthe unit taking part.

(2) At the completion of instruction firing,all men who have been firing well fire forrecord.

(3) The instructors concentrate on the re-mainder of the organization for the restof the allotted time.

e. Another system may be used whereby unitsthe size of a company are broken down and thedouble coaching system is used. The company isorganized into three groups. Each group, con-

452

sisting of about one-third of the company, takesits turn in one of the three stages.

Preparatory training.Range firing.Pit detail and interior fatigue tasks of the

company.This reduces the groups to a size that permitsfour orders per target on the range and furtherinsures that men actually in the process of train-ing can devote their entire time and attentionto that training.

f. In preliminary range firing, a time limit of11/2 minutes per shot may be allowed each rifle-man. This time limit will not affect the good shotsand may be of help to the poor shots. It willprevent waste of time by some men and will helpthe unskilled rifleman to fire his shots withoutbecoming fatigued.

318. AMMUNITION

The best ammunition available should be re-served for record firing, and the men should havea chance to make their sight settings with thatammunition before record firing begins. Ammu-nition of different lot numbers should not bemixed.

319. RANGE PROCEDURE

When taking a unit on the range for its firstfiring, a period of instruction on range procedureshould be conducted.

a. The following equipment is required for thelecture demonstration:

453

1 rifle with sling.Material for blacking the sights.Dummy cartridges.

b. The following subjects should be discussedprior to instruction firing.

(1) Preparatory work applied. Range firingis carried on practically the same as atrigger squeeze exercise, except that liveammunition is used.

(2) Spotters. Explain the use of spotters.(3) Disks. Explain value, color, and use of

disks.(4) Duties of the coach. Explain and dem-

onstrate the duties of the coach while onthe firing line. Demonstrate the positionof the coach in each position. Officersand noncommissioned officers superviseand assist the men who are acting ascoaches and personally coach pupils whoare having difficulty.

(5) Dummy cartridges. Explain and demon-strate the use of dummy rounds duringrange firing.

(6) Trigger squeeze. Explain that if thepupil has not fired a slow fire shot in 10seconds after he has begun to hold hisbreath and started his trigger squeeze,his coach should require him to releasethe pressure on the trigger, look awayfrom the target, breathe, and then startover again. Shots' which take a longtime to get off are seldom good.

454

(7) Use of telephones. Explain how the tele-phone operator, the rifleman, noncom-missioned officers, and officer in chargeof the firing use the telephone.

(8) Shot group. Explain what is meant byshooting for a group and how this group-ing of shots is an indication of correctand expert shooting ability.

(9) Accuracy before speed. Explain thatsustained fire is identical to slow fire inall respects except for the fact that thetime interval between successive shotsis reduced and that all shots should befired within a given time limit.

Section VI. TRANSITION AND MOVING TARGETFIRING

320. PREPARATION

a. All men must complete the known-distancequalification firing before they are trained in tran-sition firing and in the technique of engagingmoving targets.

b. The officer in charge of instruction must besure that there are enough officers and noncom-missioned officers assigned as assistants and thatdemonstration groups are trained and availablebefore the initial period of instruction. He mustmake and check arrangements for ranges, tar-get and pit equipment, and communication to havethem available for rehearsals and instruction.

455

321. TRANSITION FIRING

Transition firing is designed to bridge the gapbetween known-distance firing and field targetfiring. Individual combat marksmanship is de-veloped by requiring the firer to search for in-distinct targets, to estimate ranges, and to placeaccurate fire on targets within a limited time.The initial step in transition firing is instructionin the theory and use of the battle sight. It in-cludes the use of an aiming point on targetswithin 400 yards and the application of leads infiring at moving men (par. 208).' Three phasesof transition firing (tables VI, VII, and VIII)are prescribed for riflemen in the standard quali-fication course.

322. TABLE VI, PRELIMINARY INSTRUCTION

a. Instruction for firing on a silhouette target,using an aiming point, is given on the known-distance range in much the same manner as forknown-distance firing. The target is made locallyby pasting two paper E 'kneeling silhouettetargets (ORD Stock No. L001-60-06874) 18inches apart and equidistant from the center ofthe target panel on a blank target frame. Ap-proximately in the center of the left silhouette,paste or stencil an aiming point at least 8 inchesin diameter. A sheet of white letter size paper(8" x 101/2") serves very well with the lower edge16 inches above the bottom of the silhouette (fig.122).

b. All firing for table VI is done with the 300-

456

V2" _0 /

SILHOUETTE

29 1/2"1 7 -*NO.1 NO2_

7 /2" I 191/2"-' - 18" 19 I/2

Figure 122. Target used for instruction firing on an

aiming point (table VI).

yard battle sight setting. Firing is begun on the300-yard line. Two shot groups of three roundseach are fired on the left silhouette, using theaiming point to confirm the battle sight and tofamiliarize the firer with the point of aim. Tar-gets are pulled and spotted after each group isfired. One shot group of three rounds and fivesingle rounds are then fired at the right silhouette.When firing on the right silhouette, the firer istaught to aim at the center of mass (the common

457

aiming point) using the 300-yard battle sight'set-ting. Targets are pulled and spotted after theshot group of three rounds is fired and after eachof the five single rounds is fired. Similarly, firingis done at 200 yards and at 400 yards to providepractice- in engaging field type silhouette targetsusing the battle sight setting.

c. Table VI. should be fired at least once andthe riflemen should demonstrate proficiency in theuse of the battle sight before progressing to tablesVII and VIII.

d. While'table VI is being fired, give rear areainstruction to small groups for firing tables VIIand VIII. For example, have the groups practicetaking combat firing positions, using mockups ofthe target positions used in firing table VII.Have them practicethe crouch'position and alert-ness while simulating the engagement of surprisetargets while advancing.

323. TABLE VII, TRANSITION FIRING

A field target range of the type shown in figure123 is used for firing table VII. Ranges may varyslightly to fit local terrain conditions. Except forlane 6, no range will be over 400 yards long. (Arange for automatic rifle transition firing maybe superimposed on the first six lanes of the rifle-transition range using :the same pits and com-munications. Three'additional pits in lanes 3 and4 will be necessary:if -this is done.)

a. Conduct of Fire.(1) Sights. All firing except on the target

458

in lane 6 is done with the battle sight.Use of the loop sling is prohibited, butfirers should be encouraged to use the

500- Ii

400--

A A A .A1 2 3 4 5

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROLPOINT POSNT POINT POINT POINT

NOTE' LEGEND:PLACE THE 500-YARD TARGET IN LANE 6 ADJACENT I SNG LE "E" SLHOUETTETO THE MOVING TARGET LANE TO FACILITATE SUPER- T MOVING TARGET-ONE SILHOUETTEIMPOSING THE BAR TRANSITION COURSE ON THEFIRST 6 LANES OF THE RIFLE TRANSITION COURSE. 1 "S' TARGET

Figure 123. Layout for a rifle transition range forfiring table VII.

459

hasty sling when the position permits.When firing from the window, the firershould not expose himself, but shouldengage the target from a position wellback from the sill.

(2) Targets. E silhouette.targets are usedin all lanes except lane 6. A 6 x 6 foot Btarget is used for lane 6; this targetrepresents the front of a motor vehicle.The moving targets in lane 5 traverseright and left for 30 feet. The directionof movement differs for each of the twotargets fired on by the same man.-

(3) Ammunition. The firer is limited to fourrounds of ammunition on each lane. Ex-cept for lane 6, a maximum of tworounds may be used on the first targetto appear in each lane.

b. Procedure for Firing.

(1) Control. Firing is controlled by an of-ficer who, is assisted by a noncommis-sioned officer (scorer) at each firingpoint. Each set of two lanes has a con-trol point (telephone) operator who con-trols the raising or lowering of the tar-gets by verbal messages to the pit oper-ators.

(2) Scorers. The noncommissioned officers(scorers):

(a) Designate the limits of the firing lane.(b) Signal the control point operator for

targets to be exposed, observe the tar-

460

gets for hits, and record the scores.The control point operator tells himthe number of hits made in lane 6.

(c) Are constantly on the alert to insurethat safety precautions are carriedout and, on orders of the officer incharge, check weapons for clearance.

(3) Suggested method of range control.

(a) The men are detailed to firing ordersof 10 men each and they line up be-hind the firing points on each lane.On command of the officer in charge,each firer in the first order examineshis rifle to see that it is ready for fir-ing, checks his battle sight setting,moves to the firing point, and assumesthe position required for the lane onwhich he is to fire.

(b) On a ready signal from the scorers,the officer in charge commands:

LOCK, FOUR ROUNDS, LOADREADY ON THE RIGHT?READY ON THE LEFT?READY ON THE FIRING LINECOMMENCE FIRING

At the command COMMENCE FIR-ING, the control operators displayeither of the two targets in their lanes.To require the firer to search for thetargets, the sequence of their expo-sure in each lane should not be fixed.

(c) Each target is exposed for 1 minute

461

unless it is hit. When the target ap-pears, the firer fires on it. If he doesnot get a hit with his first shot, hefires one more round. As soon as thetarget is hit, the pit operator twirlsthe target, withdraws it immediately,and the second target is, exposed. Ifthe firer fails to hit the first target, itis withdrawn after it is exposed for 1minute and the second target is thenexposed for 1 minute or until it is hit.The timing is done by the controloperators.

(d) In lane 6, the firer estimates therange, sets the elevation on the rearsight, and has one minute in whichto fire four rounds at the B target. Asthe target represents the front of amotor vehicle, the pit operator scoresall hits within the three ring and re-ports them to the control point oper-ator.

(e) After completing a lane, each firermoves to the right to the next posi-tion except the man on lane No. 10,who moves left to lane No. 1. Thisprocedure is repeated until each manhas fired on all 10 lanes. Movementis made on command of the officer incharge and only after all weapons havebeen cleared. When the first order hasfired on all ten points, the second orderis rotated through the course. Table

462

VIII can be run concurrently withtable VII and other training may bedone in the rear areas at the sametime.

324. TABLE VIII, TRANSITION (QUICK) FIRING

A field target range of the type shown in figure124 is used for firing table VIII. The number oflanes is determined by local terrain and safetyconditions. (This layout with minor modifica-tions also accommodates the transition (quick)firing range requirements for the automatic rifle(FM 23-15).)

a. Target Operation.(1) Targets between phase lines are exposed

in sequence on the signal of the controlofficer. Signals should not be visible oraudible to the firer.

(2) Phase lines are placed after targets Dand G to permit the firer to reload andto aid in the enforcement of safety pre-cautions. A single E silhouette repre-sents an enemy rifleman and is exposedfor 3 seconds. A double silhouette repre-sents an enemy automatic rifle team andis exposed for 4 seconds. A triple sil-houette represents an enemy machinegun and is exposed for 5 seconds.

b. Firing Procedure.(1) At the starting line a control. officer

orders the firer to lock and load 8rounds, and to take the prone position.

463

40 YDS

3O Z GSBEYOND TS POIT

30 YDS

NOTES: EI. TARGETS MAY BE OPER-

ATED BY INDIVIDUALPULL ROPES OR FROMA CENTRAL BOX.AVERAGE TIME PERFREIS B MINUTES - 30 PHASE LIRE

3. FIRER MUST BE RE-OUIRED TO ENGAGE TAR-GETS IMMEDIATELY AF- DITER CROSSING EACHPHASE LINE. C

30 YS

A I ID , 520 PHASE LINE

30 YDS

25 YSL STARTING LINETART I ST PHASE LINE

.Figure 124. Rifle transition course for table VIII.

Two additional 8 round clips are carriedin the firer's belt.

(2) On signal from the control officer, thefirer rises, unlocks his rifle, and ad-

464

vances down the lane on the alert. Asthe targets are exposed, the firer firesone round at each individual silhouette.He may fire from the standing positionor from the hip (crouch position) andhe is required to move forward afterengaging each target.

(3) The control officer or noncommissionedofficer accompanies the firer through thecourse to insure control, to enforce safe-ty precautions, and to critique the firerupon completion. They are followedclosely by a scorer who records the hitsand pastes the bullet holes.

325. ALTERNATE TRANSITION FIRING COURSE

At installations where facilities are not avail-able for firing transition tables VII and VIII forthe standard qualification course, an alternatecourse may be used. This course may be adaptedto existing transition ranges and should conformto tables VII and VIII as nearly as possible.

326. MARKSMANSHIP-MOVING VEHICLES

While there is no prescribed marksmanshipcourse for engaging moving vehicles, this typeof training should not be overlooked. This train-ing can be done best with small groups in rearareas concurrently with other range firing. Theofficer responsible for training in combat marks-manship, through initiative and ingenuity, canset up a number of exercises that will provideprofitable instruction. For example:

465

CLOTH

ITAE 2CA

FRONT VIEW OF TARGET

TARGET FRAME

I - 5' -'1_ ------ __ _ ------ ._

EDGE COVERED WITH SHEET METAL

ELEVATION OF BASE

| ,r -CLOTH

k

Figure 125. Ground-towed target.

466

a. Vehicles moving at predetermined speeds atvarious angles in relation to the position of thegroup may be used to provide practical work inestimating speed and in judging leads.

b. Practice in aiming and leading can also beobtained by tracking vehicles in the traffic alongthe roads near the training area.

c. Moving target firing is valuable trainingwhen time and facilities permit.

(1) A sled target, with a low center of grav-ity, of the type shown in figure 125 canbe constructed of scrap material andcan be towed over rough ground.

(2) To tow this target with a vehicle, use500 yards of half-inch rope. The pulleyseen in figure 130 is a channel wheelbolted to a wooden or metal base whichis firmly staked down. A knot is made inthe tow rope 10 to 12 feet from the tar-get. This will hit the wheel and throwthe rope off the pulley, causing the direc-tion of the target to change. A schema-tic layout for a moving target range isshown in figure 126.

Section VII. TECHNIQUE OF FIRE

327. GENERAL

The instructor should secure equipment, in-spect ranges, and detail and train his assistants,including demonstration units, before the firstperiod of instruction. Instructors should usetheir initiative in arranging additional exercises

467

TARGET

PULLEY

10

oo\

PULLEY

PULLEY

FIRING LINE

TRUCK

Figure 126. Setup for towed target firing.

to apply the fundamentals and methods that fol-low. Explain to the students how the exercisesare used to illustrate the technique of fire.

328. RANGE DETERMINATION

a. To train men to estimate range, particular-ly by eye, the 100-yard unit of measure must beestablished in their minds. Their attention iscalled first to measured units laid out in the bar-

468

racks and training areas. During marches andfield exercises they are given practice in estimat-ing ranges to prominent terrain features such asbuildings, trees, and road intersections. In a sim-ilar manner, they are taught to observe the ap-pearance of objects at known distances.

b. Plan for a number of range estimationareas as shown in figure 127. When facilities per-mit, these areas should be near other training lo-cations so that practice in range estimation canbe conducted along with other training.

Figure 127. Diagram of an area used for teaching theapplication of the 100-yard unit of measure (schematic).

469

c. The range estimation cards shown in figures1280 and 1280. are used in the initial instructionto provide a record of progressive proficiency.Squad leaders are required to check their menand give individual attention to those men foundto be below standard. If the soldier can recog-nize-an error and if he understands why an erroris made, he will learn to make the necessary al-lowance for factors of light, weather, and terrain.

RANGE ESTIMATION CARDName .. F(... .e<4 I ..... .-...

Squad ..2... ..... .......................................

*UU.£RT IWATZ CORRZCT * REMARKI .UMBVR £STIN^T~o* ¢~R£ Z Ri~^R*

l Z25 25o 30 . 21

2 40 50 /6 22

3 2g /75 e ! 23

4 Zo /75 324 . _

6 26

7 27

2 28

9 29

10 30

11 31

12 32

13 33

14 34

15 35

16 36

17 37

18 38

19 39

20 40

Range estimation card.

Figure 128.

470

TABLE FOR COMPUTING ERRORS IN RANGE ESTIMATION

Rangein j Error in Yards

Yards 110 115 120 125 1 30 1 35 140145 150100250 2 I 4 J 6 8 10 12 14 16 l181201 40275 2 4 5 8 9 11 13 15 16 1 18 36

300 2 3 5 7 8 10 j 12 13 15 17 33330 { 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 15s 30350 1 3 4 6 l 7 l 9 10 11 13 14 29380 O 1 3 4 5 7 j 8 911 12 13 26400 o1 3 4 5 { 6 8L 9 10 11 13 l 25420 1 2 4 5j 6 7 1 8 _10 l 12 I 24440 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 23460 1 I 2 3 4 . 5 7 8 s 9 10 11 I 22480 1 2 3 4 s 6 I 7 8s 9l10lI 21500 f .2 3 4 6 6 1 7 1 8 .9 10 20520 1 2 3 j4 j6 6 7 8 9110 19540 I 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 19660 1 j21 3 j4 4 j 6 j 6j 7 8 9 18580 I 4 2 3 3 4 1 6 7 8 9 .17600 1 2 83 3 4 6 6 7 8 8 1620 1 12 2 3 4 1 5 5 6 . 7 l8 16640 1 2 2 3 4 5L 5L 66 7 s8 16660 T1 2 2 3 4I 5 1.6j 6 7 8 15680 T1 T1 2 L3 4 4 6l 6L 7{ 81 15700 L1 1L 2 3 3 4 6 6 6 7I 114720 T1 1 { 2 241 67 14

74-0 1 l1 2l 3 j 3 j4 76j6j6 l7' 14

760 0 1 2 3 3 1 4j 6 6 1 7 13780 0 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 13800 0 1

2j3 3 4 4 6 6 6 13

860 i 1 2 2 l 3 44 6 s 6 12900 0 l 2 2 8 4 4 6 11

950 10 1 21 2 83 3 ! 4 5I 8141 11

1000 I0 1 I 2 2 8 s 4 4 51 6 10

NOTE-Example of the use of this table: Suppose the correct range to be 695yards and the estimated range to be 635. The "error in estimate" is eonsequently60 yards Select two "errors in estimate" in the 700-yard spaee (the nearest tothe eorrect range given in the table) whose sum is 60 yards, as i0 and 10. Addthe percentages shown thereunder, and the result will be approximately your error.In this case:

7plusl=8%( Reverse side of range estimation card. (Table for computing

errors in range estimation by eye.)Figure 128-Continued.

471

The unskilled man's average error in estimatingrange is about 30 percent. The training objec-tive is. to reduce the percentage of error to theminimum.

329. EXERCISES IN RANGE DETERMINATION

The exercises suggested in this section are de-signed to give the soldier a thorough understand-ing of the principles to be used in estimatingranges by eye. These exercises alone are notenough to insure continued proficiency in thissubject. Proficiency can be acquired, maintained,and improved only by regular periods of prac-tical work. When possible, short periods of prac-tical work should be included in all types of fieldtraining.

330. EXERCISE NO. 1

a. Purpose. This exercise familiarizes the sol-dier with the 100-yard unit of measure, and themethod of applying it in estimating ranges onvaried terrain.

b. Method. The unit of measure (100-yards)is staked out on one or more courses over Variedterrain, using markers that are visible at 500yards. The men start from a centrally locatedpoint if more than one course is to be practiced.From this point they can compare the.appearanceof'the 100-yard units of measure over the variedterrain. They are then moved to a point (400-yard marker) within 100 yards of a selected 500-yard marker and are formed facing that marker.

472

They are given an opportunity to study and tofix firmly in their minds, the 100-yard mentalunit of measure. Then they move back towardthe starting point until all are on line with the300-yard marker (200 yards from the 500-yardmarker). They are then moved to a point on linewith the 200-yard and then the 100-yard markers,thence to the starting point. At each stoppingpoint, they study the appearance of the 100-yardunit of measure and apply it successively up to500 yards. This exercise should be practiced ateach of the ranges in the prone, kneeling, andstanding positions. The unit receiving instruc-tion may be divided into two or more smallergroups. These groups are rotated over severalcourses in the area.

331. EXERCISE NO. 2

a. Purpose. This exercise provides the soldierwith practice in applying the unit of measure.

b. Method.(1) Ranges up to 500 yards are measured

accurately and marked at every 100yards by large markers on targetframes, each bearing a number to in-dicate its range. The men take posi-tions at least 25 yards to the flankof this course. They are directed tohold some object before their eyes toobstruct their view of the markers.Then they estimate 100-yard units ofmeasure along a line parallel to the un-seen line of markers. When they have

473

mentally selected the five 100-yard unitsof measure, they compare their esti-mated 100-yard units with the markers.Repetition of this exercise will help todevelop accuracy.

(2) Ranges greater than 500 yards are esti-mated in a similar manner. The menestimate ranges to points which are ob-viously more than 500 yards away anda little to one side of the line of markers.As soon as they have announced eachrange, they check the range to the tar-get and to the halfway point by meansof the markers. The prone, standing,and kneeling positions are used. in thisexercise.

332. EXERCISE NO. 3

a. Purpose. This exercise provides practice inrange estimation.

b. Method. Ranges are measured from a suit-able position to various objects within 1,000 yards.The objects selected should be so located thatthe men cannot make comparative judgments ofrange, but will have to make independent esti-mates. The instructor points out these objectsand the men enter their estimates on range esti-mation cards or work sheets (fig. 1280). Theyshould make at least one-half of their estimatesfrom the prone or kneeling positions. Not morethan thirty seconds is allowed for each estimate.When the men have entered their estimatedranges to five or six objects, the instructor an-

474

nounces the true ranges and requires the men tocompute their percentage of error in each esti-mate. In the remarks column of the range esti-mation card, the men enter any comment, such asthe nature of the terrain or the climatic condi-tion which caused the error. By maintaining in-dividual records and squad averages, interestand competition can be developed. Also, the menwho are below standard are readily spotted andcan be given additional instruction.

333. EXERCISE NO. 4

a. Purpose. This is an exercise to demonstratea soldier's appearance at different ranges.

b. Method. From a suitable position on levelopen terrain, men are placed in concealed posi-tions at 100-yard intervals for a distance of 500yards. The class studies the appearance of themen at different ranges.

(1) On signal, all men down range stand up.The instructor points out that the menseem to decrease in size as the distanceto them increases. He calls attention tothe gradual disappearance 'of details(facial features, hands, arms, legs, hel-met, belt, and rifle). The class is re-quired to make notes of the ranges atwhich the details are no longer visible.

(2) On signal, all posted men kneel. Theclass then studies the kneeling figures.The instructor calls the class's attentionto the details of the kneeling men. Theywill seem to disappear at closer ranges

475

than when they were standing. Againthe class makes a note of the ranges atwhich the details are no longer visible.

(3) On signal, all posted men take up theprone firing position and aim their riflesat the class. The class studies the ap-pearance of the prone figures. The in-structor points out that fewer detailsare visible now, even at the shorterranges. The class makes a note of theranges at which details are no longervisible.

(4) The exercise must be practiced with theclass facing the sun and facing awayfrom the sun.

(5) Similar exercises should be given usingvehicles and several types of crew-servedweapons to demonstrate the appearanceof common items of equipment at vari-ous ranges.

334. RULES FOR INSTRUCTORS

a. Know the exact ranges used in the exercises.b. Announce the ranges to each target after

the men have made their estimates and beforeany change occurs in light conditions.

c. Point out why an object appears to be neareror more distant.

d. Move to new terrain as often as possibleand-teach each man to make his estimate with-out props or aids.

e. Teach the men to study the ground between

476

them and the target. Use typical combat targets,to include trees, bushes, rocks, ridge lines, edgesof woods, weapons, positions, buildings, andbridges.

f. Use varied backgrounds such as the sky,woods, open fields, and bodies of water.

g. Give the men practice in estimating variedranges from 100 to 1,000 yards; however, con-centrate on ranges of 600 yards and under.

335. EFFECT OF RIFLE AND AUTOMATIC RIFLE FIRE

Use the blackboard for instruction and demon-strate the effects of rifle fire by having severalriflemen fire tracer bullets. Trajectory, dangerspace, dispersion, classes of fire, and related mat-ters should be covered. All men should be re-quired to have a ready understanding of thecommon terms used in this phase of training.

336. FIRE COMMANDS

a. Begin with targets that are clearly visibleand easily recognized. Have the men keep theirfire commands brief, clear, and simple. When theyprogress to indistinct targets, encourage them touse reference points and finger measurements intheir commands.

b. Landscape target panels can be effectivelyused during fire command training. In inclementweather they can be used indoors.

337. APPLICATION OF FIRE

a. Devote enough time and explanation to the

477

method of fire distribution (using a blackboard)to insure that all men fully understand it andcan explain it in their own words.

b. Use a squad firing tracer ammunition todemonstrate the methods of applying fire.

Section VIII. LANDSCAPE TARGET: FIRING

338. GENERAL

Explain and demonstrate the procedure forscoring, for zeroing rifles, and for firing on thelandscape targets. The ability to.give and under-stand an oral fire command is important in thisphase of training. Before firing any exercise,give all the men practical work in giving oralfire commands for targets on the landscape panels.

339. EXERCISE NO. 1

a. Purpose. This exercise is used to teach tar-get designation and to show the effect of concen-trated fire.

b. Method. The squad leader directs the fire ofhis squad at a point target indicated to him bythe instructor.

340. EXERCISE NO. 2

a. Purpose. This exercise is used to teach tar-get designation and the division of the squad fireon two point targets.

b. Method. The instructor indicates two pointtargets to the squad leader. The squad leader

478

divides his squad fire between the two targetsas directed by the instructor. The scores on eachtarget are combined to give the total score forthe exercise.

341. EXERCISE NO. 3

a. Purpose. This exercise is used to teach firecommands, fire distribution, and fire control fordiverting part of the fire of the squad to a sud-denly appearing target.

b. Method. The instructor indicates a targetof width (linear target) to the squad leader. Thesquad leader applies the fire of his squad to thistarget. After firing has commenced, the instruc-tor indicates and gives the nature of a point tar-get on either flank. He then directs the squadleader to shift the fire from the first to the secondtarget. A simple method of scoring this type ofexercise is to add the value of hits on the pointtarget, the value of hits on the target of width,and the score for distribution on the target ofwidth, and divide this sum by two. This providesa score for the problem on a basis of a possible100 points.

Secion IX. FIELD TARGET FIRING

342. TERRAIN

a. In preparing problems for field target fir-ing, an important consideration is the selectionof terrain which fulfills the requirements of safe-

479

ty regulations (SR 385-310-1). 'Safety angles,target positions, and other related details shouldbe plotted on a map and coordinated with unitsin adjoining areas.

b. Where possible, select varied terrain suit-able for several squads firing at one time. Con-trol the firing from a centrally located position.If possible, use ground that is not familiar to themen being trained.

343. THE RANGE

a. Ranges for field firing exercises can be effi-ciently operated without an elaborate system ofshelters and dugouts. Simple pits to accommodatethe target operators are sufficient (fig. 129).

b. Avoid altering the natural appearance ofthe terrain when locating and camouflaging tar-gets and when locating and constructing pits.

Figure 129. A method of displaying a surprise target torepresent skirmishers. (Cutaway behind pit preventsricochet rounds from rebounding into pit.)

480

Figure 130. A surprise target at the pit. (See figure131 for details of operation.)

.. ..

Figure 131. A method of exposing a surprise target.(See figure 130 for front view.)

c. When targets are placed in the rear or toone side of the pits, the likelihood of ricochetsfalling into the pits is minimized. If tracer am-munition is to be used, it is best to have coveredpits. See figure 130 for a view from the firingline and figures 131 and- 132 for rear views. It

481

Figure 132. A method of exposing a surprise targetmoving along the ground (crawling man).

is desirable to have all pits and the firing lineconnected by telephone. If available, small port-able two-way voice radio sets may be used.

344. TARGETSa. Targets may be improvised or they may be

obtained from the Ordnance Department.b. A stationary target may be represented by

E or F (ordnance) targets placed on stakes anddriven in the ground or set in sockets.

c. A surprise target that can appear and dis-appear may be made by using E or F targetsfastened to an I-beam, rope, or pole, and operatedby a man in a pit (figs. 129-132, 134-138).

d. A movable field target may be made byfastening E or F targets to a sled, or by suspend-ing such targets from a wire (figs. 133 and 138).

482

e. In the field, targets should be placed in loca-tions that would be used by an intelligent enemy.They should not be prominently exposed norshould they be in a regular line (figs. 139 and140). Targets should vary in size and in degreeof concealment. The exposure of surprise targets,kept out of sight at the beginning of an exer-cise, may be indicated by firing blank ammuni-tion or by using other noise- or smoke-producing

Figure 133. A method of raising surprise pointtargets. (Pull rope and counterweight in rear.)

. -

Figure 134. A method of raising surprise targets(linear target).

483

Figure 135. A method of raising a surprise targetin a tree (sniper).

Figure 136. A surprise target appearing in a window.

484

Figure 137. A method of raising a surprise targetfrom the pit.

equipment near the target (figs. 141, 142, and143). To test the skill of the squad leader indesignating targets and in adjusting fire, targetsmay be placed so they can be seen with the bin-ocular but not with the naked eye.

f. The appearance of the targets from the fir-ing line will depend a great deal on the directionof the sun, the background of the targets, andthe angle at which the targets are placed. These

485

factors should be considered when placing targetsfor an exercise.

345. SAFETY

a. In general, safety precautions for known-distance range firing apply with equal force tofield target firing (SR 385-3'10-1). Safety ofpersonnel is of primary importance during exer-cises fired with live ammunition. To this end,exercises should be planned to fit the trainingstage of each unit.

Figure 138. An arrangement for moving a surprise

Figure 138. An arrangement for moving a surprisetarget along a horizontal line (running figure).

486

idol.- -*-. _

Figure 139. A method of setting up targets torepresent skirmishers.

Figure 140. A method of breaking the outlines ofsilhouette targets.

b. The officer in charge of an exercise is re-sponsible for the safe conduct of the firing. It ishis duty to initiate and enforce instructions thatwill provide maximum personnel safety. No of-ficer may modify his instructions who does notassume responsibility for the safety of the firing.

c. Firing will not start until the range is clear,the pit details are under cover, and all safety

487

precautions have been complied with. On com-pletion of each exercise, the officer in charge willhave all rifles unloaded and inspected and allammunition collected. After all rifles are cleared,the targets are scored for hits.

,-A* ;0-_=- __ - - _

Figure 141. An arrangement for showing a surprise(point) target and creating machine gun fire for soundeffect. Note that dust is raised by the strike of lightmachine gun rounds into the earth.

Figure 142. An arrangement for raising surprise targetsand producing fire to attract attention. (A cardboardshield protects the light machine gun from dirt.)

488

Lp -: (g

TS \ ..9IT

a9

489

I~Si ..... 0 :i ~, i??:iS! : :!i

I49

490~~~8~ ~ l -: i

490

Section X. TRAINING AIDS

346, GENERAL

There is an old saying that one picture is wortha thousand words. With this principle in mind,our army uses working models, charts, and othersuitable visual training aids for conducting train-ing. Excellent rifle training aids are availablethrough normal supply channels or they can beconstructed locally. Some recommendations andsuggestions concerning the construction and useof the various rifle training aids are listed below.

a. Scrap lumber in good condition may be usedto construct models. Hardwood is recommendedfor model parts that rub together or have strainon them. Other materials which are needed inmaking models are nails, screws, and lengths ofscreen door spring.

b. Charts and models should be painted withcontrasting colors to help the class locate the vari-ous parts.

c. Models should be mounted on stands so theycan be seen by the entire class.

d. Working models are designed only to showthe functioning of the parts, so they will lacksome of the refinements of the weapon. Some ofthe parts on the model are cut away in order toshow parts not otherwise visible which play animportant role in functioning.

e. A scale of one to ten will enlarge drawingsor models to a size large enough to be seen at adistance of 75 feet.

491

'PLY'6ITOD 8OINRT 1/4'4 PLYItOOO

HOLE IN CENTER

HIN"ED

FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE

1/4X2-1/E2 STRIP- 37T- r. ACROSS TOP

REAR VIEWEFT SIDE

Figure 145. A model sight picture device.

f. All lettering on charts model s, and other

training aids must be large enough to read easily.Lettering 21/2 inches high can be read at a dis-tance of 75 feet.

g. Charts which are painted or drawn on heavypaper will be just as satisfactory as those paintedon wood. Charts painted on wood will withstandharder usage than paper charts.

h. Before using a multicolored chart or work-

492

ing model, explain the significance of the variouscolors.

347. WOODEN WORKING MODELS

Large scale working models (fig. 144) are ex-cellent training aids in teaching the functioningof the M1 rifle. When such working models are

TARGET(PAINTED WHITE WITH

BLACK BULLS-EYE)

REAR SIGHT-PEEP OR OPENFRONT SIGHT' . _ . / (PAINTED BLACK)

(PAINTED BLACK)

WOODEN BAR

(PAINTED BLACK)K)i IEYEP EC

44 4 TOP VIEW3i< 9I

® SIDE VIEW

TARGET PEEP SIGHT EYEPIECE(A) (B) (C)

]ErqFRONT SIGHT OPEN SIGHT(E) FOLD ON DOTTED LINE

(D) (F

. ® CONSTRUCTION ]FOLDED L' SHAPE

(G) HOLE 1/2" FROM TOP CENTER(H)

Figure 146. Diagram for making a sighting andaiming bar.

493

not already available, their construction for useon a one-time basis is not recommended. How-ever when they are to be used by several unitsor can be used repeatedly by the same unit, theirconstruction is warranted.

348. EXAMPLES OF TRAINING AIDS

a. Figures 145 to 150 show some of the moreimportant training aids that easily can be con-structed and profitably used in teaching riflemarksmanship.

IN THE CENTER OF THE BULLSEYE A PIN HOLE ISMADE LARGE ENOUGH TO ADMIT A PENCIL POINT

THE PAPER DISC IS PASTEDONTO THE TIN DISC

HANDLE

Figure 147. The sighting disk.

494

Figure 148. The rear sight windage gage.

495

Figure 149. The one-man sighting and aiming device.

b. A device similar to the one shown in figures149 and 150 can be used to show a sight picture,with or without a bull's-eye and with or withouterrors in alinement.

c. By using your imagination and ingenuity,you can improvise other training aids with avail-able material to help you to clarify your instruc-tion.

496

/111 ~~~~~~~~

- o~~~~~

· *z ', -.-

r~~~~~~ 0

-I. -I"

rN

497

°o XX

t K e 5

Y r ~( -io

o : o s loo Aft MU 0

49 2

- o 498

', e 22 2 DO

v;~~~~4 2 -

~~'AL.. ~ ~ · :T ~'

349. CHARTS

a. Charts may be made to illustrate any partof the manual if they will aid the instruction.Some of the points that can best be presented bya chart are-

(1) Steps in functioning.

(2) Stoppages.

(3) Steps in cleaning the rifle.

(4) Clock. system of describing wind direc-tion.

(5) Elements of the fire command and tar-get designation.

b. Use these and other charts in conjunctionwith lectures and demonstrations to help conveyimportant points of instruction.

c. Other training aids which will be of greathelp and which can be obtained through normalsupply channels are-

(1) Appropriate training films and filmstrips.

(2) Graphic training aids. One such graphictraining aid is shown in figure 151. Thisis a plastic disassembly mat used duringinstruction in mechanical training.

499

CHAPTER 7

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

350. GENERAL

a. The safety of personnel is the first concernof everyone during any exercises in which liveammunition is fired. To minimize the possibilityof accidents, certain safety regulations have beenestablished (SR 385-310-1). All officers conduct-ing any type of firing are responsible for-

(1) Becoming familiar with the safety rulescovered in these regulations and any ad-ditional safety rules pertaining to thehandling of specific weapons or ammuni-tion as found in field and technical man-uals or local safety precautions.

(2) Teaching you the meaning of these safe-ty regulations.

b. You are responsible for your own safetyand that of others around you. You are also re-quired to help enforce safety regulations on therange.

c. The precautions covered in this chapter arenot intended to replace the regulations containedin SR 385-310-1.

351. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, MECHANICAL TRAIN-ING

The following list gives the more importantsafety precautions to be observed during mechan-ical training.

500

a. Start observing safety precautions as soonas you receive a weapon.

b. Never playfully or carelessly point yourweapon at anyone.

c. Check the chamber and receiver to see thatthere are no live rounds in the weapon.

d. Check among the spare parts and tools tomake sure that there are no live rounds amongthem.

e. Check all dummy rounds to make sure thatthere is no live ammunition among them.

352. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, PREPARATORY MARKS-MANSHIP TRAINING

The following list covers safety precautions foryou to observe during preparatory marksman-ship.

a. Comply with all safety precautions pre-scribed for mechanical training.

b. On the command CEASE FIRING, takeyour finger off the trigger and lock the rifle.

c. Before leaving the preparatory line, clearyour rifle, open the bolt, and lock the rifle.

d. Keep the muzzle pointed in the air anddown range. (On the range you will often hearyour instructor tell you to keep your weaponpointing in the air and down range. You willfirst hear this precautionary warning duringpreparatory marksmanship. Observe this rulewhether you are on the preparatory field or car-rying your rifle to or from the firing line on therange.)

501

353. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, RANGE FIRING

a. Safety precautions are important during alltraining, especially on the range. Do not relaxyour observance of safety precautions or assumethat a weapon is unloaded until you have checkedit carefully.

b. Safety precautions that have been estab-lished-for mechanical training and preparatorymarksmanship phases of instruction also applyduring range practice. In addition to those safetyprecautions, observe the following:

(1) Donot draw or issue ammunition untilthe officer in charge of firing gives thecommand.

(2) Do not start firing until all safety re-quirements have been fulfilled. Theserequirements include:

(a) Orientation of all firers regardingsafety regulations and other pertinentinformation.

(b) All designated road blocks and roadguards are established and maintaineduntil the completion of firing.

(c) The officer in charge of operating thepits, who is responsible for the safetyof the pit detail, reports on clearanceof the pits to the officer in charge offiring. A red flag is displayed abovethe pits until a clearance has beengiven to the officer in charge of firing.The command to lower the flag' isgiven by the officer in charge of firing.

502

(d) A red streamer is displayed from aprominent place on the range duringall firing. Do not fire unless it is dis-played. The range streamer serves asa warning to everyone who enters therange that firing is being conducted.

(e) All weapons are checked by an officerto see that none contain live ammuni-tion. Your weapon is checked as soonas you arrive on the range. Considerevery weapon as being loaded until itis examined and found to be unloaded.

(f) At the same time weapons are checkedfor safety clearance, they are checkedfor obstructions in the bore such asrust-preventive compound, cleaningpatches, and mud or snow.

(g) There are safety limits on the rightand left flank of the range. Do notfire past them. You will be givennecessary information about the rightand left safety limits before firing.

c. During firing.(1) Load and unload your weapon only on

the firing line.(2) Load your weapon only on command of

the officer in charge of firing.(3) The commands COMMENCE FIRING

and CEASE FIRING are made loud andclear. When you hear the commandCEASE FIRING, take your finger offthe trigger and lock the rifle. Wait for

503

further instructions. Anyone who con-siders it necessary, to insure safety, maygive the command CEASE FIRING.

(4) As soon as the firing exercise is com-pleted or on conimand, clear your weapon-open the bolt and lock the rifle.

(5) Do not move in front of the firing linefor any reason unless you are directedto do so by the officer in charge offiring.Before this permission is granted, hewill order all rifles to be cleared and willhave each one. checked by an officer ornoncommissioned officer in charge ofthat portion of the firing line.

(6) No rifle is moved in front of the firingline.

(7) When moving back and forth to the fir-ing line, carry your weapon pointing inthe air and down range at all times.

(8) Do not remove your weapon from thefiring line without permission. Thesafety officer or one of his representa-tives will check your weapon to see thatit is clea r.

(9) Do not carry your rifle loaded except incombat or during combat firing exer-cises. During combat firing exercisesyou are told when to load your weapon.

(10) You may practice positions and triggersqueeze on an extension of the firingline. No practice may be done behindthe firing line.

504

(11) Take proper care of the ammunition.Do not grease or oil it. Do not allow itto remain in the direct rays of the sun.Inspect the ammunition carefully. Turnin any defective rounds including mis-fires. Do not alter ammunition in anyway.

(12) Report all accidents to the officer incharge of firing at once. SR 385-310-1prescribes the report that he makes foraccidents involving faulty weapons orammunition. SR 385-10-40 prescribesthe report to be made for accidents thatare not the result of faulty weapons orammunition.

(13) Before throwing away cardboard am-munition cartons, inspect them to seethat they contain no live rounds or brass.

(14) No member of the pit detail leaves thepits until the pit officer obtains author-ity to do so from the safety firing officer.

d. After firing.

(1) Separate and turn in all brass and liverounds. When turning in brass, checkit to see that there are no empty caseswith unexploded primers.

(2) Before leaving the range your weaponis inspected again for live ammunition.

(3) An inspection is also made to make surethat no one carries live ammunition orempty cartridges from the range.

505

e. When firing at moving targets.

(1) Do not fire until the right and left safetylimits are -determined. The officer incharge of firing sees that markers clear-ly identify safety limits. Do not fire out-side these limits.

(2) Whenever going into the moving targetarea for any reason, such as making re-pairs, you must carry a red flag, whetheron foot or in a vehicle.

506

APPENDIX I

REFERENCES

AR 775-10 Qualification in Arms and Am-munition Allowances

SR 110-1-1 Index of Army Motion Picturesand Film Strips

SR 310-20-3 Military PublicationsIndex of Technical Manuals,

Technical Regulations, Tech-nical Bulletins, Supply Bulle-tins, Lubrication Orders, Mod-ification Work Orders, Tablesof Organization and Equip-ment, Reduction Tables,Tables of Allowances, Tablesof Organization, and Tables of.Equipment.

SR 320-5-1 Dictionary of United StatesArmy Terms

SR 385-10-40 Reports of Accident ExperienceSR 385-310-1 Regulations for Firing Ammuni-

tion for Training, TargetPractice, and Combat

FM 7-10 Rifle Company, Infantry Regi-ment

FM 21-5 Military TrainingFM 21-8 Military Training AidsFM 21-25 Elementary Map and Aerial

Photograph ReadingFM 21-40 Defense Against Chemical At-

tack

507

FM 21-75 Combat Training of the Indi-vidual Soldier and Patrolling

FM 23-15 Browning Automatic Rifle, Cali-ber .30, .M1918A2

FM 23-30 Hand and Rifle GrenadesTM 3-220 DecontaminationTM 9-855 Targets, Target Material, and

Training Course Lay-OutTM 9-1275 Ordnance Maintenance, U. S.

Rifles, Caliber .30TM 9-1900 Ammunition, GeneralATP 7-300 Infantry RegimentATP 21-11ON Basic Military Training

508

APPENDIX II

DESTRUCTION OF ORDNANCE MATERIEL

1. DESTROYING THE RIFLE IN EVENT OF IMMINENTCAPTURE

a. The destruction of ordnance materiel to pre-vent its capture and use by the enemy is orderedand carried out only on authority delegated bythe division or higher commander.

b. The following principles govern the destruc-tion of small arms.:

(1) Make the destruction as complete as thecircumstances permit.

(2) When there is not enough time for com-plete destruction, destroy the parts es-sential to the operation of the weapon.Begin with those parts most difficult forthe enemy to duplicate.

(3) Destroy the same essential parts of eachweapon to prevent the enemy from re-constructing a complete weapon fromseveral damaged ones.

c. Before they reach the combat zone, indi-viduals will be trained to destroy the weaponswith which they are armed. Training will notinvolve the actual destruction of mat6riel.

d. Of the two methods outlined below for de-stroying the rifle, follow the first when possible.

(1) Method No. 1. Dismount the rifle intothree main groups. Remove the operat-

509

ing rod spring, operating rod, and thebolt. Grasp the rear end of barrel andreceiver group with both hands andsmash the barrel against a tree, rock,or firm ground until it is bent. Distortthe operating rod spring. Remove thefiring pin, insert its point into the holein the face of the bolt and break it off.Wedge the operating rod handle into thereceiver, stand on the receiver, and bypulling up on the operating rod tube,bend the operating rod. Break off thehammer hooks by striking against the.receiver. Break the stock group. Thetime required for this method: 21/2minutes.

(2) Method No. 2. Insert the bullet end ofa complete round into the muzzle andbend the case slightly, distending themouth of the case to permit pulling outthe bullet. Spill some of the powder;retain a sufficient amount to cover thebottom. of the case to a depth of approxi-mately one-eighth inch. Reinsert thebullet in the case, point first. Chamberand fire this round with the reducedcharge; the bullet will stick in the bore.Chamber one complete round, lay therifle on the ground and fire it, using a30-foot lanyard. (A lanyard may be im-provised by tying together several thongsfrom oiler and thong cases). Use thebest available cover, as this means of

510

destruction may be dangerous to the per-son destroying the weapon. The timerequired for this method: 2 or 3 minutes.

(3) Warning. Do not attempt to destroy therifle by firing it with the muzzle stuckin the ground.

2. DESTRUCTION OF AMMUNITION

When time and materials are available, ammu-nition may be destroyed as follows: break out allpacked ammunition from boxes or cartons. Stackthe ammunition in a heap. Stack or pile wood,or available gasoline and oil in cans or drums,around the ammunition. Throw onto the pile allavailable inflammable material such as scrapwood and brush. Pour any remaining gasolineor oil over the pile. Sufficient inflammable mate-rial must be used to insure a very hot fire. Ignitethe materials and take cover. Thirty to 60 min-utes will be required to destroy the ammunitioncarried by small combat units.

511

INDEXPardgraph Page

Accessories, rifle, description and use of ---------- 60 104Action of rifle:

After firing last round -------- ------------- 32 72

On loading a full clip -------------------- -29 66Advice to instructors -------- ----------- -248-349 387Aerial targets ----------------------------- 211, 212 228

Firing position for ----------------------- 104 192Technique of fire ----------------------- 212 228

Aid men, location of ---------- -------- 151 278Aiming:

Box and disk --- - - - - - 81, 82 138, 140

Device, M2 -------------------------------- 60 104Point:

In combat ------------ = ----------- 208 324Determination of __-.--__ ------------ 209 325Moving personnel ------------------- 208 324Moving vehicles _-. ....--------------.209 325

Sighting and, demonstration -------- ------ 311 431

Aircraft, firing on -------------- 211 328

Alert, use in fire commands -------------------- 225 345Ammunition ---------------- 6------ ----- 61-70 115

Allowances:Record firing --......- --------------- 318 453Transition firing ---------------------- 323 458

Ballistic data ----------------------------. 67 122Blank, precautions in use -..- - ---- 68 123

Boxes, markings -------------------------- 65 120

Care, handling and preservation --- --------- 65 120

Care during chemical attack --------------- 56 98Classification ------------- ------------ -62 118Description ----------- -61 115

512

Paragraph Page

Ammunition-ContinuedDestruction ------------------------ App. II 509Distribution during firing exercises -- --------240 376Handling ----------- --------------------.65 120Hangfires ------------- ------------------- 70 124Identification ------------------------ 64 119Lot number ------------ ---------------- 63 119Service, precautions in firing ----------------- 69 123Storage ---------------------------- - 66 122Tables, line of ----------- -----------------151 278Tracer --------------------------- 217 336

Appendages, rifle ------------------------------- 59 103Area fire, definitioni and use -------------------- 230 358Assault fire, description ---------------------- 230 358Assembly:

Barrel and receiver group ----- -----------22, 23 45, 56Bolt --------------------------------- 22 45Bullet guide ------------------------------- 22 45Clip ejector ------------ -------------------19 39Clip latch ----------------------------..- 20 43Follower arm ------------------------------ 22 45Follower assembly ------------------------- 22 45Follower rod ---------- -- __ -------------- 22 45Gas cylinder, lock ------------------------ 18 38Hammer spring housing --------------------- 19 39Operating rod ----------- -------------- 22 45Operating rod catch assembly ---------------- 22 45Operating rod spring -------- --------------.22 45Rear sight, modified ----------------------- 21 43Rifle .--.............------------- 17 37Stock group -------- ...---------------- -11 12Test for --------------------------------- 24 56Three main groups ------------------------- 23 56Trigger housing group -------- ------------- 19 39

Assistant instructors, training of . ........249, 304 387, 423A target:

Description of ---------------------------- 200 3171,000-inch range ---------- ----------_-- -200 317100-yard -------------------------- 200 317

Attack, fire for the ----------- -------------- 229 355

513

Paragraph Page

Automatic rifle:Effect of fire ------- ---- 223 343

Ballistics, data, .30 caliber ammunition --------- 67 122Bar, sighting and aiming:

How to make ----------------------------- 348 494Use of ------------------------------------ 79 133

Barrel:Reflector, description -... ................60 104Rifle ------------------------------- - 3 4

Barrel and receiver group:Assembly ------------------------ -22, 23 45, 56Disassembly- .-.............. __ .. 11, 12 12, 14

Battle sight:To set ------------------------- 173 288Use in combat ---------------------- 242 378Use with moving targets ---------------- 204 322

Bayonet ----- -------------------------------- 59 103Beaten zone -......................... 221 339Blacking, sight ---------------------- 80 .137Blank ammunition, precautions in firing --------- 68 123Bolt:

Assembly ----------------------- 22 45Disassembly ------------------------ 12 14

Bone support in firing positions ------------------ 89 155Boxes, ammunition, marking of ------------------ 64 119Breakage, rifle, procedure in case of ---------- 158 282Breathing:

Demonstration by instructor --------------- 312 435During firing ---------88 155

Brush and thong, use of ------------------------- 60 104B Target, use and description ----------------- 200 317

Bullet guide:Assembly ---------------------------- 22 45Disassembly ------------------------ 12 14

Bullet, observing the strike --------------------- 217 336

Cadence, sustained fire exercise ------------- 111 202Calling the shot ------------------------------- 106 198

Questions on ----------------------- 138 248Using clock system ------------------- 123 228

514

Paragraph Page

Care and cleaning (rifle):After firing ----------------- - -------------- 52 92Before and during range firing - - 51 89Bolt ------------------------------ 52, 53 92,94Bore ------------ 49, 52, 53 84,92,94Chamber ------------------- - -------- -52 92Chemical attack -------------- - ------------56 98Climatic conditions -------------- - --------- 57 100Cold climates ---------------- - -------------57 100Combat, during ------------------------ - - - .53 94Gas cylinder ----- ---------------------- 52 92Instructor's demonstration ------- - ---------302 422Materials, lubricants, rust preventives ------- 49 84Questions on --------------- - ---------- 138 248Storage, preparation for ---------- - --------- 54 96Storage, when received from ------- - ---------55 98Surfaces, outer --------------- - ------------ 52 92When exposed to salt water, rain ------------ 53 94When no firing is done .........---. ... 50 88

Care of ammunition --------------- - ----------- 65 120Carrier, target ----------------- - --------------196 313Cartridge:

Classification ---------------- - ------- 62 118Dummy:

Advantages in instruction firing -------.164 284Use ------------------ - -------------- 34 74

Extractor ------------------ - --------- 60 104Identification ---------------- - ------- 64 119Parts of the- .------------ - --.....- 61 115

Chambering:During forward movement -------- - -------- 30 67Failure to chamber ------------- - -----------47 83Firing cycle, in ______----------------- - --- 25 57

Characteristics, rifle 3_____------- -..........- - - .3 4Charts:

Construction ------------- - --_ ---------- 346 491(of) Disassembly --------------- - ------ 8 9Progress, marksmanship training ------------ 76 128Use as training aids ----------- - -----------349 499

Chemical attack, care of rifle during -------------- 56 98

515

Paragraph Page

Cleaning materials, rifle ____--------------------- 49 84Cleaning rod, M3 ------------------------------ 60 104Clearing the rifle -........- ........- 42 80Clicks ------------------------------- 43 80Clip:

Action when loading ------- ---------------.29 66Loading ------------------------------ 35 74Partial loading ---------------------------- 39 77

Clip ejector:Assembly ------------- ---------------- 19 39Disassembly -------------------------- 15 29Function ----.........- --------------------26 58

Clip latch:Action in loading -------------------------- 29 66Assembly ------------- ---------------- 20 43Disassembly ------------------------ - 14 29

Clock system, to name wind direction ---------. 126 231Clock system, use in calling shots --------------- 123 228Clothing to be worn during firing ----- --- _-----152 280Coach, duties of, during:

Aerial target firing --------- ---------------104 192Instruction firing -------- --_ . ...........161 283Preparatory work ------------------------- 75 '128Slow fire .......- .---------------------. 179 295Sustained fire ---------------------------- 180 296Trigger squeeze exercises --------- __--- 109, 313 200, 439

Coaching -------------------------- 161 283Instruction firing -------------------------- 178 292Position of coach .------ --- -- -178 292Restrictions during record -firing ------------- 186' 301

Cocking:Definition ------------ --------------------.25 57During rearward movement of operating rod__ -31 69

Combination tool, description and use --- -------- 60 104Commands:

Fire:Elements of ----------------------- 225 345Known-distance range ---------------- 187 3051,000-inch range -------- ------------- 187 305Slow fire ---------------------- 183, 187 298, 305

516

Paragraph Page

Commands-ContinuedFire-Continued

Sustained fire --------------------- 118, 187 219,1305Reloading ------------------------- 117 216Telephone ------------------------ 166 282

Concentrated fire, explanation, use -------------- 230 358Cone of fire -------------- --------------------220 339Contamination of rifle from chemical attack ------ 56 98Control, fire ---------------------------------- 233 363Control stand ----------------------------- 151 278Courses, firing:

A ----------------------- 1------------ 41 261B ---------------------------------- 142 264C ---------------------------------- 143 265D ---------------------------------- 144 268E ---------------------------------- 203 319Alternate transition ..--------------- 1i45, 325 270, 465Familiarization --------------------------- 146 272Standard --------------------------------- 140 255

Cover, use in combat -------------------------- 242 378Critique after firing exercises ------ -------------244 381Cross-ankled position --------------------------- 99 177Cross-legged position ---------- -----------------99 177Crouch position ------------------------------- 103 189Cycle, functioning -------------------------- 27 62

Damages to rifle, procedure in case of ---------- 158 282Danger space within trajectory -------------- 219 337Decontaminating agents -....... ......... 49 84Defense, fire in the ---------------------------- 229 355Defensive position:

Platoon -- - - - - 230 *358Squad- ------------ -.230 358'

Deflection rule:Explanation -------------------- 121 226Use ------------------------------ 122 226

Demonstrations during instruction -------------- 310 431Destruction of ordnance mat6riel ------------ App. II 509

Determination, range:Advice to instructors- ........... 328 468

517

Paragraph Page

Determination, range-ContinuedExercises in -------------------------- 329-333 472Methods -------------- ------------ 215 332Rules for instructors ------....- ------------- 334 476

Direction:Fire command for ------------------------- 225 345To target --... .....------ . ..........225 345

Discipline, fire ------------- ---------------- 232 362Disking:

Procedure - _'-........- . ..........192 309Regulations governing --------------------- 186 301

Disassembly:Advice to instructor -------------------- 299 421Barrel and receiver group-- . ............11, 12 12, 14Bolt --------------------------------- 12 14Bullet guide -..... __ .........--....- . 12 14Chart for ----------------------------- 8 9Clip ejector ------------- ----------------- 15 29Clip latch -------------- ------------------ 14 29Ejector and spring --------- --------------- 12 14Field stripping ------------------------------ 9 10Follower arm ----------------------- 12 14Follower arm pin --------------------------- 12 14Follower assembly - -_ ---------------- 12 14Follower rod ------------------------------ 12 14Gas cylinder --------------------------- -16 34Hammer pin ------------------------------ 15 29Hammer spring housing ---------------------- 15 29Method of ------------- -------------------10 12Operating catch assembly ------------------- 12 14Operating rod_ - _ _---------- -- 12 14Operating rod spring ----------------------- 12 14Rear sight ___-. . ......-------------------.13 25Stock group ------------------------------ 11 12Three main groups ---------------------- -11 12Trigger housing group -. . ......_ 11, 15 12, 29

Dispersion, explanation, cone of ----------- 220 339Distributed fire ----------------------------- 230 358Dry cleahing solvent ---------------------------- 49 84Dummy cartridges, use -- ------- 34, 164 74, 284

518

Paragraph Page

E target ------------------------ 200 317

Ejection:Definition --------------------------- 25 57During firing .. . ........................31 69

Ejector and spring:Assembly -.................... .22 45Disassembly -........................ 12 14

Elements of fire commands ----------------- 225 345Elevation and deflection rule:

Adjusting rear sight for ------------------- 120 222Explanation -------------------- 121 226Use ----- _'...................122 226

Enemy, representation in field target firing -. ....242 378

Enfilade fire, definition .------- . ------------.222 340Equipment:

Firing line -.......................... 199 314Known-distance target ----------------- 305 423Marksmanship - . .......... 199 314Pit ---------------- ------- ---- --- 199 314Positions, firing -......................... 312 435Preparatory field -.................. 199 314Range -........................ 199 314Range firing ------------------------------. 199 314Range procedure demonstration ------------- 319 453Sighting and aiming exercises - . ..__.__ 77, 311 130, 431Standards ------------------------------- 305 423Sustained fire demonstration .------------ 314 442Target ___---.......- ---............. 196 313Zeroing rifle demonstration ---------------- 315 445

Estimation, range:By eye ---------------- -__ -- 216 332Exercises ---------------------------- 328-334 468Finger measurement method -------------- 225 345Instruction notes ---------------------- 328-334 468Lateral distances ----------------------- 225 345Tables, factors affecting ------------------ 216 332Using tracer ammunition and observation 217 336

of fire.100-yard unit _-_- --------------- 216, 328-334 332, 468

519

Paragraph Page

Examination:Before range firing ..- ................. 137, 316 246, 446Check list ---- --- -- --- -- --- -- --- --316 446County fair method ------------------- 137 246

Exercises:Field target firing -- - - - -243 380Firing, procedure for conducting ------------ 243 380Landscape target firing ----------------- 338-341 478Position -.....................- 85 144Range determination (estimation) ----- 328-334 468Reloading -....................... 117 216Sighting and aiming:

With sighting bar ---------------------- 79 133With aiming box ------------------- 81, 82 138, 140

Sustained fire -............. 1.9119, 314 221, 442Extraction:

Action during firing ------------------------ 31 69Definition --------------------------- 25 57

Extractor:Assembly_ -........................... 22 45Disassembly_ -....................... 12 14

Extractor, ruptured cartridge ---------- 60 104

F target ..-------------------------- - 200 317Familiarization course:

Allotment of hours ------------------------ 253 389Explanation ----------------------- 146 272Subject schedule .- . ........290, 291 414, 416

Familiarization firing, definition ---------------- 148 247Feeding:

Definition --------------------------------- 25 57During rearward movement of the operating 31 69

rod.Fields, preparatory marksmanship ---------- 307-309 424Field stripping:

Defirnition ----------------.------------------ 5 7Explanation ------------------------------ 9 10

Field target firing:Safety precautions ..---------------------- 345 486Targets for ------------------------- - 344 482

520

Paragraph Page

Field target firing-ContinuedTerrain for ------- --- 342 479Training --------------------------- -241 378

Field target location ----------- 344 482

Finger measurement ---------------------- 225 345

Fire:(on) Aircraft -................... 211 328Application of --------------------------- 337 477Area ------------------------------------- 230 358Assault ..............-........ 230 358Classes of -------------------------------- 222 340Commands, slow and sustained . ... ......-. 187 305Concentrated .------- ............... 230 358Conduct of (transition) ---------------- 323 458Control ----------------------- 233 363

Command --------------------- 225 345Critique ----------------------- 244 381Transition firing ----------------- 323 458

Discipline -------------------------- 232 362Distributed ------------------------ -230 358Distribution .--------- ....... 230 358Effect of, rifle and automatic rifle ------ 218-223 337

Critique -.................. 244 381Discussion bylinstructor ------- 335 477

Fixed -....................... 234 364Flanking ------............... 222 340Frontal ----------------------- 222 340Grazing ----------------------- 222 340Landscape target --------------------- 235-240, 368,

338-341 478Oblique ---------- ............ 222 340Observation of ---------------------------- 217 336Overhead --------------..... 222 340Plunging -..... .... 222 340Power ------------------------- 4 6Rate: 231 362

Discussion and critique ----...... 244 381Sustainedilre.4exercises ----------- 110, 111, 201, 202,

118, 119 219, 221

521

Paragraph Page

Fire-ContinuedTechnique- ------- - -- 207, 210, 323,327,

212 328Technique of instructing --------------- 327 467

Firing:During low visibility --........ 234 364Field target ------------------- 241-247, 378,

342-345 479Instruction, course E ----------------- 203 319Landscape target ------------ 235-240, 368,

338-341 478Line, organization ----------------- 151 278Pin -------------------------------- 12 14

Alignment --------------------------- 30 67Withdrawal ---------------- 31 69

Position, critique -------------------- 244 381Positions, choice in combat -.. ..........-..242 378Procedure, transition firing ------------- 320-326 455Range (see Range, firing)Tables, instruction ------------------- 140-144 255

Flag, red, use in marking targets - . ...: . .......192 309

Flanking fire ------------- _-..............222 340

Flinching; detection, prevention, 178 292remedies for

Follower arm:Assembly -- 22 45Disassembly ------------------------- 12 14

Follower arm pin:Assembly ----------------------- 22 45Disassembly -.................... 12 14

Follower assembly:Assqmbly ---------------------------- 22 45Disassembly -------------------------- 12 14

Follower rod:Assembly -.--- -- -- 22 45Disassembly ------------------- 12 14

Follow-through - . ............... 107 198Forward movement, operating rod --------------- 30 67Frontal fire ---- 222 340

522

Paragraph PageFunctioning:

Advice to instructor ----------------------- 300 421Cycle of ------------------------------- 25, 27 62Rifle ------------------------- 25-32 57Rifle, loaded with a full clip ----------------- 27 62Trigger housing group -------------------- 26 58

Gas, action during firing ------------------------ 31 69Gas cylinder:

Assembly ------------------------ 18 38Disassembly_ -....................... 16 34

Gas cylinder lock screw:Assembly ---------------------------- 18 38Disassembly ------------------------- 16 34

Gloves, use during firing -_.-.......153 280Graduations, rear sight ------------------------- 43 80Grazing fire ---------------------------------- 222 340Grenade launcher --------------------- 59 103Grooves and lands . . ..................3 4Groups, three main; of rifle:

Assembly ---------------------------- 23 56Disassembly -------------------------- 10,11 12

Gun slings:Adjustment:

Hasty sling (leather) ---------------- 100 180Hasty sling (web) ----------------- 100 180Loop sling (leather) -.. . ...............86 145Loop sling (web) -------------- . 87 150

Placing on rifle --------------------------- 60 104Use of -... ...............................85 144

Hammer pin:Assembly 19 39Disassembly -------------------------- 15 29

Hammer spring housing:Assembly ---------------------------- 19 39Disassembly -------------- -. . .........15 29

Handling ammunition --------------- 65 120Hangfires- .. ........................70 124

523

Paragraph Page

Hasty sling:Adjustment, leather ------------------- 100 180Adjustment, web :.-- ___ 100 180

Hot climates, care and cleaning in .------------- 57 100

Identification, ammunition -... ..............64 119Immediate action:

Advice to instructors ----------------- 301 422Application ----------------------- 46 82Definition ----------------------------- 45 82Stoppages, use in -....................... 45-47 82

Importance of rifle training_ -2 2Inspection of rifles 306 424Instruction firing ------------------------- 163-180 284

Course A --------------------------- 141 261Course B- ------------- 142 264Course C -....................... 143 265Course D- -------------------------- 144 268Course E --------------------------------- 203 319Course, standard -------------------- 140 255Definition n.-... 140 255Explanation- -- - - -------. 139 253

Instructors, advice to:Firing:

Field target ---- -8--------------- 342-345 479Landscape target ------------------ 338-341 478Moving target -------------------- 320-326 455Transition --------------------- 320-326 455

Mechanical training ------------------- 298-303 419R ules for --------------------------------- 334 476Subject schedules and training notes:

Familiarization ---------------- 290-297 414Marksmanship ------------- 254-289 390

Technique of fire .-.. ........ ........327-337 467Training aids ------------------------ 346-349 491Training of assistant ----------------------- 249 387

Instruments authorized for use on range -------- 154 281

Kneeling position:Advice to instructor .... ...........-..312 435Alternate position -------------------- -94 169

524

Paragraph Page

Kneeling position-ContinuedAssuming the ......................-.. 92 163Errors in-_ ... .................._93 168From standing -- 114 212Reloading in m------- _'-...............117 216

Known-distance firing .-------- . . ............. 140 255Known-distance range:

Organization ----------------------- 151 278Zeroing on ------------- 168 286

Lands, grooves and ---------.............. _- - 3 4Landscape target -------------------- 235, 236 368

Direction indicators ---------- 236 368Range indicators ------------------- 236 368

Lateral distances, estimation -- - - -225 345Latrines, location --------------------------- 197 313Leads:

Aerial target firing -------------------- 212 328Moving figures in combat -------------- 208 324Moving vehicles ----------- 209 325

Leather sling:Adjusting ..........................- 86 145Use -.... ..85 144

Lecture and demonstrations:Positions --------------------------------- 312 435Sight changes, effect of wind, use of 315 445

score card.Sighting and aiming ----------------------- 311 431Sustained fire --- -- - -- 314 442Trigger squeeze ------------------- 313 439

Light, effect on aim --------------------------- 132 236Limitations of the rifle .-....................... 156 281Linear targets ------------------------- 239 372Loading:

Action with fulliclip ---------------------- 29 66Cartridge clip ------------------------------ 35 74During record firing --------- 159 282How to load rifle .. . .......-... ...........35 74How to partially load a clip .. . ......-. . . ....39 77Operating rifle as a single loader . . . ...-. . . ..38 77

525

Paragraph Page

Lock, gas cylinder, replacing the -_------------ -18 38Locking:

Definition -.............. 25 57Explanation ------------------------- 30 67

Loop sling adjustment ------------------- 86 145Lot number, ammunition___'_ -................... 63 119Lubricants ----------------------------- 49 84

Main groups, three:Assembly ---------------------------- 23 56Disassembly --------- _. . ..............11 12

Markings, ammunition box -------------------.- 64 119Marking targets:

Equipment for_ ___.........192 309Slow fire --------------------------------- 194 311Sustained fire ----------------------------- 195 311Zeroing ----------------------- 193 310

Marksmanship fields ---------------........ 307-309 424Marksmanship, moving targets:

Aerial targets ------------------------ 211, 212 328Fundamentals ------------------ 204-206 322Personnel --------------------- -207, 208 323, 324Vehicles ---------------------- -209, 210 325, 327

Marksmanship training:Allotment of hours -....................... 252 389Courses ------------------------ 139-147 253Equipment and targets - . ......._. 199, 200 314, 317Fundamentals --------------------- -71-73 125Instruction firing -........ ........163-180 284Moving vehicles ------- . .....326 465Phases ---- --------------------------. 73 126Pit operation ------------------ 188-198 307Preparatory --------------------- -74-138 127Principles ---------------------- 242 378Range firing ------------------- 148-151 274Record firing --------------------- 181-187 297Small-bore firing ---------------------- 201-203- 319Subjects, common to - . ....152-162 280

Materials, cleaning -.. .........................49 84Materiel, destruction -. . ........_....... App. II 509

526

Paragraph Page

Measure, unit of ---------------------------- 216 332Measurement, finger ------------------------- 225 345Mechanical training:

Instruction -------------------- 298 419Safety precautions ---------------- 351 500Subject schedule ------------------------- 254 390Training notes ------------------------ 256-262 399,

292-297 417Medical aid men ----------------------- 151 278Method of determining range ------------------- 215 332Method of disassembly ----- .......-..... 10 12Misses ------------------------ 186 301Models, construction -------------------- 346 491Models, wooden working ------- ------.-.---- -347 493Modified rear sight:

Assembly ---------------------- 21 43Battle sight ----------------------------- 173 288Disassembly .-. ..................... .13 25

Moving target firing instruction ------------- 320-326 455Moving targets ------------ . ...........204-212 322

Nomenclature of rifle parts ----------------------- 7 7

Objects, appearance in range estimation --------- 216 332Oblique fire --------------------------------- 222 340Observation[of fire -........................... 217 336Officer:

In charge of firing ------------------------- 150 277Noncommissioned, range ----------------- 1499' 276Pit -- -.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.- - 150 277Range ........-................ 149 276Unit range ------------------------------- 150 277

One-hand loading ------------------------------ 39 77Operating rod:

Assembly ----------------------- 22 45Disassembly ------------------------- 12 14

Operating rod and spring, action of -------------- 31 69Operating rod catch assembly:

Assembly -......................... 22 45Disassembly ------------------------- 12 14

527

Paragraph Page

Operating rod spring:Assembly_ ---------------------------- 22 45Disassembly ------------------------ 12 14

Operation of rifle ---------------------------- 33-44 74Operation, single load .-.. ......................38 77Operation, target:

Slow fire --------------------------------- 194 311Sustained fire ----------------------------- 195 311Transition firing ---------------------- 324 463Zeroing -..................... 193 310

Oral directions, target designation ------------- 225 345Orders, critique of --------------------......... 244 381Ordnance material, destruction of ----- -Appp. II 509Ordnance men ------------------------------ 151 278Organization, firing line ------------------- 151 278Organization, pit ------------------------------ 189 308Orientation:

Instructors' conference ----------------- 311,312 431,435Pit -------------------------- 191 308Positions, firing- ..............- 312 435Sighting and aiming ----------------------- 311 431

Overhead fire ---------- ---- 222 340

Pads and gloves, regulations concerning -------- 153 280Parachutists, firing on -. ..- 211 328Parallel type marksmanship field ---------------- 308 424Permanent field, preparatory marksmanship ----- 309 427Personnel, range -------------------------- 149, 150 276, 277Pit:

Construction ----------------------- 343 480Detail ------------------------- 150 277Officer ------------------------- 150 277

Duties ----------------- 190 308Operation :---------------------. 188-198 307Organization ------------------------ 189 308Orientation -. ...................._ .191 308Safety precautions ------ _ _------_------- 198 314

Plunging fire ---------------------- 222 340Pointing to direction, target designation --------- 225 345Points, reference, target designation ------------- 225 345

528

Paragraph Page

Point targets, scoring -- 239 372Positions:

Aerial target ------------------------------ 104 192Coach (of) on firing line -------------------- 178 292Cross-ankled ------------ -99-------------99 177Cross-legged .---------------...... ........99 177Crouch --------------------------- 103 189Discussion of ------------..------- 312 435Exercises ---------------------------------- 85 144Field target -------------------------- 242 378Firing, during combat . ...229, 242 255, 378Kneeling:

Alternate -. ........-------------------94 169Assuming ------------------.......... 92 163Errors in ------------------------------ 93 168From standing ---------------------- 114 212

Prone:Assuming ---------------------------- 90 158Errors in ---------------------------- 91i 161From standing_ --------------------- 113 206

Questions on .--------- -- 138 248Relaxation and bone support ---------------- 89 155Reloading (in crouch position) -------------- 117 216Sitting:

Alternate -------- _ _ ._-_ __99 177Assuming -.................. 97 172Errors in ---------------------------- 98 176From standing-1_ ..............116 215

Squatting:Assuming .----------------------------95 169Errors in -- --- 96 172From standing_ .-..................... 115 215

Standing:Assuming ..-.................... 101 185Errors in ----------------------- 102 189

Sustained fire practice .-. ........... .111 202Taking, rapidly ------ ----- 112 204

Demonstration of -. .............. 314 442Precautions:

Ammunition -------------------- -.68, 69 123

529

Paragraph Page

Precautions-ContinuedRange 157 282

Preliminary instruction, table VI ------------- 322 456Preparation for transition firing ----------------- 320 455Preparatory marksmanship:

Fields ------------------------ -307-309 424Questions on ----------------------- 138 248Training ------------------------ -74-138 127Training notes ----------------------- 263-281 402,

292-297 417Training subject schedule -------------- 255 392

Preservation of ammunition -------------------- 65 120Programs, training ----------------------- 251-253 388Progress chart, preparatory mharksmanship - ......_76 128Prone position:

Assuming ---------------------------- 90 158Demonstration -..................... 312 435Errors in -.............................. 91 161From standing -------------------------- 113 206Reloading in the -------------------------- 117 216

Public address system -------------------- 151 278

Qualification scores:Course A -........................ 141 261Course B- -------------------------------- 142 264Course C -............................. 143 265Course D_ -........................... 144 268Course E -.............................. 203 319Standard course -------------- 140 255

Questions and answers, preparatory marksmanship 138 248Quick firing, transition ..-.................. 324 463

Racks, cleaning ------------------- 151 278Range:

Determination ------------------- 214-217 331(see also Estimation)

Estimation:Advice to instructors- .. ........328, 334 468, 476By eye ------------------------- 216 332Exercises ----------------- 329-333 472Lateral distances ---------------------- 216 332

530

Paragraph Page

Range-ContinuedEstimation-Continued

Table, factors affecting ---- . .......216 332Use of tracer ammunition and 217 336

observation of fire.Firing:

Advice to instructors ----------- 317 450Examination before -- ---- 137, 316 246, 446Explanation of -------------- ---. 148 274Safety precautions for ------------- 157, 353 282, 502Subject schedule -------------------- 282 410Training notes -------------------- 283-289 412

Maximum effective ------------------------- 3 4Moving targets, effective for ------------ 204 322Personnel, duties ____---- ___ 149, 150 276, 277Procedure:

Advice to instructors ---------------- 319 453Record firing -------------------- .181-187 297

Transition firing (table VII) ---------------- 323 458Alternate ------------------------- 325 465Quick (table VIII) -------------------- 324 463

Zeroing (see Zeroing)Rate of fire:

Critique .............. ...........--.... 244 381Maximum ............. -----------. 231 362

Ready line ---------------.-- 151 278Rear Sight:

Adjustment of --------------------------- 43 80For battle sight ----------------------- 173 288For windage and elevation --- ----------120 222

Assembly .---------- -- --------------------21 43Disassembly ------------------ ---- - .13 25

Rearward movement of rifle operating parts __-_..31 69Record:

Card, zero, use of --------------------- 135, 165 241, 285Firing -------------------------- 181-187 297

Definition ----------------------- 148 274Regulations ------ ---- 186 301Small-bore, course E ---------------- 203 319Tables --------------------------- 140-144 255

531

Paragraph Page

Record-ContinuedScore card ----------------------- ------ 182 297

Red flag, procedure for using ...-. _.......192 309Reference points ------------------------------ 225 .345References, text_ - ................... App. 1 507Reflector, barrel ----------------------------- 60 104Regulations, record course ..------------ - ....... 186 301Relaxation and bone support ------------- 89 155Reloading:

Advice to instructors ----------------- 314 442Exercises ---------------------- 117 216

Restrictions on identification of firer (on range) ___186 301Rifle:

Description -------------------------- 3 4Destruction ------------------------ App. II 509Fire, effect __------------------------218-223 337How it works --------------------------- 25-32 57Loading -......................... 36 75Operation --------------------- 33-44 74

Adjusting the rear sight -------.. _-___43 80Clearing .------------------------ ... 42 80Setting at safe ------------------------ 41 79

Preparation for storage -------------------- 54 96Rests:

Location of line -_ __.1 151 278Use in low visibility firing -------------- 234 364Use in target designation --------------- 225 345

Safety precautions ------------------- 44 81Single loader, operation as ------------------ 38 77Unloading_ :------------------------- 37 76

Rifling_ ------------------------------ 3 4Rod, cleaning, M3 --------------------------- 60 104Rules for instructors ------------------ 334 476Ruptured cartridge extractor -------------- 60 104Rust preventives --------------------- 49 84

Safety:Piece -------- ------ ------- ------ ---- -26 58Precautions ------------------ 350-353 500

Field target firing --------------------- 345 486

532

Paragraph Page

Safety-ContinuedPrecautions-Continued

Handling the rifle ---------------------- 44 81Mechanical training -- -351- 500Pit detail ---------------------------- 198 314Preparatory marksmanship -_- _ __352 501Range practice -...... _ .............. 353 502References to -------------------- 206 323

Setting ----------------------------- 41 79Unseating --------------------------- 15 29

Score card:Importance ------------------------- 134 240Instruction in use --------- _____ ------ 135, 136, . 241,

147, 162, 273, 284182,315 297,445

Scorers:Duties during transition firing ----------- 323 458Location on firing line. .------------------151 278

Scores, qualifying:Course A -------------------------- _ 141 261Course B- ----------------- _ 142 264Course C- ................................ 143 265Course D .-........................ 144 268Standard course ------------------ 140 255Transition firing -------------------------- 145 270

Scoring:Landscape target firing -------------------- 239 372

Screw, gas cylinder lock, replacing the ---------- 18 38Service ammunition, precautions ----------------- 69 123Shelters --------------------------- 155 281Shot groups:

Advice to instructor_ -................. 319 453Calling the shot ---------- 106 198Calling the shot using the clock system .-. ..123 228Errors -------------------------------- 83 142Sighting and aiming exercises - ..-- ---- 81, 82 138, 140

Sight:Adjustment-__- - 120, 124, 222, 229,

125 230Alinement --------------- 79 133

533

Paragraph Page

Sight-ContinuedBattle sight for moving targets ----------- 204 322Blacking ---------------------------- 80 137Changes -------------------- 315 445Description -------------------------- 3 4Modified .---------- --------------. 13 25Picture ------------------------------ 77 130Rear:

Assembly ------------------- 21 43Disassembly --------------------- 13 25

Settings ----------------------- 171 288Use of battle sight in transition firing ------- 323 458

Sighting and aiming:Bar - -------------------------------- 79 133Exercises ------------------- _77, 79, 130,133,

81, 82 138, 140Procedure for exercises ----------------- 311 431Questions -.................... 138 248

Sighting device, M15 .-........................ 78 133Signal, fire control -...................... 226 353Silhouette target ----------------- 322 456Sitting position:

Alternate --------------------------------- 99 177Assuming ---------------------------- 97 172Errors in ---------------------------- 98 176From standing .-................. 116 215Reloading in the .------------ . ...........117 216

Sled target- --------------- _ . ...326 465Sling:

Hasty, adjustment - ... 100 180Limitation on use of the .-............. 156 281Loop, adjustment --------------- 86, 87 145,150M1, web ____----------------------------- 60 104M1907 ------------------------------- 60 104

Slow fire ------------------------------------- 176 292Coach, duties of ---------------------- 178, 179 292, 295Course E -------------------------- 203 319Misses -........................ 186 301Scoring ----------------------- 183 298Target operation -------------------- 194 311

534

Paragraph Page

Slow fire-Continued1,000-inch range ------------- . .......185 301

Small-bore firing ----------------- 2091-203 319Spare parts -------------------------- 58 103Spotter, use of -------------------------------- 192 309Spot weld -------------------------------- 90 158Squad, rifle, technique of fire .----------- ---- 230 358Squatting position:

Assuming -........................... 95 169Errors in ---------------------------- 96 172From standing -................. 115 215Reloading in ----------------------------- 117 216

Standard course ---------------------- 140 255Standing position:

Assuming -..................... 101 185Errors in -. ...............- 102 189To kneeling position .-..................... 114 212To prone position .-....................... 113 206To sitting position ------------------- 116 215To squatting position ----------------- 115 215

Stationary target ----------------------- 344 482Stock group ----------------------------------- 11 12Stoppages:

Advice to instructor ----------------------- 301 422Causes ----------------------------- 47 83Definition --------------------------------- 45 82During sustained fire .-.................... 186 301Immediate action ----------------------- 45-47 82Malfunctions (table'I) ---------------- 47 83

Storage:Ammunition ---------------------- 66 122Cleaning weapons received from ------------ 55 98Preparation of rifle for --------------------- 54 96

Subject schedule:Familiarization course ----------------- 290 414Familiarization course, marksmanship ------ 291 416Marksmanship training -..-- 255 392Mechanical training ---------------- 254 390Preparatory marksmanship training --------- 255 392Range firing- -_ ......................_287 412

535

Paragraph Page

Support, bone .. ..............................89 155Surprise target -- ---- --- ------ --- --- ---344 482Sustained fire .--- 110, 177 201, 292

Advice to instructors ----------....... 314 442Coaches' duties during ----------------- 180 296Course E ------- ------ ----- ------ ----- 203 319Exercises --- _- - ------ -- ---- -- -111, 11.8, 202, 219

119 221Marking target during -............... 195 311Misses ----- - - - - - - - - - - -186 301Positions -------------------- ------------. 112 204Questions on --- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -138 248Range procedure ------------------ 184 '298Record firing ---------------- 184 298Scoring --- -- - -- -- - -- - -- -- - -- -184 298Target, operation of --............ 195 3111,000-inch range ------ ------- - 185 301

Tables, firing:Course:

A ................-.............. 141 261Alternate transition- - --- _ ....145 270B-................................. 142 264C- ---------................... 143 265D ....................-.......... 144 268E -.......................--- --.203 319Familiarization - . .................. 146 272Preliminary instruction . .........-..322 456Standard ---------- --- . ..... -- 140 .255Transition firing -------------- 323,324 458,463

Target:Aerial --- - - - -- - - - - -- - - - -211,212 328Battlefield -------- ------------ 2 2Carrier- ..................... 196 313Description of:

A, B, E, F, A 1,000-inch targets --. ....200 317Field firing target .........---- 344 482Silhouette (E) target ---------- 322 456

.f Transition firing target ----------- 323 458Designation ----------------------- 224-227 344

536

Paragraph Page

Target-ContinuedDirection ---------------------- 225 345Equipment .................. _-_ -. ...- 199 314Field firing -------------------------- 241-247 378

Instructing notes --------------- 342-349 479Ground-towed -------------------- 326 465Landscape -------------------------- -236 368Marking, slow fire ------------------------- 194 311Marking, sustained fire ---------------- 195 311Moving ----------------------------- 204-212 322Operation in transition firing --------------- 324 463

Technique of fire:(on) Aircraft- ------------ _ . ..- 212 328Application of fire --------------------- 228-234 355Combat (enemy personnel) -. . ..............207 323Field target firing --------------------- 241-247 378Instruction notes ------------------------ 327 467Landscape target firing --------------- 235-240 368Moving targets ----------------------- 207, 210, 323, 327,

212 328Moving vehicles -------------------------- 210 327Range determination - ..._ . ........214-217 331Rifle fire, effect --------------------- 218-223 337Rifle squad -...............- 228-234 355

Telephones:(on) Firing range -................... 160 282Operators ---------------------- 151 278Use -------------------------------- -319 453

Termination of forward movement --------------- 30 67Terrain, selection of ------------------------ 342 479Thong, brush and ---------------------------- 60 104Tool, combination ------------------------- 60 104Tools, rifle __-------------------------------60 104Tracer ammunition:

Range determination with_ .... ...........-.217 336Target designation with ---------------- 225 345

Training:Aids:

Instructing notes .............-.... 300 421Rifle marksmanship --------- 346-349 491

537

Paragraph Page

,T-raining-ContinuedField target firing ------- ---------- 241 378Hours, allotment of ------------------- 252, 253 389Landscape target firing ---------------- 235 368Marksmanship ------------------- 71-203 125

Principles of ---------------------- 242 378Mechanical ----------- ----- 5 7

Training:Notes:

Familiarization ------------------- 287-289, 412,292-297 417

Mechanical training -256-262, 399,298-302 419

Preparatory marksmanship --------- 263-281 402Program ---------------------------- 251 388Range firing --------------------- 283-289 412

Phases of ---------------------------- 73 123Trajectory ---------------------- _219 237

Transition firing:Alternate course -------------------------- 325 465Courses A, B, C, D .... : ..___.-..........145 270Instruction notes ---------------------- 320-325 455Standard course- .- - 140 255Tables ---------------------- 140, 145, 255,270,

323, 324 458Trigger:

Housing group:Assembly ------------------ 19 39'Disassembly -........... ____ 11, 15 12, 29Functioning ------------------------- 26 58

Pull ----------------------------- 156 281Squeeze:

Importance of ------------------ 105 194Instruction notes ----------------- 313, 319 439Procedure in conducting exercises - 108 199Questions on ------------------------- 138 248

Two-hand loading_ -.......................... 39 77

Uniform prescribed for firing -- _ _ - --- __---152 280

538

Paragraph Page

Unit of measure:Estimation by eye -------------------- 216 332Exercises ------------------------- 330-333 432Method, 100-yard unit --------------------- 330 432Rules for instructors .... ..............-334 476Use in range estimation -- - - - -330 432

Unit range personnel -------------------- 150 277Unloading -------------- ------------ 37 76Unlocking:

Automatic -------------------- 31 69Definition ---------.-.-----.-....... 25 57

Vehicles, moving ------------------------- 209, 210 325, 327Targets -------------------- 326 465

Velocity, muzzle ----------------------------- 219 337Visibility, low, firing during -.................. 234 364

Water points, location of .-.... 197 313Weapons to be used for firing, indoor, outdoor ...237 370Web sling, adjustment of, firing positions --------- 87 150Wind:

Adjusting rear sight. for --------------------- 120 222Direction ---------------------- 126 231Effect ------------------------- 129 233Estimating speed of --------------------- 127 231Formula, examples ------------------- 131 236Rule --------------------.-.--- 130 235Speed ------------------------- 128 233Values -.................. 129 233Zeroing in a ----------------------------- 175 291

Zeroing:Advice to instructor ---------------------- 315 445Definition ------------------------ 133 237Method:

Known-distance range ---------------- 168 286Landscape target firing ---------------- 238 370When a wind is blowing --------------- 175 291When no wind is blowing -------------- 133 2371,000-inch range ---------------------- 167 286100-yard range ------------------- 169 286

539

Paragraph Page

Zeroing--ContinuedMethod-Continued

200-yard rangee_ - _._------------ - 170 287300-yard range_ d .. .......- ......... 172 288500-yard range_ -..................... 174 291

Record card, use:200-, 300-, 500-yard range_ - . ...........135 241Qualification courses ------------------- 165 285

Score card, use --.................... 136 241Target, operation during- ............. 193 310

Zone, beaten _ -- _--------------------- 221 339

* U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1951-961755

540

Documents

U. S. RIFLE CALIBER .30, M1 - 9th Infantry Division_M1_1951.pdfU. S. RIFLE CALIBER .30, M1 United States Government Printing Office Washington: 1951 . DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY AND THE